sb for jb james barker · j. progress photos 1. digital high resolution color photos of the work...

547 W. Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, IL 60661 312-322-6900 metrarail.com

July 14, 2020 Subject: Invitation for Bid No. 56358

Construction Services for Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement at Metra’s 47th Street Yard Located at 147 W. 47th Street, Chicago, IL 60609. Addendum No. 1

Dear Sir/Madam: The subject Addendum is being issued to correct, amend, add and/or delete certain words, phrases, sentences, or paragraphs in Invitation for Bid No. 56358. This Addendum No. 1 consists of:

1. Delete Exhibit R – Metra Specification No. 1651-20 – Metra/Rock Island District Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement and replace with the attached Addendum No. 1 - Exhibit R – Metra Specification No. 1651-20 – Metra/Rock Island District Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement. Revisions have been made to Specification Sections 01 05 00 – Field Engineering and 01 50 20 – Engineer’s Field Office, Type A. Specification Section 33 05 23 – Utility Casings has been deleted.

2. The attached modified Exhibit S plan sheets labeled in the upper right header as Addendum No. 1 shall replace the applicable plan sheets previously issued.

The following Exhibit S Plan Sheets have been revised and attached: C301, E501 and E502.

3. Questions Metra has received and the responses from our agency.

4. Delete Exhibit V – U.S. Department of Labor Wage Determinations and replace with the attached revised Addendum No. 1 - Exhibit V – U.S. Department of Labor Wage Determinations.

The bid opening date of July 28, 2020 remains unchanged. All addenda are to be acknowledged in Proposal/Contract, Section 4.11 Addenda. Failure to acknowledge addenda may be cause for bid to be considered non-responsive. Sincerely, James Barker Department Head Construction & Facilities Maintenance Procurement SB Attachments

James Barker SB for JB

METRA / ROCK ISLAND DISTRICT MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

REPLACEMENT

47th Street Yard

SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL

METRA SPECIFICATION NO. 1651-20

ISSUED FOR BID

Date April 2020

UPDATED 07/14/2020

Prepared by:

Burns & McDonnell

ADDENDUM NO. 1 - IFB 56358 - EXHIBIT R

INDEX


METRA / ROCK ISLAND DISTRICT MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION REPLACEMENT

NO.: DOCUMENT TITLE PAGES

Metra / Rock Island District IDX - i INDEX Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

01 00 07 PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE 1-3 00 10 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1-9 00 70 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 1-2 DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 05 00 FIELD ENGINEERING 1-3 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF SCOPE 1-4 01 12 00 MOBILIZATION 1-2 01 15 00 METRA REQUIREMENTS 1-2 01 25 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION/CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE 1-2 01 29 00 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1-2 01 31 00 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 1-3 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 1-6 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1-6 01 40 00 TESTING AND INSPECTION 1-4 01 42 00 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 1-16 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1-5 01 50 20 ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE, TYPE A 1-2 01 50 30 RAILROAD FLAGGING 1-2 01 51 00 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION 1-3 01 61 00 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS 1-4 01 63 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1-5 01 71 00 SAFETY AND LOSS PREVENTION 1-6 01 72 00 DAMAGE TO UTILITIES 1-2 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1-4 01 74 00 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 1-6 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1-4 01 78 10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1-5 DIVISON 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1-7 DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1-15 DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 23 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS 1-13


INDEX


METRA / ROCK ISLAND DISTRICT MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION REPLACEMENT

NO.: DOCUMENT TITLE PAGES

Metra / Rock Island District IDX - ii INDEX Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL 26 05 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 1-6 26 05 13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 1-7 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 1-6 26 05 26 GROUNDING 1-8 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1-6 26 05 33 RACEWAYS, BOXES, SLEEVES, SEALS, AND FITTINGS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 1-17 26 05 43 DUCT BANKS AND MANHOLES 1-4 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1-9 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES 1-6 26 08 10 ELECTRICAL TESTING 1-10 26 12 00 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 1-6 26 13 23 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR 1-20 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS 1-8 26 27 33.10 HEAD END POWER CABINET 1-5 DIVISION 33: UTILITIES 33 05 13 MANHOLES 1-3 33 05 23 UTILITY CASINGS 1-4 33 71 16.33 WOOD POLES 1-4 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS METRA TEMPORARY SHORING GUIDELINES 1-11 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDY 1-53

END OF INDEX


Metra / Rock Island District 00 10 00-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

SECTION 00 10 00

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

TABLE OF ARTICLES: PG. NO. 01 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES ............................................................................. 1 02 CHANGES IN THE WORK ................................................................................................ 5 03 CONTRACT TIME ............................................................................................................. 5 04 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION ...................................................................................... 6 05 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY .............................................................. 7 06 INSURANCE AND BONDS................................................................................................ 9 07 CORRECTION OF WORK ................................................................................................. 9 08 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS ..................................................................................... 9

01. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions Supervision and Construction

Procedures 1. Pre-construction Conference

a. After award of the contract and prior to performance of the work, METRA Engineering Construction will schedule a Pre-Construction Meeting. The following items will be reviewed and discussed: introduction of METRA’s and the Contractor’s key personnel assigned to the project, scheduling time/date for weekly field progress meetings, construction procedures, construction schedules, pay application procedures, shop drawing procedures.

B. Supervision and Construction Procedures

1. See Specification Section 01 31 00 – Construction Procedures.

C. Labor and Materials

1. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. See Specification Section 01 50 00 for Temporary Facilities and Controls.

2. METRA will not be responsible for damaged materials stored at the site, whether

caused by Acts of God, vandalism, or due to other causes. 3. All materials, products, and other items furnished under this Contract shall be new

and of current production. Discontinued products, model numbers, or other out of



production items are not acceptable. See Specification Section 01 63 00 for Substitutions and Product Options.

4. Deliver manufactured materials in original packages bearing the brand name of the

manufacturer. Seals shall be unbroken and labels intact until the time of use by the Contractor and observation by METRA’s Construction Manager. Store materials and equipment off of the ground in such a manner as to prevent the intrusion of moisture or foreign matter and damage of any kind, until ready for installation. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from the premises.

5. METRA will not pay for Contractor stored materials prior to installation. 6. The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among their employees

and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit individuals or individuals not properly skilled in the tasks assigned to them.

7. Labor shall be performed in the best, most workmanlike manner by employees

skilled in their respective trades. Standards of work required throughout shall be of such grade as will bring first class results only.

8. Mechanics whose work is unsatisfactory to METRA’s Construction Manager, or

considered by METRA’s Construction Manager to be careless, incompetent, unskilled, or otherwise objectionable, shall be dismissed from work upon written notice to do so by METRA.

D. Permits/Law Compliance

1. The Contractor must obtain all permits required for the complete performance of the

Work, as described in the Contract Documents. Submit two (2) copies of the permits to METRA’s Construction Manager prior to starting work related thereto.

2. Furnish and install a weatherproof, glass enclosed, outdoor bulletin board and

mount the same near the construction office (or on the exterior wall of the construction office), for the purpose of posting all valid permits.

3. Permits must remain posted in an exterior "visible" location, during the entire

construction period. 4. The Contractor must immediately notify METRA’s Construction Manager of the

requirements in these Specifications and/or on the Drawings, which do not strictly comply with the applicable laws, ordinances, and rules governing the Work, before proceeding with that part of the Work. Failure of the Contractor to do so must be understood as an agreement on the part of the Contractor to guarantee compliance with the requirements for Work covered by this Contract.

E. Superintendent



1. The Contractor shall employ a competent Superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the Superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

2. It is required that the Contractor's Field Superintendent be at the construction site during all normal working hours for a minimum of forty (40) hours per week and during all special operations regardless of when performed. The Field Superintendent must always be present when Subcontractors perform work at the site. The Field Superintendent is to be a “non-working” Superintendent.

F. Construction Schedules

1. See Specification Section 01 32 00 - Construction Schedules.

G. Progress Meetings

1. METRA will schedule and administer Progress Meetings each week throughout the

duration of the Work. Minutes will be written and issued by METRA’s Construction Manager, which will form part of the permanent construction records.

2. The Contractor must make physical arrangements for meetings and prepare an

agenda with copies for all participants. 3. Attendance: Job superintendent; subcontractors and manufacturers, as well as

suppliers or fabricators, if requested; METRA’s Construction Manager; and METRA personnel as appropriate to the agenda topics for each meeting.

4. Suggested Agenda: Review of previous meeting minutes, review of work progress,

status of the progress schedule and adjustments thereto, delivery schedules, submittals, maintenance of quality standards, pending changes and substitutions, and other items affecting the progress of the Work.

H. Project Data and Records

1. Books and accounts kept by the Contractor in connection with the Contract shall be open to the inspection of METRA’s Construction Manager. Promptly following the preparation of periodic payrolls of the Contractor and each of its subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish METRA’s Construction Manager with the number of certified copies required of such payrolls.

2. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall also keep an accurate record showing

the names and occupation of all laborers, workmen, and mechanics employed by them in connection with the Work, and also showing the actual hourly wages paid to each of their workers. This record shall be open at all reasonable hours to the inspection of METRA.

3. The Contractor shall, when required, furnish to METRA’s Construction Manager a

written statement, verified by affidavit, giving the names and addresses of all persons, firms, and corporations who have up to the date thereof furnished labor or



material in or about the performance of the Contract, and the amounts due or to become due to said parties.

I. Submittals

1. See Specification Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

J. Progress Photos

1. Digital high resolution color photos of the Work must be taken from different

viewpoints on the last day of each calendar month or on the first day that a request for payment is made; and thereafter on the day of each succeeding request for payment until completion of the Work has been accomplished as determined by METRA’s Construction Manager.

2. The Contractor will arrange for photos to be taken from location points designated

by METRA’s Construction Manager. 3. Photos of each view shall be submitted with monthly pay requests.

K. Use of Site

1. The Contractor will so confine their plant and equipment, the storage of materials, and the operation of their workmen to the limits of the Work and the area designated and approved by METRA’s Construction Manager.

2. No Contractor or material supplier will erect signs or advertising media of any nature

on the premises without explicit written approval from METRA’s Construction Manager.

3. METRA is an operating transportation agency and must therefore maintain

operations at all times during the construction of this Project. The Contractor must take special care to conduct operations in such a manner so as not to cause damage to equipment, or interrupt service operations.

4. The Contractor must maintain adequate protection of all work and protect METRA's

property from injury or loss arising in connection with the Contract; pay for damage, injury, death, or loss which may occur; and adequately protect all public and private property and all persons that may be affected directly or indirectly by the work performed under the Contract.

L. Cutting and Patching

1. All cutting and patching of concrete, masonry, carpentry, steel, ironwork, and

finished surfaces must be done by the Contractor at their own expense, in order that the work may be properly installed. All disturbed construction or finished areas must be made good by the Contractor using skilled craftsmen, as approved by METRA’s Construction Manager. Under no conditions may structural work be cut, except upon written approval by METRA’s Construction Manager.



2. In general, cutting through slabs and walls is to be avoided and only where absolutely necessary will the same be permitted. When this is necessary, the same must be done by the Contractor in a careful manner and the openings filled around all pipes as directed and approved by METRA’s Construction Manager.

3. The Contractor is cautioned to not do any cutting or disturbing of finished walls or

similar work unless absolutely necessary. 4. All masonry, wood, steel, ironwork, or other finishes damaged or cut into during the

installation of the Work must be restored to the original condition by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.

M. Utilities

1. The Contractor must arrange, in writing, for the proper connection of the utility

services serving the site, and must be responsible for all costs related thereto. The Contractor must submit three (3) copies of such notifications and arrangements to METRA’s Construction Manager. The Contractor must include in their pricing, all Public Utility Service costs related to the provision of the utility(s) serving the site, both temporary and permanent.

2. The Contractor is advised to make all arrangements and to take and exercise such

necessary precautions to prevent interference with, damage to, and/or destruction of utility services in the construction area. See Specification Section 01 72 00 for Damage to Utilities.

N. Access to Work

1. The Contractor shall provide METRA and METRA’s Construction Manager with

access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 02. CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. See Specification Section 01 25 00 - Contract Modification/Change Order Procedure. 03. CONTRACT TIME

A. Delays and Time Extensions

1. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of time for changes in the Work required due to the Contractor’s own fault, or which extends beyond the time extension provided in a Change Order.

2. When a change occurs due to unforeseen causes, beyond the control and without

fault or negligence of the Contractor, including, but not restricted to acts of God, acts of the Public Enemy, governmental acts, fires, floods, epidemics, strikes (except those caused by improper acts or omissions of the Contractor), extraordinary delays in delivery of materials caused by strikes, lockouts, wrecks, freight embargoes, or governmental acts, the time of completion shall be extended in whatever amount as determined by METRA to be equitable. The time extension shall be based on an



analysis of the Construction Schedules prepared by the Contractor and submitted for review along with the request for a time extension.

3. An “Act of God” means an earthquake, flood, cloudburst, cyclone, or other

cataclysmic phenomenon of nature beyond the power of the Contractor to foresee or to make preparations in defense against it. A rain, windstorm, or other phenomenon of normal intensity, based on National Weather Bureau Reports, for the particular locality and for the particular season of the year in which the work is being performed, shall not be construed as an “Act of God” and no extension of time will be granted for the delays resulting. No extensions of time will be granted for a delay or suspension of the work due to the fault of the Contractor.

4. No extension of time on account of a delay due to unforeseen causes will be granted

unless written application is immediately filed with METRA’s Construction Manager. After each unforeseen delay is filed, METRA shall review the request and give the Contractor written notice of an extension to the contract date, or hold the request for later consideration.

5. In the event of an inexcusable delay by the Contractor, METRA may direct that the

Work be accelerated by means of overtime, additional crews or additional shifts, or re-sequencing of the Work. The cost of overtime must be included in the Contract lump sum price. No additional payments will be made because of overtime Work required.

04. PROGRESS PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

A. General Requirements

1. METRA may withhold any payment to the Contractor for unsatisfactory work, if and for so long as the Contractor fails to perform any of its material obligations hereunder, or otherwise is in default under any of the provisions of the Contract Documents, subject to the requirements of applicable law.

B. Schedule of Values

1. The Contractor shall submit to METRA’s Construction Manager, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as required. This schedule shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Application for Payment.

C. Applications for Payment

1. Payment to the Contractor is to be made monthly and is to be based upon an estimate of work accomplished as determined and approved by METRA’s Construction Manager. At least ten (10) days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to METRA’s Construction Manager an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the Schedule of Values for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment, such as requisitions from subcontractors and material suppliers.



2. Metra, under no circumstances, will advance payments to the Contractor. The

progress payment method described herein, shall be adhered to in all instances.

D. Inspection of Work

1. See Specification Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.

E. Final Completion and Final Payment

1. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of the final Application for Payment, METRA’s Construction Manager will promptly make such inspection, and when METRA’s Construction Manager finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, METRA’s Construction Manager will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of their on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due to the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is payable. Also, once a final Certificate for Payment has been issued, the Contractor should sign and issue a release to METRA, releasing the Agency from any and all further claims by the Contractor.

05. PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

A. Safety

1. See Specification Section 01 71 00 - Safety and Loss Prevention.

B. Site Security

1. The Contractor must secure the site at all times. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of their equipment and belongings on the site. METRA provides protection only for its own facilities and METRA will not be responsible for site security.

C. Fire Protection

1. Fire protection must comply with local fire regulations and with the specific

regulations of METRA. 2. Provide an ample number of suitable fire extinguishers rated for the specific potential

fire hazards present on the site. 3. Combustible materials must be removed from areas in which welding or cutting is to

take place, and flameproof tarpaulins and dry chemical extinguishers must be readily available.

4. Not more than one day's supply of flammable liquids including oil, gasoline, paint,

or solvent must be brought onto the site at one time. Liquids with a flash point of



140o F (or below), must be confined to UL approved safety cans. Bulk supplies of flammable liquids must be well removed from structures and storage yards.

5. No open fires will be permitted. 6. The burning of refuse shall not be permitted.

D. Flagging

1. Road: See Specification Section 01 51 00 - Traffic Control and Protection. 2. Track: See Specification Section 01 50 30 - Railroad Flagging.

E. Hazardous Materials

1. The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the

Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents, and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance encountered on the site by the Contractor, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the affected area upon recognizing the condition and report the condition to both METRA and METRA’s Construction Manager in writing.

2. Except as may be required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor agrees that it shall not transport to, use, generate, dispose of, or install at the Project site any hazardous substance, except in accordance with applicable Environmental Laws. Further, in performing the Work, the Contractor shall not cause any release of hazardous substances into, or contamination of, the environment including the soil, atmosphere, and any water course or ground water, except in accordance with the applicable Environmental Laws or as required by the Contract Documents.

3. For the purposes of this Contract, the term “hazardous substance” shall mean and

include, but shall not be limited to, any element, constituent, chemical, substance, compound, or mixtures, which are defined in or included under or regulated by any local, state, or federal law, rule, ordinance, by-law, or regulation pertaining to environmental contamination, clean-up, or disclosure.

F. Environmental Protection

1. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State, and Local Regulations to provide

for the abatement and prevention of pollution by regulating and controlling the quantity and quality of stormwater runoff and wastes admitted to or discharged into jurisdictional waters. The Contractor shall also comply with the water pollution regulations of Illinois, established by the State of Illinois Pollution Control Board and with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s Federal Water Pollution Control act, and all amendments thereof.



2. Compliance with air pollution requirements established by local agencies, the State of Illinois Pollution Control Board, and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency is also the Contractor’s responsibility.

3. Noise pollution due to the work performed under this Contract shall be within the

limits established by Local, State, and Federal Agencies. 06. INSURANCE AND BONDS

A. The Contractor is required to meet all insurance requirements as set out in the Agreement. See Specification Section 00 70 00 for METRA’s General Conditions.

07. CORRECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by METRA’s Construction Manager or METRA, or Work failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after sufficient Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for METRA’s Construction Manager’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

B. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction,

whether completed or partially completed, by METRA or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is defective, or otherwise, not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. If METRA prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, METRA may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. The Contractor shall pay all costs and expenses incurred by METRA in the evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work, as well as the amount by which the value of the Work is diminished by the defect.

08. MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Tests and Inspections

1. See Specification Section 01 40 00 - Testing and Inspection.

B. Quality Management Program

1. See Exhibit U - Quality Management Plans in the Invitation for Bid (IFB).

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 00 70 00-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

SECTION 00 70 00

GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section specifies the requirements for METRA’s General Conditions. The work shall consist of the administration, supervision, utilities, overhead, and other like items necessary to support the operation of the Contract.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Supplementary Conditions Section 00 10 00

B. Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 50 00 C. Project Record Documents Section 01 78 10

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 MEASUREMENT

A. Measurement will be based on the percentage of work completed and dependent on

the Engineer’s monthly review of Project Record Drawings and Specifications. Project

Record Drawings must be maintained current with construction operations, and all

changes must be documented in accordance with Specification Section 01 78 10.

The Contractor will provide the drawings for review on site prior to the approval of each

monthly pay request.

4.02 PAYMENT

A. The work covered under this section shall be paid for at the Contract lump sum price,

as shown in the Schedule of Values for General Conditions.

B. The amount that the Contractor will receive payment for will be limited to two percent (2%) of the amount computed from the total contract bid less the cost of insurance and bonds.


Metra / Rock Island District 00 70 00-2 GENERAL CONDITIONS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

C. Partial payment of the lump sum amount bid for General Conditions, not exceeding two percent (2%), will be made over the life of the contract in payments proportional to the percentage of completion based on the Contractor's approved monthly invoice. Progress payments will be contingent upon the Engineer’s review and acceptance of the Project Record Drawings and Specifications.

4.03 INSURANCE AND BOND

A. Payment for insurance and bond will be made as a lump sum amount against the invoices and certificates presented by the Contractor from the insurance and bonding companies.

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 05 00 - 1 FIELD ENGINEERING Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

DIVISION 01: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01 05 00

FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This Section specifies the administrative and procedural

requirements for field engineering services, including but not necessarily limited to land survey work, civil engineering services, structural engineering services, and electrical engineering services. The work under this Section includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment for maintaining existing survey control points; locate, establish, and lay out lines, levels, and grades required for the proper installation of the work; survey and prepare as-built plans; final survey; property line survey; install permanent survey markers; and other appurtenant services required for the proper installation of the work.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. PROJECT CLOSEOUT Section 01 77 00 B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01 78 10 C. DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Illinois and acceptable to the Engineer. Ultimate responsibility for all layouts rests with the Contractor.

B. Engage a Professional Engineer of the discipline required, registered in the

State of Illinois, to perform any required engineering services. 1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the name, address, and telephone number of the Surveyor and

Engineers before starting any survey and engineering work. B. Upon request, submit documentation verifying the accuracy of the survey work. C. Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and

locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.

1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Maintain a complete and accurate log of all control and survey work as it

progresses.

B. Submit Project Record Documents per the provisions of Section 01 78 10.



1.06 EXAMINATION: A. Verify the locations of survey control points prior to starting any work. B. Promptly notify the Engineer of any discrepancies discovered.

1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS:

A. The Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. B. The control datum for the survey should be indicated on the Drawings. C. Lateral and vertical readings must be taken at the tops of sheet piling, at the

walers, and at ground level immediately after ground anchors have been installed, tested, and accepted as specified in Division 02 of the specs.

D. Protect survey control points prior to starting any site work and preserve

permanent reference points (Bench Marks) during construction. E. Promptly report to the Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference points,

or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons. F. Replace dislocated survey control points and permanent reference points

based on the original survey control. Do not make any changes without prior written notice to the Engineer.

G. Install permanent survey markers as specified in Division 02 of the specs.

1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Provide field engineering services and utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

B. Establish elevations, lines, and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation

and other similar appropriate means:

1. Site improvements including pavement, curbing, and sidewalks; stakes for grading, sub-ballast, fill, and topsoil placement; and utility locations, slopes, top of grate, and invert elevations.

2. Structural improvements include all bridges and retaining walls.

C. Periodically verify layouts by similar means.

D. In addition to topographical survey, provide a Level A subsurface utility locate as

identified in C301. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED)



PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 10 00 - 1 SUMMARY OF SCOPE Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY OF SCOPE

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section contains a general summary of the work to be performed by the Contractor under this Contract.

B. Work described in the Contract Documents is to be performed in such a manner as to not disrupt or interfere with the day-to-day operations, equipment, or services of the rail line. The Contractor's requirements for work space access and maintaining the work schedule are to be worked out and coordinated with METRA.

1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Name: 47th Street Yard – Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

B. Consultant’s Name: Burns & McDonnell, Delta Engineering

C. Project Location: 147 W. 47th St, Chicago, IL 60609

D. The summary of the scope of work is as follows:

The Contractor shall provide all materials, tools, equipment, labor, supervision, coordination, permits, and Engineering Design necessary complete work as listed below.

In general terms, the Work includes, but is not limited to, the following items:

A. Providing temporary power provisions throughout the course of the

project to maintain service during yard business hours Shutdowns shall be scheduled at a minimum of one week in advance and shall occur during “Off-Hours” as identified on drawing G100. Include all premium time necessary.

B. Business hours are considered 6AM-5PM CT. All trackwork and outages must take place outside of business hours. All other work can be completed during business hours.

C. Replace existing medium voltage metal-enclosed switchgear with new walk in enclosure and metal-enclosed switchgear.

D. Replace overhead distribution lines with new poles and Hendrix-system covered conductors. Relocate aerial communications cables to new poles.



E. Replace existing pole-mounted transformers with padmount transformers.

F. Install new TUSS-2 wayside power unit substation north of existing TUSS-2 location.

G. Install new wayside power boxes and ancillary equipment as indicated in specifications and drawings.

The Contractor is responsible for all Work required to provide the complete design and construction of the following items as shown on the plans, or as specified in these detailed specifications.

E. The Contractor shall perform this work in conjunction with the sequencing/phasing identified in the Contract Documents.

F. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits for completing this work.

1.03 CONTRACT

A. Definitions. The following terms are used throughout the Contract Documents. The work will be governed in accordance with these definitions:

1. Fabricated: “Fabricated” pertains to items specifically assembled or made of selected materials or components in order to meet individual design requirements.

2. Manufactured: “Manufactured” means standard units, usually mass produced by an established manufacturer of the respective item.

3. Provide: “Provide” means to furnish and install.

4. Shop Fabricated or Shop Made: “Shop Fabricated or Shop Made” refers to items made by a Contractor or Subcontractor in their own Shop.

1.04 WORK SEQUENCE

A. See Specification Section 01 32 00 - Construction Schedules.

B. All Work shall be coordinated with METRA’s Construction Manager.

1.05 WORK BY OWNER

A. Owner shall provide services as identified in work description matrix found on drawing C302.

1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. Confine operations at the site to areas permitted by:

1. Law

2. Permits

3. Contract



4. METRA's Representative

5. The required use of adjacent existing facilities

B. METRA'S Construction Manager:

1. Confer with METRA's Construction Manager and obtain full knowledge of all site rules and regulations affecting the work.

2. Conform to site rules and regulations while engaged in project construction.

3. Site rules and regulations take precedence over others that may exist outside of such jurisdiction.

4. Employee List: METRA's Construction Manager may examine the Contractor's list of employees, including those of its subcontractors and their agents.

5. Vehicle use: Rigidly enforce the following:

a. Keep all vehicles, mechanized or motorized equipment locked and secured at all times when parked and unattended to on METRA's premises.

b. Do not, under any circumstances, leave any vehicle unattended with the motor or engine running, or with the ignition key in place.

c. Parking: This is not permitted on METRA's premises.

d. All traffic control is subject to METRA's Construction Manager's approval.

C. Do not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

D. Limit the use of the site for work and storage. METRA will designate at the Pre-Construction Conference the site restrictions that the Contractor shall comply with, including:

1. Access to the work site.

2. Area(s) for the storage of materials, equipment, and tools.

3. Use of sanitary facilities.

E. The Contractor and METRA’s Construction Manager will provide reasonable access to the site and shall not prohibit nor interfere with lawfully conducted inspections or site visits by properly identified representatives of regulatory agencies or collective bargaining units.

1. Notwithstanding the above, METRA's regulations governing site security shall be observed.

2. All site visitors shall comply with personal protection regulations, including hard hats, safety shoes, earplugs, and safety glasses.



3. Reasonable proof of identification and signature to the visitor's log may be required of any visitors to the Contractor's Site Superintendent and METRA's Construction Manager.

F. Fire Protection

1. See Specification Section 00 10 00 - Supplementary Conditions. PART 2: PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3: EXECUTION - NOT USED PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - NOT USED

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 12 00 - 1 MOBILIZATION Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 12 00

MOBILIZATION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. This section specifies requirements for Mobilization. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for preparatory work; the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site; the establishment of offices, buildings, and other facilities necessary to work on the project; and for all other work or operations that must be performed, or costs which must be incurred, when beginning work on the project.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01 50 00

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED)

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 MEASUREMENT

A. No separate measurement shall be made for Mobilization.

4.02 PAYMENT

A. The work covered under this section shall be paid for at the Contract lump sum price as shown in the Schedule of Values for Mobilization.


Metra / Rock Island District 01 12 00 - 2 MOBILIZATION Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

4.03 PAYMENT SCHEDULE

A. The amount that the Contractor will receive payment for, in accordance with the following schedule, will be limited to four percent (4%) of the total contract bid, less the cost of bonds and insurance.

B. Partial payment of the bid lump sum amount for Mobilization, not exceeding four percent (4%) of the total Contract bid less the cost of bonds and insurance, will be made in accordance with the following schedule:

1. With the Contractor’s first pay request and upon furnishing the Engineer's Field Office, per Specification Section 01 50 20, 10% of this item will be paid with the Contractor’s first monthly invoice.

2. When 5% or more of the original Contract amount is earned, not including bonds and insurance, an additional 15% of this item will be paid.



5. The balance of the bid lump sum amount for Mobilization, and not exceeding four percent (4%) of the total Contract bid less the cost of bonds and insurance, will be paid over the duration of the Contract in payments proportional to the percentage of completion, based on the Contractor's approved monthly invoice.

C. Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or preclude partial payments for other items as provided for by the Contract.

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 15 00 - 1 METRA REQUIREMENTS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 15 00

METRA REQUIREMENTS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 RAILROAD COORDINATION

A. Railroad Flagman Requirements

1. See Section 01 50 30 - Railroad Flagging.

B. Work Curfew

1. No work (within 25 feet of the track) shall be done during business hours as defined in SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY OF SCOPE. The exact curfew for each location MUST be established with the Railroad/Operating Department before the Work is started.

2. If adequate separate temporary facilities are established then the work curfew may not apply.

C. Passenger/Pedestrian Protection

1. All work must be protected by a barricade system and proper signage, as required by METRA’s Authorized Representative. This protection is to be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. No barricading can be placed closer than 10’-0” to the centerline of the nearest track. Excavations will be covered and/or completely surrounded with a positive barrier.

D. Work Scheduling and Notifications

1. Work must be scheduled and progress in such a manner as to reduce the impact on the commuting public. All requests to close portions of a station platform must be scheduled in advance and permission granted by the METRA’s Authorized Representative. A copy of the weekly schedule of activities must be presented to METRA’s Representative prior to that week's activities. A clear understanding of the Contractor's activities and permission to proceed with construction work that will impact commuters must be obtained. Only a portion of a platform may be taken out of service at any given time for reconstruction.

E. Failure to Comply

1. Should there be any violation of these restrictions, a Stop Work Order will be issued and all work will cease until METRA and its railroading partners are satisfied that all problems have been resolved and the requirements of this specification are met. No costs of a work stoppage may be passed on to Metra, its railroading partners, or the communities affected by the Project.


Metra / Rock Island District 01 15 00 - 2 METRA REQUIREMENTS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

2. See Section 01 71 00 - Safety and Loss Prevention, for the steps that will occur when a Stop Work Order is issued.

F. Weekend, Holiday, and Night Work

1. The Contractor may be allowed to work weekends, holidays, or after hours at night. All arrangements must be made three (3) days in advance for site access, station security, and lock-up. All work must be approved in advance and coordinated with METRA (or its railroad partner’s) operations.

1.02 AS-BUILT PLANS

A. See Section 01 78 10 - Project Record Documents.

1.03 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

A. See Section 01 71 00 - Safety and Loss Prevention. In addition, adhere to the following:

1. If it is in the opinion of METRA’s Representative that any of the Contractor's (or its subcontractor's) equipment is unsafe for use on railroad right-of-way, the Contractor at the request of METRA’s Representative, shall remove such equipment from the railroad right-of-way.

2. If METRA’s Representative has given the Contractor permission to use certain equipment on any track at the job site, the Contractor shall ensure that each and all of its employees responsible for operating any motive power including (without limitation), any hi-rail equipment (such equipment hereafter being referred to as "Motive Power") on any track of the railroad’s, will be trained to know and understand and comply with METRA's operating rules applicable to the operation and use of such Motive Power.

3. In the event that the Contractor's employees use any such Motive Power to move rail cars or other rail-bound equipment equipped with air brakes, the Contractor shall further ensure that the employees are trained to know and understand and comply with METRA's rules for handling such Motive Power, cars, and equipment and that the Contractor's employees will perform all required tests of the operating system of any Motive Power, cars, and other equipment before and after movement. The Contractor shall acknowledge receipt of METRA's applicable rules governing:

a. The operation and use of Motive Power, cars, and other equipment and the movement of such Motive Power, cars, and equipment by rail.

b. The operation and use of any hi-rail vehicles off of the railroad.

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 25 00 - 1 CONTRACT MODIFICATION/ Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE


SECTION 01 25 00

CONTRACT MODIFICATION/CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

PART 1: GENERAL


A. Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order or a Contract Modification.

B. If the construction change provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; or a cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually accepted fixed or percentage fee.

C. A request for a Contract Modification can be initiated by METRA, METRA’s Construction Manager, or the Contractor to immediately authorize any changes in the Work, Contract Sum, or Contract Time. The document is signed by both METRA and the Contractor. All Contract Modifications are later formalized and shall be incorporated into a Contract Change Order towards the end of the Project.

D. METRA will approve prepared Contract Modifications as required, in cooperation with and based on the recommendation of METRA’s Construction Manager. All costs for Contract Modification additions or deletions shall be based upon the latest edition of R. S. MEANS Co., Inc. books.

E. All proposals for a change involving an increase or decrease in the amount of the Contract Sum shall be submitted by the Contractor in a completely itemized breakdown form, which shall include but not be limited to the following: Material quantities and input prices, labor costs, construction equipment costs, and any general conditions.

F. Contract Modifications will be approved when an unforeseen field condition arises on the construction site and action is required to maintain job progress. They will also be approved when changes in time schedules or budgets are required. No work can proceed without proper authorization.

G. In all cases, METRA shall prepare and issue the formal Contract Change Order as is appropriate to each project. A Change Order is a written instrument signed by both METRA and the Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: the Change in Work; the amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and the extent of the adjustment, if any, to the Contract Time. Information, sketches, revised drawings, proposals, cost analysis, and supporting back-up shall be furnished by the Contractor.


Metra / Rock Island District 01 25 00 - 2 CONTRACT MODIFICATION/ Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURE

H. Two (2) copies of the Contract Change Order shall be sent to the Contractor for acceptance and returned to METRA. After all copies are executed, one (1) copy will be returned to the Contractor.

I. METRA’s Construction Manager has the authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time, which is not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES

A. If a Contract Modification is required by the Contractor, the Contractor shall send the request, complete with all pertinent drawings, prospectus, and cost data to METRA’s Construction Manager.

B. If a Contract Modification is initiated by METRA’s Construction Manager or METRA, the Contractor will be informed if the requested change affects work scheduled to commence before the approved Contract Modification can be issued.

C. METRA’s Construction Manager will review all Contract Modification requests and forward them to METRA with recommendations.

D. If, in the opinion of METRA, a formal Contract Change Order is appropriate, METRA will prepare and issue the Contract Change Order.

E. METRA's review time will generally be fifteen (15) working days from the time of receipt; however, this time cannot be guaranteed.

F. Submittals by regular U.S. mail are at the Contractor's own risk. METRA will not be responsible for time losses and costs due to lost submittals or transmittal delay problems.

G. The Contractor shall not proceed with the fabrication or installation of equipment or material affected by any requested Contract Modification until the request has been formally rejected or approved.

H. All Contract Modifications shall be resolved within thirty (30) working days.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 29 00 - 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 29 00

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

PART 1: GENERAL


A. This Section specifies the administrative and procedural requirements governing the handling, coordination, and processing of measurement and payment.

1.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES

A. The Contract is a lump sum contract divided into lump sum items of work, as listed on the Schedule of Values.

B. Lump Sum payment for items of work will be full compensation for completing the work in compliance with the Contract Documents, inclusive of furnishing all manpower, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations relative to the construction of this project. Payment will be made on a percent complete basis.

C. In order to determine the work percent complete, work items may be measured using appropriate units or by other determinations as necessary. METRA’s Construction Manager will verify the Contractor's measurement and percent complete status indicated on each Application for Payment. METRA’s Construction Manager's decisions with respect to percent complete status of the work will be final after three (3) working days, if the Contractor does not submit a written notice as defined in the following paragraph.

D. If the Contractor differs with METRA’s Construction Manager on the determination of quantities and percent complete status, it must notify METRA in writing within three (3) working days from the time that the Contractor is informed of the decision by METRA’s Construction Manager. Otherwise, METRA will not consider any such difference as a claim for payment.

E. Work items that are required but whose quantities are not shown on the Contract Drawings will not be measured, but will be considered incidental to the Contract or incidental to the specified items on the Schedule of Values as noted. No additional compensation will be allowed.

F. Note that the repair of utilities, surface features, existing structures, etc., which is required due to damage resulting from construction activities that is beyond the limits of work or payment as defined on the Contract Drawings or herein, shall be performed by the Contractor at no cost to METRA.

G. All quantities shown in the Contract Documents are furnished for information only. The Contractor is responsible for verifying all quantities to estimate and complete the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.


Metra / Rock Island District 01 29 00 - 2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

H. METRA reserves the right to alter the Drawings, Specifications, modify incidental work as may be necessary, and increase or decrease the quantities of work to be performed. Changes in the work shall not be considered as a waiver of any conditions of the Contract nor invalidate any provisions thereof. When changes result in revisions in the quantities of work to be performed, the Contractor will accept payment according to the unit prices in the Schedule of Values.

I. The Contractor shall take no advantage of any apparent error or omission in the Contract Drawings or Specifications, and METRA’s Construction Manager shall be permitted to make corrections and interpretations as may be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit measurement of work completed within the Contractor's Application for Payment Form. METRA will not pay for stored materials.

B. The Pay Estimate submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

1.04 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, and other Division 1 Specification sections apply to the work of this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall maintain daily records as back-up material, for the measurement of work completed and/or material stored. The Contractor shall present daily records upon the request of METRA’s Construction Manager.

PART 4: PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 31 00 - 1 CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 31 00

CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

PART 1: GENERAL


A. It is imperative that the Contractor complete all construction operations as shown on the Drawings and specified in these Detailed Specifications, without interruption to METRA commuter service or any freight service operating on this line.

B. The roadways in the vicinity of the project must be kept open to pedestrians and street traffic in each direction at all times, except as otherwise specified elsewhere or herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY OF SCOPE

B. Section 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor will be required to submit detailed work plans for major operations that affect METRA rail service on METRA commuters. As directed by the Engineer or listed elsewhere in these specifications, plans showing barricades, signage, etc., shall be submitted. At least one (1) week notification is required for changes to commuter access.

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, as well as for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.



B. As work progresses, changes or modifications in such procedures, methods, and equipment may be required. In such an event, further work shall be performed only in accordance with such changes or modifications as submitted to and approved by METRA’s Construction Manager in writing.

C. In general, the Contractor shall follow the procedure and sequence of operations as specified in the Contract Documents for the construction of the Work. The order in which the various operations or stages are specified is based on the requirement that railroad and vehicular traffic must be maintained at all times with a minimum amount of inconvenience or interference to train and vehicle movements. Only the principal items of work to be performed are listed or shown, and it shall be understood that it is not the intention to mention every detail of the work or to enumerate all of the items of the Contract that may enter into its completion.

D. The Contractor shall obtain from the affected Municipality and the Illinois Department of Transportation (IDOT) any permission and permits for street closures necessary to complete the Work. A minimum of one (1) week advanced notice must be given to the Municipality prior to any closure.

E. Regardless of the order in which the construction operations are listed, the Contractor will be expected to concurrently proceed with as many construction operations as possible in order to expedite the completion of the Contract. Prior to the Contractor starting work, a joint conference shall be held between all interested parties, at which time a final schedule of operations shall be adopted. After this schedule has been adopted, no deviations by the Contractor will be allowed without written approval from METRA’s Construction Manager. No work shall be performed before a notice to proceed is given by METRA’s Construction Manager and METRA.

F. The materials and labor required to perform the work in each stage shall be furnished by the one performing the work, unless otherwise specified herein.

G. The Contractor has the responsibility to ensure that all material suppliers and Subcontractors, their agents, and employees adhere to the Contract Documents, and that they order materials on time, taking into account the current market and delivery conditions, so that materials are provided as needed per the schedule. The Contractor shall be responsible for the space requirements, locations, and routing of all materials and equipment required under this agreement.

H. If at any time before the commencement or during the progress of the Work the materials and equipment used or to be used appear to METRA’s Construction Manager as insufficient or improper for securing the quality of work required or the required rate of progress, METRA’s Construction Manager may order the Contractor to increase its efficiency or to improve the character of its equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such order. However, the failure of METRA’s Construction Manager to demand an increase of efficiency or improvement shall not release the Contractor from its obligation to secure the quality of work or rate of progress required under this Contract.

I. The Contractor shall be responsible to METRA for acts and omissions of its employees, Subcontractors and their employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.



J. All employees and subcontractors of the Contractor shall be qualified by both training and experience to perform their assigned tasks.

K. The Contractor will not permit at any time alcohol, controlled substances, or firearms to be present at the Project Site.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 32 00 - 1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 32 00

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. This section specifies the requirements for the preparation and submittal of construction schedules.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES Section 01 31 00

B. SUBMITTALS Section 01 33 00

1.03 SUBMITTALS INCLUDED

A. The Contractor shall submit the following items as specified herein:

1. Preliminary Project Schedule

2. Updated Progress Schedules

3. Schedule of Submittals

4. Major Products Delivery Schedule

5. Narrative Reports

6. Work Schedule for the following two-week period in a format acceptable to METRA, at regularly scheduled project meetings.

B. Submit all required submittals to METRA’s Construction Manager for their review and approval.

1. Submit a Preliminary Project Schedule with Narrative Report within fifteen (15) calendar days after Notice to Proceed. After METRA review, submit a revised Preliminary Project Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, Major Products Delivery Schedule, and Narrative Report within fifteen (15) calendar days, modified to accommodate the revisions recommended by METRA’s Construction Manager.

2. Submit updated Progress Schedules including the master Project Schedule, Schedule of Submittals, major Products Delivery Schedule, and a Narrative Report



to METRA’s Construction Manager on a monthly basis. Indicate changes occurring since the previous submission, revised projections of progress and completion, and other identifiable changes. Progress Schedules must show the approved Preliminary Project Schedule dates directly above the actual start and finish dates for the work performed.

1.04 FORMAT

A. Prepare a network analysis system using the critical path method.

B. The system shall consist of diagrams and accompanying mathematical analysis.

C. In addition to the systems detailed below, the Contractor shall furnish a bar chart covering all construction activities.

1.05 CONTENT

A. General: The network shall show the order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished as planned by the Contractor. The basic concept of a network analysis diagram will be followed to show how the start of a given activity is dependent on the completion of preceding activities and how its completion restricts the start of subsequent activities.

B. The detailed network activities shall include, in addition to construction activities, the submittal and approval of samples of materials and shop drawings, the procurement of critical materials and equipment, fabrication of special material, and their installation and testing. All activities of METRA and METRA’s Construction Manager that affect progress and contract required dates for completion of all or parts of the work shall be shown. The selection and number of activities shall be subject to METRA’s Construction Manager's approval, but shall not be less than a minimum of twenty (20) activities.

1. Identify each activity by major specification section number.

2. Identify work of separate stages, buildings, type of work, and other logically grouped activities.

C. Activity Schedule Tabulation

1. The following information shall be furnished as a minimum for each activity:

a. Preceding and following (i, j) event number

b. Activity description

c. Estimated duration of activities in calendar days

d. Earliest start date (by calendar date)

e. Earliest finish date (by calendar date)

f. Actual start date (by calendar date)



g. Actual finish date (by calendar date)

h. Latest start date (by calendar date)

i. Latest finish date (by calendar date)

j. Slack or float

k. Percentage of activity completed

l. The activity schedule shall list the activities in sorts or groups as follows:

1) By the preceding event number from lowest to highest and then in the order of the following event number.

2) By the amount of slack, then in order of preceding event number.

3) By responsibility, in order of earliest allowable start dates.

4) In order of latest allowable start dates, then in order of preceding event numbers, and then in order of succeeding event numbers.

D. Detailed Network Arrow Diagram

1. Detailed network diagrams shall be time scaled and shall be drafted to show a continuous flow from left to right with no arrows from right to left.

2. Related activities shall be grouped on the network.

3. The critical path shall be plotted generally along the center of the sheet with paths of increasing float placed towards the top and/or bottom.

4. Clearly indicate, by symbol (or other means), the critical path of the project.

5. The following information shall be shown on the diagram for each activity:

a. Event numbers

b. Activity description

c. Group, stage, or area identification

d. Activity duration

e. Weekends and holidays shall be indicated.

f. An allowance for inclement weather during the construction season (mid-March to mid-November) shall be included on the basis of an average of one rain day for each eleven (11) working days. An allowance for winter work and the activities that the Contractor intends to complete during the winter months (mid-November to mid-March) shall also be included. METRA’s Construction Manager reserves the right of Approval to the Contractor's allowance for winter



work. No sheeting or excavation adjacent to track shall be performed during the winter.

g. Approval of the detailed arrow diagram by METRA’s Construction Manager and METRA shall be accomplished prior to the Contractor's first payment submittal and approval.

h. Subsequent review and approval of the Detailed Network Arrow Diagram shall be done on a basis as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager and METRA.

E. Schedule of Submittals

1. List all required submittals in sorts or groups as follows:

a. By specification section number from lowest to highest, then in order of earliest start date, and then in order of i, j event number.

b. By order of the earliest start date and then in order of i, j event numbers.

F. Major Products Delivery Schedule

1. List all delivery dates of major products, equipment, and materials in sorts or groups as follows:

a. By specification section number from lowest to highest, then in order of earliest start (delivery date) date, and then in order of i, j event number.

1.06 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES

A. Indicate the progress of each activity to the date of submittal, as well as the projected completion date of each activity.

B. Identify activities modified since the previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes.

1. Inclusion in the network and use of revised logic and/or duration time estimates for updating, whether furnished by the Contractor or by METRA’s Construction Manager, shall not be construed as extensions of time to the dates required in the Contract.

2. Extensions of time are to be granted by Contract Modification or Change Order only.

3. The Contractor shall submit a narrative report along with the updated schedules as required, which shall include:

a. A description of problem areas.

b. Current and anticipated delaying factors and their impacts.

c. An explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed.



d. The total percentage of all work completed as of the report date.

e. Progress along the critical path in terms of days ahead or behind the allowable dates.

f. An explanation of how the Contractor plans to get the project back on schedule and meet the completion date.

4. If METRA’s Construction Manager finds the proposed schedule to not be acceptable, it may require the Contractor to submit a new schedule. If a satisfactory plan is not agreed upon, then METRA’s Construction Manager may direct the Contractor to increase its work force, construction equipment, or number of work shifts without any additional cost to METRA.

5. Failure to Meet the Schedule

a. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the approved construction schedule shall be considered grounds for determination by METRA that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as will ensure its completion within the contract time.

b. A delay of thirty (30) calendar days or more, based on the construction schedule’s critical path, shall be sufficient cause for METRA to notify the Contractor's bonding firm and other involved parties.

6. Extension of Time

a. General: Extensions of time are to be granted by Contract Modification or Change Order only. All requests by the Contractor for extensions of time are to be submitted to METRA’s Construction Manager for review and approval. All pertinent supporting data shall accompany requests for time extensions.

b. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the Construction Schedule - CPM (Critical Path Method) shall be considered grounds for determination by METRA that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the work with such diligence as will ensure its completion within the time specified.

1.07 SCHEDULING AND OPERATING RESTRICTIONS

A. A horizontal construction clearance of 10'-0" from the centerline of any active track in the area shall be maintained.

B. Additional scheduling restrictions must be complied with when noted on the plans.

C. The Contractor must comply with scheduling restrictions relating to work permits and work hour restrictions by governing authorities, at no additional cost to METRA.

D. Violations of scheduling restrictions related to METRA’s track operations shall be subject to a penalty.



PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 33 00 - 1 SUBMITTALS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 33 00

SUBMITTALS

PART 1: GENERAL


A. Furnish work-related submittals in the following categories, to METRA’s Construction Manager:

1. Shop Drawings: Six (6) prints.

2. Product Data: Six (6) sets.

a. Samples: Six (6) sets.

b. Miscellaneous Submittals: As required.

1) The Contractor shall provide METRA with final "PROJECT RECORD" drawings, as specified in SECTION 01 78 10 - Project Record Documents.

B. Furnish a complete schedule of all work-related submittals that are to be made to METRA’s Construction Manager. The submittals are to be reviewed at the Pre-Construction Conference. The Contractor shall revise the schedule as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager and resubmit it for final approval.

C. The requirements of this section of Division 01 shall supersede all other requirements for submittals that may be specified in other Divisions.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Administrative Submittals: For non-work-related submittals including, but not necessarily limited to notices, claims, waivers, requests, cost estimates and proposals, payment applications and sworn statements, affidavits, performance and payment bonds, statements of business organization, copies of subcontracts, insurance certificates, assignments, records of costs and Change Orders, inspection reports and certifications from governing authorities, permits, accident and loss reports, daily progress reports, sequence and time schedules, monthly progress reports and listings, the schedule of values, unit prices, listing of principal products, the schedule of required submittals, and other administrative submittals as applicable to the work, the Contractor shall refer to other Sections in these Detailed Specifications.

1. Contract Modification/Change Order Procedure - Section 01 25 00

1.03 PAY REQUESTS

A. Photocopies of canceled checks from the Contractor to its subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, etc., shall accompany each pay request. The cancelled



checks shall be submitted for the month previous to the waiver and shall be for the amount shown on the pay request minus retainage. That is, with Pay Request No. 3, submit waivers for Pay Request No. 2 and cancelled checks from Pay Request No. 1.

B. The Contractor awarded the Contract will be expected to furnish with its first pay request a breakdown of how much of each pay item will be paid to each subcontractor, such that METRA will be able to track the furnished waivers.

C. All pay requests shall be submitted using the Contractor Application for Payment Form found in METRA’s CCQMP.

1.04 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

A. All submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor and, if applicable, by the subcontractor(s) involved before transmittal to METRA. The submittals shall be reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Submittals not in compliance with the Contract Documents will be returned to the Contractor for resubmittal.

B. Every sheet, page, drawing, or sample of all submittals shall be marked with a permanent, tamper-proof identification that includes the following (as applicable):

1. Specification Number

2. Contract Number

3. General Contractor - date approved

4. Subcontractor - date approved

5. Sub-subcontractor - date approved

6. Supplier/Manufacturer - prepared (mailed)

7. State the Specification Division, Section, Sub-section, and Paragraph(s) involved

8. Specify any related Drawings and Details

C. All submittals shall be accompanied by a transmittal letter, plus two (2) copies of the letter.

D. The transmittal letter shall include all identification information marked on the submittal, as well as the Contractor's certification that all information is in compliance with the Contract Documents.

E. Minor variations from the Contract Documents shall also be indicated in each submittal made to highlight such deviations.

1. All submittals shall have a minimum of 2" x 3" clear area for approval stamps and signatures.



F. Submittals shall be packaged appropriately and sent by U.S. registered mail or hand delivered to METRA's Construction Manager. METRA will not be responsible for any time losses and extra costs due to lost submittals or transmittal delays.

G. Any submittal not in compliance with the requirements herein will be returned to the Contractor without review.

H. The review time shall be fifteen (15) working days from the date of receipt. The Contractor shall be advised promptly when it is determined that a submittal being reviewed must be delayed for coordination.

1. METRA will permit two (2) reviews of each submittal by METRA’s Construction Manager, consisting of a review of the original submittal, and if necessary, a review of one resubmittal at no expense to the Contractor.

2. Any costs incurred by METRA’s Construction Manager for subsequent submittal reviews, after the original submittal review plus one resubmittal, will be passed on to the Contractor at their expense.

I. Review Procedure: All submittals in compliance with these requirements shall be reviewed by METRA’s Construction Manager for acquiescence with the Contract Documents, and then be stamped, signed, and distributed as appropriate.

1. Submittals stamped REVISE AND RESUBMIT or REJECTED shall be corrected by the Contractor, as requested, and then resubmitted to METRA’s Construction Manager within fourteen (14) calendar days. No work related to this submittal may begin until approval is given.

2. Submittals marked COMMENTS AS NOTED shall be corrected by the Contractor, as requested, and then resubmitted to METRA’s Construction Manager within fourteen (14) calendar days. Work may begin upon the receipt of conditional approval from METRA’s Construction Manager, if it’s in compliance with the requested changes. The commencement of work on a COMMENTS AS NOTED submittal in no way relieves the Contractor of its responsibility to resubmit the submittal for final acceptance.

3. Submittals marked NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN constitutes an acceptable submittal. This acceptance is considered final.

J. METRA's Construction Manager’s review is not a complete check of the method of assembly, erection, or construction proposed. This review shall in no way be construed as:

1. Permitting any departure whatsoever from the Contract Documents.

2. Relieving the Contractor of its responsibility for any errors in quantity, quality of materials, details, omissions, or otherwise that may exist.

3. Relieving the Contractor of its responsibility for adequate field connections, erection techniques, and the measurements and quantities required.



4. Relieving the Contractor of its responsibility for satisfactory performance of all work and coordination with the work of all subcontractors and other contractors.

5. Permitting departure from any additional details or instructions furnished by METRA.

K. The distribution of reviewed and stamped submittals shall be as follows:

1. Two (2) copies retained for METRA's Construction Manager’s files.

2. One (1) additional copy to the Contractor.

L. Additional copies of samples are returned to the Contractor when marked COMMENTS AS NOTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT, or REJECTED, or are otherwise sent to METRA’s Project Manager.

1.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS

A. A separate submittal shall be prepared for each material type and/or system.

B. Prepare and transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of performing any related work to allow time for review and possible resubmittal. No extension of time will be authorized due to the Contractor's failure to prepare or transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the work.

C. A submittal shall be made for all required work, whether or not a submittal is specifically indicated.

D. Do not proceed with work in a manner that will necessitate later revisions of a submittal that has been transmitted.

E. Shop Drawings: Prepare shop drawings that establish the actual detail of the work; indicate proper relation to adjoining work; amplify design details of all general, civil, and structural items in proper relation to verified physical items; and incorporate minor changes of design and/or construction to suit actual conditions. Fully describe all materials and equipment to be incorporated into the project. Include the manufacturer's specifications and special detailed information.

1. Drawings shall be made under the direction and supervision of the Contractor and shall show all work dimensioned exactly as installed. Major equipment and apparatus shall be shown to scale and properly located.

2. The drawings shall include plan layouts drawn at a scale (or scales) as required; the minimum scale used shall be 1/8" equals 1'-0". It is intended that the construction drawings of each trade be of the same scale(s) in order to permit respective plans to be superimposed upon all others of each trade.

3. In addition to floor plans, the layouts of all congested areas (such as mechanical and electrical equipment rooms) and all functionally critical areas shall be drawn at a minimum scale of ¼” = 1’-0”, with all details of construction shown.



4. METRA’s Construction Manager may request additional drawings if in their opinion, they are required to properly coordinate the project.

5. Four (4) full size prints of all final drawings shall be made, being of the same size as the Contract Drawings and with the same borders and title blocks used, with the Contractor's name added to them. Drawings must be on METRA’s standard border as shown in our Engineering CADD Manual. At the very least, the shop drawing title block must indicate: Project Name, Project Number, Contract Number, Revision, and Date.

6. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination of all work with the work of all trades and shall, in preparing the drawings, continually check the work of all other trades (inclusive of that indicated by shop drawings) in order to avoid possible installation conflicts that may arise. It shall be understood that the work shown on the Drawings has been so coordinated. In the event of conflicts or interferences that cannot be resolved in the field, the Contractor shall request a written clarification from METRA’s Construction Manager.

7. A Shop Drawing submittal shall consist of six (6) prints.

F. Brochures and Prospectus: In the case of materials for which no shop drawings are required, the Contractor shall submit one (1) original and five (5) photocopied prospectus giving descriptive data so that a proper evaluation may be made.

G. Samples: Samples shall be of a sufficient size to show general visual effect. When samples must show a range (i.e., color, texture, finish, graining, or other properties), submit them in sets of three (3) showing the full scope of this range. Each sample shall bear identifying labels stating the project’s name, material, manufacturer, and location.

H. Color Board: For all Station and Crew Facility projects, the Contractor must produce and submit a Color Board prior to any color approval/selection for the project. The Color Board must be a rigid board with a title block including all of the information required as listed out in 1.04,B of this Section. The Color Board must include samples for all finished colors for approval. The Color Board must be organized in a logical manor (i.e., columns for interior and exterior in vertical order – floor at the bottom and ceiling/roofing at the top). The Color Board must include a schedule detailing all of the items shown on it. The Color Board schedule must include a Description, Manufacturer/Product Identification, Specification Number, Location, Color Information, and Comments area (left blank for review comments). No colors will be approved without the submittal of a complete Color Board.

I. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by METRA’s Construction Manager and shall resubmit as often as necessary. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing, or on the resubmitted shop drawings, to revisions other than the corrections requested by METRA’s Construction Manager on previous submissions.

J. Only such shop and working drawings, catalog cuts, pamphlets, manufacturer's specifications and data, etc., as signed and stamped with the approval of METRA’s Construction Manager shall be allowed on the site.



1.06 MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTAL QUANTITIES

A. Initial Submittals: The number of copies, the manner of the submittal, and the Contractor's options for certain categories of initial submittals shall be specified in other Sections or as specified herein.

B. Final Distribution Copies: Except as otherwise indicated in other Sections, the Contractor shall submit the following quantities for each category and type to METRA’s Construction Manager for submittal, resubmittal use, or other distribution as indicated (quantities do not include copies for the Contractor's record and distribution to subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, governing authorities, and others involved in the performance of the work, which the Contractor may need to provide with submittal copies in order to receive METRA's Construction Manager’s action markings).

1. Tradesmen Testing - Qualifying and Certifying Reports: Six (6) copies.

2. Industry Standards: Six (6) copies.

3. Bound Maintenance Manuals: As specified in other Sections.

4. Materials: As specified in other Sections.

5. Samples: Six (6) Samples.

6. Test Reports and Certificates: Six (6) copies.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 40 00 - 1 TESTING AND INSPECTION Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 40 00

TESTING AND INSPECTION

PART 1: GENERAL


A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for the testing and inspection of materials to be incorporated into the work.

1.02 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Contractor’s Obligations

1. The Contractor is responsible for testing and inspection as required in the contract drawings and specifications.

2. The Contractor shall bear the cost of testing materials that fail to conform to the specification requirements. Employment of a Testing and Inspection Agency by METRA shall in no way relieve the Contractor's obligation to perform the work of the contract as herein specified.

3. Testing Agencies: Testing Agencies as submitted to and approved acceptable for use by METRA.

B. METRA's Obligations: None.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY

A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for structural steel and weld tests and inspections to show that the requirements of the specifications have been fulfilled, as well as for all tests required by law ordinances and rules and regulations governing the work, unless otherwise stated under the applicable Section.

B. Should any material or work be found after testing to be defective or inferior, such material and/or work shall be removed and replaced with new sound materials and/or work. This removal and replacement shall be at the Contractor's own expense.

C. The Contractor shall submit to METRA’s Construction Manager copies of each test result and/or report in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

D. Facilities Inspection Report: The Contractor shall submit to METRA’s Construction Manager a copy of their Inspection Report of the Testing and Inspection Agency employed by them during its tour of inspection, with a memorandum of remedies for any deficiencies reported by the inspection.



E. Tests shall be required on all structural steel work to show compliance with the Contract Documents, whether or not they are specifically indicated.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR'S TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Agencies are to meet the "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by the American Council of Independent Laboratories.

B. Agencies are to meet the basic requirements of ASTM E329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction."

C. Agencies shall be authorized to operate in the State where the material is being manufactured or fabricated.

D. Testing Equipment: Is to be calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:

1. National Institute of Standards and Technology

2. Accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.05 DUTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR'S TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCY

A. The duties of the Contractor's Testing and Inspection Agency include the following:

1. Cooperate and comply with the requirements of METRA’s Construction Manager and Contractor.

2. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing of materials and methods of construction as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager, in order to ascertain the compliance of materials and workmanship with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Promptly notify in writing to METRA’s Construction Manager and the Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies in the work or products.

4. Promptly submit copies of written reports of testing and inspection results to METRA’s Construction Manager, in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals. Each report shall include, among other items:

a. Date issued

b. Project name and number

c. Testing and Inspection Agency name, address, and telephone number

d. The name and signature of the inspector

e. Date and time of the sampling or inspection

f. Record of temperature and weather conditions



g. Date of the Test

h. Identification of products and Specification Section

i. Location of the sample or test

j. Type of inspection or test

k. The results of tests and compliance with the Contract Documents

l. Interpretation of test results

m. Perform additional tests as required and directed by METRA’s Construction Manager.

n. Inspection, sampling, and testing is required for, but is not restricted to, the following:

1) Cast-In-Place Concrete.

2) Structural Steel.

1.06 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperation: The Contractor shall cooperate with the Testing and Inspection Agency with regard to their determinations of the Contractor's compliance with the Contract requirements and shall provide access to the work.

B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used that require testing.

C. Submit to the Testing and Inspection Agency the design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other specification requirements that require testing and control by the Contractor.

D. Furnish copies of all Product Test Reports as required.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to the work that is to be tested.

2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested.

3. To facilitate inspections and tests.

4. For the storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify the Testing and Inspection Agency sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for the assignment of their personnel and for the scheduling of tests.



G. Employ and pay for the services of a separate, equally qualified, independent testing and inspection laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling, and testing required, when initial tests indicate that the work does not comply with the Contract Documents.

H. The Contractor shall pay for all costs related to products and/or material testing, in accordance with the established requirements and as specified herein.

I. The Contractor shall submit the names of the testing and inspection agencies that it intends to use. METRA’s Construction Manager shall approve the agency(s). Approval of the Contractor's testing and inspection agency(s) by METRA’s Construction Manager shall be accomplished prior to the Contractor's first payment submittal and approval.

1.07 METRA'S CONSTRUCTION MANAGER’S RESPONSIBILITIES:

A. METRA, through its Construction Manager, will perform all on-site testing of soils and concrete.

B. The Construction Manager will perform periodic shop inspections of steel fabrication.

C. The Construction Manager will witness and interpret the Contractor's Fabricator testing of welds in the Fabricator's shop.

D. The Construction Manager will perform periodic shop inspections of structural steel framing facilities.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 42 00 - 1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement AND DEFINITIONS


SECTION 01 42 00

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Various standards are referenced throughout the Contract Documents. This Section specifies the following:

1. Applicability of Reference Standards.

2. Provision of Reference Standards at the Site.

3. Acronyms used in the Contract Documents for Reference Standards.

4. Source of Reference Standards.

B. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined in this Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Wherever in the Contract Documents the following terms or pronouns in place of them, or abbreviations thereof are used, the intent and meaning shall be interpreted as follows:

1. Addenda: Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by METRA that modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.

2. Alternate: An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid, if the corresponding change in the work as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

3. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with METRA’s Construction Manager's action on the Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to METRA’s Construction Manager's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

4. Authority: This term shall mean the Northeast Illinois Regional Commuter Railroad Corporation (METRA).

5. Base Bid: The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added to or from which work may be omitted, for sums stated in Alternate Additives and Deductions.

6. Bid: A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work, or designated portion thereof, for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the



requirements of the Bidding Documents. The term Bid is used interchangeably with proposal.

7. Bidder: A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid.

8. Bidding Documents: Bidding Documents include the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the proposed Contract Documents including Addenda issued prior to the date for receipt of bids.

9. Calendar Day: Shall mean every day shown on the calendar.

10. Consultant: Shall mean the firm of an Architectural/Engineering Company or their duly authorized representative.

11. Contract Documents: The Contract Documents proposed for the work consist of the Proposal/Contract, the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, all Addenda issued prior to the date for receipt of bids, and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.

12. Contract Sum: The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by METRA to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

13. Contractor: Shall mean the individual, firm, partnership, or corporation directly contracting with METRA for performance of the prescribed work.

14. Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized", "selected", "approved", "required", "accepted", and "permitted" mean "directed by METRA’s Construction Manager", "requested by METRA’s Construction Manager", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend METRA’s Construction Manager's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.

15. Drawings: The approved plans, profiles, typical cross sections, elevations, and details, or addenda thereto, which show the location, character, dimensions, and details of the work to be performed. The term Drawings is used interchangeably with Plans.

16. Engineer/Architect: Shall mean METRA’s Construction Manager as defined below.

17. Equal: Where the words "equal", "or equal", "approved", "satisfactory", and other words of like importance are used, determination and approval by METRA’s Construction Manager is intended, unless otherwise specified, and is so understood.

18. Furnish: Shall mean to purchase, supply, deliver, unload, unpack, assemble, and install complete.

19. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division 01 Sections. General Requirements apply to the entire work of the Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements which are included in the project.



20. IDOT: Illinois Department of Transportation

21. Include: Shall mean that the items specified thereafter may or may not be all of the constituents, components, or subordinate parts of the whole.

22. Install: Shall mean to receive, inspect, handle, unload, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, finish, protect, clean, and similar operations complete and ready for use, including connections, adjustments, and testing.

23. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes, or schedules on Drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" are used in lieu of "indicated", it is for the purpose of helping the reader locate cross-references.

24. Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installation, erection, application, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be an expert in the operations that they are engaged to perform.

a. The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

b. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that the requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

c. Assigning Specialists:

1) Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.

2) This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

25. Joint-Venture: Shall mean a licensed business consisting of two (2) or more persons, firms, or corporations, all of whom shall have a valid license to perform the type of work proposed by the Joint Venture.



26. METRA: This term is the registered service mark for the Northeast Illinois Regional Commuter Railroad Corporation.

27. METRA’s Construction Manager: Any employee, agent, consultant, or representative of METRA duly authorized by METRA, to represent METRA in an engineering capacity and/or to make decisions for METRA with respect to the Work in an engineering capacity, or any party acting directly or through such employee, agent, consultant, or representative. The Contractor will be advised by METRA, in writing, of the identity and authority of METRA’s Construction Manager.

28. Owner: Shall mean "METRA" as defined in the Requirements for Bidding and instructions to Bidders.

29. Product Data: Are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

30. Provide or Provision: Shall mean to furnish and install, complete, and ready for use.

31. Project: The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part of. The Project may include construction by METRA or separate contractors.

32. Project Site: The space available for performance of the work. The extent of the project site is contained within the area bounded by temporary chain link fence, and may not be identical with the description of land upon which the project is to be built.

33. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control the performance of the Work.

34. Samples: Are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

35. Shop Drawings: Are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or one of its Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, manufacturers, suppliers, or distributors to illustrate some portion of the Work. These are also sometimes referred to as Installation Drawings.

36. Specifications: The Specifications are the portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship for the Work and the performance of related services.

37. Standard Specifications: IDOT’s “Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction,” adopted April 1, 2016, and their “Supplemental Specifications and Recurring Special Provisions,” adopted January 1, 2015.

38. Sub-Bidder: A Sub-Bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor, which is a portion of the work.



39. Subcontractor: Shall mean a person, firm, or corporation who has a contract with the Contractor to provide labor, materials, equipment, and services for work included in the Contract.

40. Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work either on the project site or elsewhere; and to report and if required, interpret results of those inspections or tests.

41. Unit Price: A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services, as described in the Bidding Documents and/or in the proposed Contract Documents.

42. Working Day: Shall mean any calendar day except Saturdays, Sundays, or observed holidays in the State of Illinois.

43. Work: Shall mean all materials, labor, and services required to execute the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION

A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's expanded 50-Division format and Master Format six-digit numbering system.

B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be interpreted as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable, as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. The words "shall be" are implied wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.04 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.



C. Conflicting Requirements:

1. Where compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, reference the requirements that are different but apparently equal, as well as any uncertainties to METRA’s Construction Manager for a decision before proceeding.

2. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimums or maximums, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer any uncertainties to METRA’s Construction Manager for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with the industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.

E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries for any uncertainties.

F. Trade Associations and General Standards: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in the Contract Documents, are defined to mean the following associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. Aluminum Association

a. 900 19th St., NW, Suite 300

b. Washington, DC 20006 (202) 862-5100

2. American Architectural Manufacturers Assoc.

a. 1540 E. Dundee Road, Suite 310

b. Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 202-1350

3. American Concrete Institute

a. P.O. Box 19150



b. Detroit, MI 48219 (313) 532-2600

4. American Council of Independent Laboratories

a. 1629 K St., NW

b. Washington, DC 20006 (202) 887-5872

5. Associated General Contractors of America

a. 2300 Wilson Blvd., Suite 400

b. Arlington, VA 22201 (703) 548-3118

6. The American Institute of Architects

a. 1735 New York Ave., NW

b. Washington, DC 20006 (202) 626-7300

7. A.I.A. American Insurance Assoc.

a. 1130 Connecticut Ave., NW, Suite 1000

b. Washington, DC 20036 (202) 828-7100

8. American Institute of Steel Construction

a. One East Wacker Dr., Suite 3100

b. Chicago, IL 60601 (312) 670-2400

9. American Iron and Steel Institute

a. 1101 17th St., NW

b. Washington, DC 20036 (202) 452-7100

10. Associated Laboratories, Inc.

a. 500 S. Vermont St.

b. Palatine, IL 60067 (708) 358-7400

11. American Lumber Standards Committee

a. P.O. Box 210

b. Germantown, MD 20875 (301) 972-1700

12. American National Standards Institute



a. 11 West 42nd St., 13th Floor

b. New York, NY 10036 (212) 642-4900

13. American Plywood Assoc.

a. P.O. Box 11700

b. Tacoma, WA 98411 (206) 565-6600

14. American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association

a. 8201 Corporate Drive, Suite 1125

b. Landover, MD 20785 (301) 459-3200

15. Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc.

a. 6000 Executive Dr., Suite 301

b. Rockville, MD 20852 (301) 231-9050

16. Adhesive and Sealant Council

a. 1627 K St., NW, Suite 1000

b. Washington, DC 20006 (202) 452-1500

17. American Society for Testing and Materials

a. 1916 Race St.

b. Philadelphia, PA 19103 (215) 299-5400

18. American Wood Preservers' Assoc.

a. P.O. Box 286

b. Woodstock, MD 21163 (410) 465-3169

19. American Wood Preservers' Bureau

a. (This organization is now defunct.)

20. American Welding Society

a. 550 LeJeune Road, NW

b. P.O. Box 351040

c. Miami, FL 33135 (305) 443-9353



21. Copper Development Assoc.

a. 260 Madison Av., 16th Floor

b. New York, NY 10016 (212) 251-7200

22. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute

a. 933 Plum Grove Rd.

b. Schaumburg, IL 60173 (708) 517-1200

23. Construction Specifications Institute

a. 99 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 300

b. Alexandria, VA 22314 (800) 689-2900

24. ETL Testing Laboratories, Inc.

a. P.O. Box 2040

b. Route 11, Industrial Park

c. Cortland, NY 13045 (607) 753-6711

25. Factory Mutual Research Organization

a. 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike

b. P.O. Box 9102

c. Norwood, MA 02062 (617) 762-4300

26. Gypsum Association

a. 810 First St., NE, Suite 510

b. Washington, DC 20002 (202) 289-5440

27. Hardwood Manufacturers Assoc.

a. 400 Penn Center Blvd.

b. Pittsburgh, PA 15235 (412) 829-0770

28. Hardwood Plywood and Veneer Assoc.

a. 1825 Michael Farraday Dr.

b. P.O. Box 2789



c. Reston, VA 22090 (703) 435-2900

29. Illinois Department of Transportation

a. Transportation Administration Building

b. 2300 South Dirksen Parkway

c. Springfield, IL 62764 (217) 782-4026

30. Industrial Risk Insurers

a. 85 Woodland St.

b. Hartford, CT 06102 (203) 520-7300

31. ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Assoc.

a. (A Div. of the National Assn. of Architectural Metal Mfgs.)

b. 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400

c. Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222

32. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

a. 600 S. Federal St., Suite 400

b. Chicago, IL 60605 (312) 922-6222

33. North American Insulation Manufacturers Assoc.

a. 44 Canal Center Plaza, Suite 310

b. Alexandria, VA 22314 (703) 684-0084

34. National Fire Protection Assoc.

a. One Batterymarch Park

b. Quincy, MA 02169 (800) 344-3555

35. N.F.P.A. National Forest Products Assoc.

a. (See AFPA. Now known as the American Wood Council of the American Forest and Paper Assoc).

36. National Hardwood Lumber Assoc.

a. P.O. Box 34518

b. Memphis, TN 38184 (901) 377-1818



37. National Lumber Grades Authority

a. 1055 W. Hastings St., Suite 260

b. Vancouver, British Columbia

c. Canada V6E 2E9 (604) 687-2171

38. National Particleboard Assoc.

a. 18928 Premiere Court

b. Gaithersburg, MD 20879 (301) 670-0604

39. National Roofing Contractors Assoc.

a. 10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600

b. Rosemont, IL 60018 (708) 299-9070

40. National Woodwork Manufacturers Assoc.

a. (Now NWWDA)

41. Portland Cement Assoc.

a. 5420 Old Orchard Road

b. Skokie, IL 60077 (708) 966-6200

42. Redwood Inspection Service

a. 405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200

b. Novato, CA 94949 (415) 382-0662

43. Rubber Manufacturers Assoc.

a. 1400 K St., NW

b. Washington, DC 20005 (202) 682-4800

44. Steel Deck Institute

a. P.O. Box 9506

b. Canton, OH 44711 (216) 493-7886

45. Southern Hardwood Lumber Manufacturers Assoc.

a. (Now HMA)



46. Steel Joist Institute

a. 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A

b. Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 (803) 449-0487

47. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau

a. 4709 Scenic Highway

b. Pensacola, FL 32504 (904) 434-2611

48. Single Ply Roofing Institute

a. 20 Walnut St.

b. Wellesley Hills, MA 02181 (617) 237-7879

49. Steel Structures Painting Council

a. 4400 Fifth Ave.

b. Pittsburgh, PA 15213 (412) 268-3327

50. Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Assoc.

a. (This Organization is now defunct.)

51. Underwriters Laboratories

a. 333 Pfingsten Rd.

b. Northbrook, IL 60062 (708) 272-8800

52. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau

a. P.O. Box 23145

b. Portland, OR 97223 (503) 639-0651

53. Wire Reinforcement Institute

a. 1101 Connecticut Ave. NW, Suite 700

b. Washington, DC 20036 (202) 429-5125

54. Western Wood Products Assoc.

a. Yeon Building

b. 522 SW 5th Ave.



c. Portland, OR 97204 (503) 224-3930

G. Federal Government Agencies: Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification-producing agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract Documents indicate names of standard- or Specification-producing agencies of the federal government. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1. Corps of Engineers

a. (U.S. Department of the Army)

b. Chief of Engineers - Referral

c. Washington, DC 20314 (202) 272-0660

2. Code of Federal Regulations

a. (Available from the Government Printing Office)

b. N. Capitol St. between G and H St. NW

c. Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

d. (Material is usually first published in the "Federal Register")

3. Consumer Product Safety Commission

a. 5401 Westbard Ave.

b. Bethesda, MD 20207 (800) 638-2772

4. Commercial Standard

a. (U.S. Department of Commerce)

b. Government Printing Office

c. Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

5. Department of Commerce

a. 14th St. and Constitution Ave., NW

b. Washington, DC 20230 (202) 482-2000

6. Department of Transportation

a. 400 Seventh St., SW

b. Washington, DC 20590 (202) 366-4000



7. Environmental Protection Agency

a. 401 M St., SW

b. Washington, DC 20460 (202) 382-2090

8. Food and Drug Administration

a. 5600 Fishers Lane

b. Rockville, MD 20857 (301) 443-1544

9. Federal Specification (from GSA)

a. Specifications Unit (WFSIS)

b. 7th and D St., SW

c. Washington, DC 20407 (202) 708-9205

10. General Services Administration

a. F St. and 18th St., NW

b. Washington, DC 20405 (202) 708-5082

11. Military Standardization Documents

a. (U.S. Department of Defense)

b. Naval Publications and Forms Center

c. 5801 Tabor Ave.

d. Philadelphia, PA 19120 (215) 697-2000

12. National Institute of Standards and Technology


b. Gaithersburg, MD 20899 (301) 975-2000

13. Occupational Safety and Health Administration

a. (U.S. Department of Labor)

b. 200 Constitution Ave., NW

c. Washington, DC 20210 (202) 219-6091

14. Product Standard of NBS




b. Government Printing Office

c. Washington, DC 20402 (202) 783-3238

15. U.S. Postal Service

a. 475 L'Enfant Plaza, SW

b. Washington, DC 20260 (202) 268-2000

H. The absence of a trade association, standards generating organization, governing authority, or other entity from the schedule of references in no way relieves the Contractor from conforming to the specified requirements.

1.05 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES

A. The procedure followed by METRA’s Third Party Consultant has been to contact governing authorities where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing the Contract Documents, recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in relation to the Contractor's responsibilities for performing the work. The Contractor shall contact governing authorities directly for any necessary information and decisions having a bearing on the performance of the work.

1.06 SUBMITTAL

A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For METRA's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents, as well as correspondence and records established in conjunction with standards and regulations compliance.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 50 00 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement AND CONTROLS


SECTION 01 50 00

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1: GENERAL


A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary facilities and controls. The work under this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and tools required to install, maintain, and remove temporary facilities, as well as to maintain, protect, or restore existing and new facilities affected by the Contractor's means and methods for performing the Work.

1.02 TEMPORARY ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary access roads and parking areas within the site as required, for its own and METRA’s convenience and necessity during progress of the work, subject to the approval of METRA’s Construction Manager.

B. If required, the Contractor shall provide staging areas as warranted by the Contractor's means and methods for completing the work. Protection and restoration of METRA, agency, corporate, private, and utility property shall be in accordance with the applicable sections of Articles 107.19 and 107.26 of IDOT's Standard Specifications. Obtaining, maintaining, and restoring staging and work areas shall be included in the Contract Lump Sum Price and shall be at no additional cost to METRA.

1.03 TRUCKING

A. The Contractor's vehicles leaving the site at any time shall be hosed and washed clean of mud and dirt clinging to the wheels and exterior body surfaces.

B. All trucks leaving the site shall be loaded in a manner that will prevent the dropping of materials on streets and, when necessary, shall have suitable tarpaulins fastened over the load before they enter surrounding paved streets. Trucks bringing materials over paved streets to the site shall be similarly loaded and covered.

C. No truck will be cleaned in an area where removed debris will foul track ballast or plug drainage structures.

1.04 STREET CLEANING

A. The Contractor shall maintain adjacent streets continually free of dirt and debris resulting from their operations, and shall provide street cleaning as necessary or as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager. Payment will not be made for costs related to this operation. If the Contractor fails to perform this function, METRA may do such cleaning and charge the same to the Contractor.



1.05 RUBBISH REMOVAL

A. The Contractor shall remove all rubbish as it occurs, but not less than weekly, and shall legally dispose of such rubbish off of the site. The Contractor shall obtain, in advance, releases from property owners where rubbish is to be disposed. The Contractor shall furnish copies of these releases to METRA. No removal shall occur until releases are received.

B. All surplus or rejected material, refuse, tools, and debris that may accumulate on the premises during the construction period shall be removed from time to time, as may be directed by METRA’s Construction Manager. On completion of the work, all debris shall be removed and the premises thoroughly broom cleaned.

C. The Contractor shall remove all rubbish occasioned by its work, and in the event that the Contractor fails to properly remove all rubbish and clean up the premises, METRA may do such cleaning and charge the cost of the same to the Contractor.

D. The Contractor shall request approval for the locations of dumpsters in writing. Dumpsters are to be dropped off each morning and picked-up each night.

1.06 TEMPORARY TOOL AND STORAGE AREA

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary tool and storage facilities as required for its work. The Contractor shall locate and limit such facilities and storage of materials as approved by METRA’s Construction Manager.

B. No materials, supplies, or equipment shall be stored within fifteen (15) feet of the centerline of any track, measured at right angles thereto.

C. The Contractor shall coordinate, supervise, and control material storage and field office space for the various trades, subcontractors, and suppliers.

D. Storage areas shall be neatly maintained and always kept clean and orderly by the Contractor using them. Equipment not being used on the work shall not be allowed to remain on the property.

E. All materials and equipment shall be stored and handled in such a manner as to prevent the inclusion of foreign substances and to prevent damage from weather. Damaged or rejected materials shall be removed from the premises and new materials of proper quality and type shall be furnished before proceeding with the work, at no additional cost to METRA.

F. METRA will not be responsible for damaged materials or equipment stored at the site, whether caused by acts of God, vandalism, or due to other causes.

1.07 TEMPORARY PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall provide any temporary measures necessary to carry on its work for keeping on schedule during inclement weather.



B. The Contractor shall provide protection of its materials stored at the site from weather and theft, and shall be responsible for losses from the same.

C. The Contractor shall provide and maintain the protection of work in place, including that of other contractors, against damage from its operations and shall be responsible for the repair or replacement of work so damaged.

D. The Contractor shall employ watchmen or watch services as it deems necessary to safeguard all work covered by this Contract.

1.08 TEMPORARY WATER

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary potable water supply lines for its use for all temporary facilities as required. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary permit(s) and pay for all permits and water use costs during the entire construction period up to the final project acceptance date.

1.09 TEMPORARY TOILETS

A. The Contractor shall provide portable chemical toilet facilities for its workers employed on the project as soon as operations commence. Toilet facilities shall be serviced twice weekly, which shall include draining the tank, refilling and disinfecting the interior of each toilet unit, and keeping each unit stocked with toilet paper. Toilet facilities shall be maintained during the term of the construction period and removed upon completion of the work. The Contractor shall pay all costs for temporary toilets for its workers.

1.10 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary power for its use and for all temporary facilities. The Contractor shall obtain the necessary permits from the municipality and pay for all permit costs.

B. The Contractor shall provide all electrical equipment, NEMA enclosure type, material, labor, and testing in accordance with applicable codes.

C. The Contractor shall provide minimum temporary power for the collective use of all of its employees and subcontractors. The Contractor shall provide whatever accessories are necessary to adapt electric power for its operation. The Contractor shall provide:

1. Adequate power center and service for miscellaneous tools and equipment.

2. Adequate number of weatherproof distribution boxes with breaker protected circuits and grounded outlets, in locations as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager.

3. Equipment grounding continuity for the entire system.

4. Users shall provide grounded UL approved extension cords from the power center.

5. Power for temporary lighting, heating, and ventilating.

6. Power for welding and other special equipment.



7. Power for testing and checking equipment of the same capacity as the permanent system.

D. The Contractor shall provide minimum temporary lighting for general work and safety of five (5) foot-candles; finish and detail work shall provide twenty (20) foot-candles.

E. The Contractor is to pay the electric utility company for all temporary service charges and energy costs for the temporary power, light, and heat provided during the entire construction period and up to the final project acceptance date.

1.11 EXISTING STREETS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS AND LANDSCAPED AREAS

A. Where the Contractor excavates existing streets, sidewalks, curbs, and other areas outside of the site limits, or removes or damages streets, sidewalks, or curbs it shall, as a part of this Contract, replace all such cement, concrete, asphalt, brick, stone, grass, or cinders of the same thickness and manner as the original pavement sidewalk, curb, or landscaped areas, and in a manner approved and accepted by METRA’s Construction Manager.

B. Where the Contractor hauls material over existing streets, sidewalks, curbs, or landscaped areas, and where it is necessary to drive trucks or equipment over such areas, it shall protect the same from damages. Where such streets, sidewalks, curbs, or landscaped areas have been damaged, the Contractor shall remove and replace the same with new cement, concrete, asphalt, brick, stone, or materials of the same thickness and manner as the original, unless otherwise directed by METRA’s Construction Manager.

C. The Contractor shall install temporary bridging over trenches or near excavation, capable of sustaining the weight of buses and trucks and their cargoes, which are normally dispatched in that particular area.

D. When necessary, in the opinion of METRA’s Construction Manager, the Contractor shall make arrangements for the diversion of traffic, provide all materials and signs, and perform all work necessary for the construction and maintenance of roadways while diverting traffic.

E. The Contractor shall, at no additional expense to METRA, furnish such barricades, signs, lights, and danger signals, provide such watchmen, and take such other precautionary measures as are necessary for the protection of persons or property at and/or near the construction site, in accordance with the requirements of the municipality.

1.12 TEMPORARY STAIRS, LADDERS, RAMPS, RUNWAYS, COVERED WALKWAYS, ETC.

A. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain temporary covered walkways, ladders, ramps, scaffolds, runways, derricks, crane(s), and hoists required for the proper execution of the Work and protection of the workers and public. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility that such apparatus, equipment, and construction meet the requirements of the laws of the State of Illinois, and the municipality, concerning the protection of its employees and labor with adequate scaffolding and other safety



precautions and safeguards, and any and all rules, regulations, and directions of METRA applicable thereto, and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the same.

1.13 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. It is hereby understood by the Contractor that it may make no use whatsoever of the existing utilities on the property for its own use or use in connection with the Work, including electric power, lighting, gas, water, sewer, and toilet facilities, without prior authorization from METRA.

1.14 SIGNS

A. There shall be no advertising signs on the premises, unless specifically approved by METRA’s Construction Manager or METRA.

1.15 WELDING

A. No welding, flame cutting, or other operations involving the use of flames, arcs, or sparking devices will be allowed without adequate protection and the permission of METRA’s Construction Manager.

B. Combustible or flammable material shall be removed from the immediate working area. If removal is impossible, such materials shall be protected with a suitable non-combustible shield.

C. Provide the necessary personnel and equipment to control fires resulting from welding, flame cutting, or other sources involving the use of flame, electrical arc, or sparking devices. The Contractor or subcontractor shall provide, at all times, acceptable fire extinguishers or other protection within ten (10) feet of the operation.

1.16 RELATED WORK

A. Section 00 10 00 - Supplementary Conditions

B. Section 01 50 20 - Engineer’s Field Office, Type A


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 50 20 - 1 ENGINEER’S FIELD Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement OFFICE, TYPE A


SECTION 01 50 20

ENGINEER'S FIELD OFFICE, TYPE A

PART 1: GENERAL


A. This section specifies requirements for the Engineer's Field Office, Type A. The work under this Section must include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to install, maintain, and remove the Engineer's Field Office. The work must also include, but not be limited to, all utility costs, cleaning, maintenance, and all other appurtenant work as specified herein, and as directed by METRA’s Construction Manager.

1.02 STANDARDS

A. Except as modified herein, the work shall be in accordance with the applicable

portions of IDOT’s Standard Specifications, Section 670.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 12 00 - MOBILIZATION

B. Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Requirements for rent ing the Engineer’s Field Office, Type A will be governed by Article 670.02 of IDOT’s Standard Specifications, with the following additions and modifications:

1. Four (4) bound Construction & Maintenance Daily Log Books, each capable of being used as a one year daily diary, and four (4) Field Books 8”x 4”, which are to be retained by METRA upon conclusion of the project.

2. One (1) - 2’ x 3’ weatherproof notice board. 3. Security bars or steel heavy wire mesh screens covering the exterior of all

windows and doors. 4. The office shall have a total of 720 square feet of floor space (60’ x 12’).

B. The Contractor shall furnish METRA’s Construction Manager with appropriate facilities for receiving U.S. Mail.


Metra / Rock Island District 01 50 20 - 2 ENGINEER’S FIELD Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement OFFICE, TYPE A

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing any and all items stolen from the Engineer’s Field Office, regardless of the circumstances. This is to include, but not be limited to, items covered herein, testing equipment, and items such as calculators, cameras, coveralls, etc.

D. The Engineer’s Field Office, including all furnishings, shall be covered under the Contractor’s Builder’s Risk Insurance.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall provide or pay for weekly cleaning services to be performed at the f ie ld of f ice throughout the duration of the Contract. The Contractor shall pay for all telephone and electrical installation connections, as well as all periodic utility charges. The Contractor shall pay for all installation charges and all periodic fees for the temporary office and office furnishings.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER APPROVAL

A. METRA’s Construction Manager shall approve the Engineer’s Field Office’s furnishings and equipment, before being accepted and moved to the site. The Engineer’s Field Office may be provided in the form of a store front location in lieu of a combination of mobile spaces. The location and facility will be subject to the approval of METRA’s Construction Manager.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.01 MEASUREMENT

A. No separate measurement shall be made for the ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE, TYPE A.

4.02 PAYMENT

A. Payment will be made at the Contract Lump Sum price as shown in the Schedule of Values for r e n t i n g the ENGINEER’S FIELD OFFICE, TYPE A. Further, this price shall include all utility costs (alarm, water, telephone, and electric) and maintenance costs.

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 50 30 - 1 RAILROAD FLAGGING Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 50 30

RAILROAD FLAGGING

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This Section specifies the requirements for Railroad Flagging. The

work under this Section shall include the use of Railroad Flagmen in conjunction with construction performed adjacent to in-service railroad tracks, as required by METRA and approved by the Engineer. Flagmen and associated flagging equipment are to be provided by the railroad.

METRA will provide flagging personnel as required at no cost to the Contractor, except as specified herein. The number of flagmen to be provided by METRA will be dependent on railroad operations. There are a limited number of flagmen available. Every reasonable effort will be made to provide the Contractor with a railroad flagman. However, if the railroad flagman is not present as requested, the appropriate railroad official must be notified BEFORE WORK IS TO BEGIN. AT NO TIME MAY THE CONTRACTOR WORK WITHIN 25 FEET OF THE TRACK WITHOUT A FLAGMAN. No extension of contract time will be awarded due to the unavailability of Flagging Personnel.

1.02 RELATED WORK:

A. Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS B. DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 Flagmen must be ordered with a two (2) working day notice to the Railroad. When

notice is given, the Contractor shall be prepared to provide the approximate duration and nature of its work to be performed. The appropriate contact information for arranging flagging will be provided to the Contractor by METRA’s Construction Manager.

3.02 Cancellations shall be made by 2:00 P.M. of the prior working day. The Contractor

shall assume the cost of requested flagging that is not used and not canceled.

3.03 The final decision for the need for Railroad Flagmen will be with METRA and subject to the approval of METRA’s Construction Manager.

3.04 Flagmen are generally personnel from the Railroad who act as warning devices for the approach of on-coming trains. They cannot authorize any deviations to the plans and specifications, or approve or inspect any work. Railroad Flagmen shall not be used as


Metra / Rock Island District 01 50 30 - 2 RAILROAD FLAGGING Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

on-street flagmen. Any on-street flagmen needed are the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.05 Flagmen may work a maximum of twelve (12) hours a day, although in most cases in

the Suburban territory, curfews exist that do not allow work during rush hour periods. The length of the working day must be established with the Railroad before work is started. (See Section 01 15 00 regarding work curfews).

3.06 Men and equipment may not be present at track level, Monday through Friday during

business hours as defined in Section 01 10 00-1.02D. 3.07 Equipment or materials allowed by the Engineer and METRA to remain at track level

outside of the above mentioned times, shall be stored not less than 25 feet away from the centerline of the nearest active track.

3.08 Any time work is performed within 25 feet of the center of the nearest set of rails,

flagmen will be necessary. Flagmen may also be required as the Railroad deems necessary.

3.09 At no time will machinery be allowed to cross the tracks or set up on the tracks without

prior permission from the Railroad's authorized representative. This type of work will require special protection and should be avoided.

3.10 The Contractor shall obey all signals and directions given by flagmen and shall take

whatever actions are necessary to insure compliance with the signals and directions being given. If the Contractor does not obey, a Stop Work Order may be issued.

3.11 When a railroad flagman informs the Contractor's foreman that a train is approaching,

ALL WORK MUST CEASE AND OPERATORS CLEAR THE TRACKS and dismount machines. If this is not done, the flagman will not allow the train to pass. Any train delays of this type will not be tolerated and damages may be assessed to the Contractor for these types of train delays.

PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 MEASUREMENT: RAILROAD FLAGGING will not be measured for payment. 4.02 PAYMENT: All costs associated with RAILROAD FLAGGING will be borne by others,

except that the Contractor will assume the cost of requested flagging that is not used and not canceled.

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 51 00 - 1 TRAFFIC CONTROL Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement AND PROTECTION


SECTION 01 51 00

TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION

PART 1: GENERAL


A. This item of work shall include the furnishing, installation, maintenance, relocation, and subsequent removal of all signs, signals, markings, traffic cones, barricades, warning lights, flaggers, and other devices that are to be used for the purpose of regulating, warning, or guiding traffic during the construction of this improvement.

B. When traffic is to be directed over a detour route, the Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove all applicable traffic control devices along the detour route according to the details shown in the plans.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Traffic Control will be in accordance with the applicable sections of IDOT’s Standard Specifications, the applicable guidelines contained in the Illinois Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, the Special Provision, Interim Special Provisions, and any Special Details and Highway Standards contained herein and in the plans.

B. At the pre-construction meeting the Contractor will furnish the name of the individual in its direct employ who is to be responsible for the installation and maintenance of traffic control items for this project. IDOT will provide to the Contractor the name of its representative who will be responsible for the administration of the Traffic Control Plan. The Contractor will notify the IDOT District One Bureau of Traffic 72 hours before commencing construction for changing traffic flow.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location, installation, and arrangement of all traffic control devices as shown on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer. Special attention must be given to advance guide signs during these operations, in order to keep barricade placement consistent with lane assignment. The Contractor will cover all traffic control devices that may be inconsistent with traffic patterns during transfer from one construction stage to another.

D. Contractor vehicles will always move with and not against or across the flow of traffic. These vehicles will enter or leave work areas in a manner that will not be hazardous to or interfere with normal traffic and shall not park or stop except within designated work areas. Personal vehicles will not be permitted to park within the right-of-way except in specific areas designated by the Engineer.



E. The Contractor will immediately furnish a certified flagger or flaggers, if in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor’s construction means or methods warrant it. No additional compensation will be made for flaggers. If no flaggers are available, the Contractor will cease operations until they become available.

F. All signs, signals, markings, traffic cones, barricades, warning lights, flaggers, and other traffic control devices must conform to the plans, specifications, special provisions, and the latest edition of the "State of Illinois Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." The Contractor will obtain, erect, maintain, and remove all traffic control devices in accordance with Article 107.14 of IDOT’s Standard Specifications. Placement and maintenance of all traffic control devices will be as directed by the Engineer. The Engineer will be the sole judge as to the acceptability of placement and maintenance of the traffic control devices prescribed in the appropriate standards.

G. The Contractor will ensure that all barricades, signs, lights, and other devices installed by its forces are operational every day, including Sundays and holidays. In the event of severe weather conditions, the Contractor must furnish any additional personnel required to properly maintain all traffic control devices as directed by the Engineer.

H. At the completion of each stage of construction, or whenever operations indicate that a relocation of a proposed or existing traffic control device is advisable as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will remove all traffic control devices that were furnished, installed, and maintained by its forces under this contract, and such devices will remain the property of the Contractor. All traffic control devices must remain in place until specific authorization for the relocation or removal of it is received from the Engineer.

I. The Contractor must be aware of the requirements for the coordination of all work in this project and adjoining or overlapping projects, and for the coordination of barricade placement necessary to provide a uniform traffic detour pattern. The Contractor will not be permitted to erect, change, or remove its detour barricade system without prior approval from the Engineer.

J. The placement of barricades and warning signs for the required lane closures will be as specified herein and will proceed in the direction of the flow of traffic. The removal of all signs and barricades will begin at the end of the construction areas and proceed toward oncoming traffic.

K. Revisions to the staging of construction, requested by the Contractor, may require traffic control devices to be installed according to standards and/or designs other than those included in the plans. Revisions or modifications to the traffic control plans shown in the contract shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer. Any requested revisions, as approved by the Engineer, shall not be at any additional cost to the contract and is considered to be included in the contract lump sum price for TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION.

Delays to the Contractor caused by complying with these requirements will be considered included in the cost of TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION, and no additional compensation will be allowed.



L. Changeable Message Boards shall be provided by the Contractor at the locations shown on the plans. This item and work shall be completed according to Section 701 of IDOT’s Standard Specifications.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 61 00 - 1 VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS


SECTION 01 61 00

VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND (VOC) CONTENT RESTRICTIONS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. VOC restrictions for the product categories listed below under "DEFINITIONS."

B. All products of each category that are installed as a part of this Project must comply. METRA's project goals do not allow for partial compliance.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals

B. Section 01 63 00 – Substitutions and Product Options

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. VOC-Restricted Products: All products of each of the following categories when installed or applied on-site in the building’s interior:

1. Adhesives, sealants, and sealer coatings.

2. Paints and coatings.

3. Composite wood and agrifiber products used either alone or as a part of another product.

4. Other products when specifically stated in these specifications.

B. Interior of a Building: Anywhere inside of the exterior weather barrier.

C. Adhesives: All gunnable, trowelable, liquid-applied, and aerosol adhesives, whether specified or not, including flooring adhesives, resilient base adhesives, and pipe jointing adhesives.

D. Sealants: All gunnable, trowelable, and liquid-applied joint sealants and sealant primers, whether specified or not, including firestopping sealants and duct joint sealers.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. GREENGUARD Certified Products at the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.

B. Green Seal GS-36 - Commercial Adhesives; Green Seal, Inc., 2011.



C. SCS Global Services - Certified Products; current listings at www.scscertified.com.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals, for submittal procedures.

B. Evidence of Compliance: Submit this for each different product in each applicable category.

C. Product Data: For each VOC-restricted product used in this Project, submit product data showing compliance, except when another type of evidence of compliance is required.

D. Installer Certifications for Accessory Materials: Require each installer of any type of product (not just the products for which VOC restrictions are specified) to certify that either: 1) no adhesives, joint sealants, paints, coatings, composite wood, or agrifiber products have been used in the installation of its products; or 2) that such products used comply with these requirements.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Shall be an independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections on the product types specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. All VOC-Restricted Products: Provide products having VOC content of types and volumes not greater than those specified in the reference standards called out previously in this Section.

1. Evidence of Compliance: Acceptable types of evidence are:

a. Current GREENGUARD certification; www.greenguard.org.

b. Current SCS certification; www.scscertified.com.

d. Current certification by any other agencies consistent with the reference standards listed in this Section.

e. Report of laboratory testing performed in accordance with any of the reference standard requirements for getting a product certified and listed. The report must include a statement from the laboratory that the product meets the specified criteria.

2. Product data submittals showing VOC content are NOT acceptable forms of evidence.

B. Adhesives and Joint Sealants: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than what’s required by Green Seal GS-36.



1. Evidence of Compliance:

a. Any reports of laboratory testing performed in accordance with the requirements of Green Seal are considered acceptable types of evidence.

C. Aerosol Adhesives: Provide only products having volatile organic compound (VOC) content not greater than those required by Green Seal GS-36.


a. Current Green Seal Certifications are acceptable evidence.

D. Paints and Coatings:

1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.

b. Architectural coating VOC limits of the State of Illinois.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculations in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at the project site; or other methods acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.


a. Any reports of laboratory testing performed in accordance with the requirements called out above are considered acceptable types of evidence.

E. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products and Adhesives Used for Laminating them:

1. Provide products having no added urea-formaldehyde resins.


a. Published product data showing compliance with these requirements are considered acceptable types of evidence.

PART 3: EXECUTION

3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. METRA reserves the right to reject non-compliant products, whether installed or not, and require their removal and replacement with compliant products at no additional cost to METRA

B. All additional costs to restore indoor air quality due to the installation of non-compliant products will be borne by the Contractor.




END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 63 00 - 1 SUBSTITUTIONS AND Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement PRODUCT OPTIONS


SECTION 01 63 00

SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after the award of the Contract.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Requests for changes in products, material, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents, proposed by the Contractor after contract award, are considered requests for "Substitutions".

B. The following are not considered to be substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of the Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to the requirements specified in this section.

2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by METRA or METRA’s Construction Manager.

3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents.

4. The Contractor's determination of any compliance with governing regulations or order issued by governing authorities.

1.03 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals

B. Section 01 42 00 - Reference Standards and Definitions

1.04 STANDARDS

A. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bid Documents establish the standards of required functions, dimensions, appearances, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.



1.05 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. DEFINITIONS AND EXPLANATIONS: Revisions to the Contract Documents, where required by METRA’s Construction Manager are "changes" not "substitutions." Requested substitutions during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to the Contract Date, are to be included in the Contract Documents as an addendum, and as such are not subject to the requirements for "substitutions" as specified herein. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and lawful orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute "substitutions" and are not to constitute a basis for change orders, except as provided for in the Contract Documents. Otherwise, the Contractor's requests for changes in products, materials, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for "substitutions" and are subject to the requirements hereof.

B. "OR APPROVED EQUAL": Where named products, materials, or methods are accompanied by "or approved equal" or other language of the same effect, the Contractor's requests to use unnamed products, materials, or methods are considered requests for substitutions, and are subject to the requirements thereof.

1.06 OPTIONS OF MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. GENERAL: Products are generally specified by ASTM or other reference standards, and/or equipment have been detailed, and/or specified by manufacturer or trade name, in order to establish standards of quality and performances and not for the purpose of limiting competition.

B. REFERENCED STANDARDS: When specified by reference standard only, the Contractor may select a product meeting this standard subject to written approval with a certification of compliance, for any such product from the product’s manufacturer.

C. SEVERAL PRODUCTS AND/OR MANUFACTURERS: When several products or manufacturers are specified, the Contractor has the option of using a product by any of the manufacturers that fully complies with the specified materials and established performance standards. The listing of a manufacturer’s name, brand name, or serial numbers shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing products that comply with the detailed requirements of the specification.

1.07 "OR APPROVED EQUAL" SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER AWARD

A. GENERAL: The Contractor may request a substitution directly related to an "or approved equal" clause or other language of the same effect in the Contract Documents subsequent to contract award, and under the following conditions:

1. The request is accompanied by complete data substantiating that the product is equal in quality, workmanship, and serviceability to the specified product and its use will not affect the time schedule of this and other Contracts, or affect the project cost for this and other contracts.

2. Each request of this kind shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted, as well as a complete description of the proposed substitute including: complete product identification and description; manufacturer's



literature; background on the manufacturer and the product’s performance record or test data (including installing where it is specified to be by the manufacturer’s representative); drawings and a sample cost comparison to the original product that was specified (including the dollar value of the credit back to METRA); and any other information necessary for a proper evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment, or other work that the incorporation of the substitute would require shall also be included. The burden of proof as to the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the proposer.

1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Products are generally specified by ASTM or other references and/or standards. When specified only by reference standard, the Contractor may select a product meeting this standard.

B. After award of the contract, substitutions will be considered only under one or more of the following conditions:

1. Required for compliance with subsequent interpretation of code requirements.

2. The unavailability of specified products, through no fault of the Contractor.

3. Subsequent information discloses the inability of the specified product to perform properly, or to fit into the designated space.

4. The Manufacturer/Fabricator refuses to certify or guarantee performance of the specified product(s) as required.

5. When it is clearly seen in the judgment of METRA that a substitution would be substantially in METRA's best interest, in terms of cost, time, and other considerations.

C. Requests for substitutions, when forwarded by the Contractor, are understood to mean that the Contractor has or shall perform the following:

1. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute in all respects to that specified.

2. The Contractor shall provide the same guarantee for the substitute that it would have for the product originally specified.

3. The Contractor shall certify that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this contract, including the cost under separate contracts and all re-design costs, and that it waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution when it subsequently become approved.

4. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute and make such changes as may be required for the work to be complete, as well as to be made compatible with other systems in all respects.



D. GENERAL: METRA’s Construction Manager is to notify the Contractor of either the acceptance or rejection of a proposed substitute. METRA’s Construction Manager shall solely determine whether or not the substituted product is equal to those originally specified in quality, performance, design, and suitability for the intended use and life expectancy of the equipment and/or systems. METRA’s Construction Manager’s decisions shall be considered final.

E. ACCEPTANCE: Is to be in the form of a written response from METRA’s Construction Manager.

F. Substitution requests will not to be considered and shall be promptly returned to the Contractor due to the following:

1. The request is not accompanied by sufficient substantiating data.

2. Substitutions are indicated or implied in shop drawing submittals without a formal request.

3. For their implementation, they require substantial revisions to the Contract Documents in order to accommodate their use.

4. They materially affect the work or schedule of other Contractors.

5. They do not comply with the specified equipment/material standards in every respect.

6. Submittals are not made in writing with a formal Transmittal letter. PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. The Contractor shall provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

B. Materials and Equipment incorporated into the Work:

1. No material or product shall be delivered to, provided for, or installed on this project that contains asbestos or asbestos-containing materials.

2. Conform to project specifications and standards.

3. Manufactured and fabricated products:

a. Design, fabricate, and assemble them in accordance with best engineering and shop practices.

b. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages, in order to be interchangeable.



c. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical from the same manufacturer.

d. All parts of systems shall be from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.

e. Adhere to equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions shown or specified unless variations are specifically approved by a Change Order.

PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 71 00 - 1 SAFETY AND Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement LOSS PREVENTION


SECTION 01 71 00

SAFETY AND LOSS PREVENTION

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies requirements for the development and execution of Safety and Loss Prevention procedures by the Contractor, as applicable to the execution of the Work.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 00 10 00 - Supplementary Conditions

1.03 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES

A. Codes and Standards: The Contractor must comply with the requirements of all laws and the regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over the Work.

B. Public Law 91-596; 91st Congress 5.2193; December 29, 1970.

1. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), as amended.

C. Public Law 100-342; 100th Congress, 102.624; June 22, 1988.

1. Rail Safety Improvement Act of 1988 (FRSA), as amended.

D. FRA Regulations: 49 CFR 213 - Track Safety Standards and 49 CFR 214, Subpart C - Railroad Workplace Safety.

1.04 PROTECTIVE MEASURES

A. The Contractor must take thorough precautions at all times for the protection of persons and property. The Contractor will be liable for all damages to persons or property, either on or off of the site, which occur as a result of its execution of the Work.

1.05 PERMITS

A. The Contractor must obtain all permits for installing and maintaining barricades, walkways, fences, railings, and whatever other safeguards are necessary to protect persons and property from damage, as a result of the construction under this Contract.

1.06 SAFETY AND LOSS PREVENTION PROGRAM

A. The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining a Safety and Loss Prevention Program covering all of the work performed by itself and its subcontractors. The Contractor must designate a responsible member of its organization whose duties will include loss and accident prevention and who will have the responsibility and full



authority to enforce the program. This person must hold meetings with the representatives of the various trades employed, in order to ensure that all employees understand and comply with the program. The Contractor must furnish a copy of their Safety and Loss Prevention Program to METRA for review.

B. The Contractor must cooperate fully with METRA and all insurance carriers and loss prevention engineers on loss and accident prevention.

C. All Contractors, subcontractors, and material suppliers must cooperate fully with interested parties on accident prevention and claim handling procedures.

D. The Contractor must promptly report in writing to METRA all accidents arising out of, or in connection with, the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall report whether the accident took place on or off of the project site, if it resulted in death, personal injury, or property damage, and give full details and statements of witnesses for the accident. In addition, if death, serious injuries, or serious damages are caused, the accident must be reported immediately by telephone or messenger. If any claim is made against the Contractor or any of its subcontractors on account of the accident, the Contractor must promptly report the facts (in writing) to METRA, giving full details of the claim.

E. The Contractor must submit its own, as well as Subcontractor safety plans to METRA for review.

1.07 OBSERVATION

A. During periodic visits to the job site, METRA’s Construction Manager is to observe the site for safety on an informational basis only, not as an official agent. If METRA’s Construction Manager observes a condition considered to be unsafe, the Contractor's Superintendent is to be advised verbally of the observed condition and the condition shall be recorded in the Engineer's Log Report.

B. If in the opinion of METRA’s Construction Manager the condition represents an imminent danger to persons or property, and after being verbally notified the Contractor does not immediately correct the condition, the observer is to contact METRA: Director of Construction, 547 West Jackson Boulevard, Chicago, IL 60661, at 312-322-6726. A verbal call must be supplemented by a written and signed statement.

1.08 OBSERVANCE OF GENERAL CODE OF OPERATING RULES

A. The Contractor must comply with all rules and regulations contained in the General Code of Operating Rules adopted by METRA, with a particular emphasis on Rule G that prohibits the use of alcoholic beverages, drugs, etc., on METRA property. Any violation of this will result in permanent removal from the project. Also, workers must wear hard hats, eye protection, and safety boots when working on METRA property. The Contractor shall also furnish hard hats for visitors to the site.

1.09 WORKER SAFETY

A. The Contractor must follow all of the regulations issued under the Federal Railway Administration (see 1.03, D above) regarding Railroad Workplace Safety and Roadway Worker Safety Standards. No employee will be allowed to begin work on railroad



property each day until a daily job briefing is held with the Railroad’s Employee in Charge (EIC).

1.10 PENALTIES FOR NON-COMPLIANCE

A. Compliance with these Safety and Loss Prevention conditions is considered by METRA to be of primary importance. Therefore, METRA’s Construction Manager will take the following steps in the event that the Contractor fails to comply with these Safety and Loss Prevention conditions:

1. Minor Infractions of the Safety and Loss Prevention Conditions:

a. Minor infractions of the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions must be verbally brought to the attention of the Contractor’s Superintendent by METRA’s Construction Manager. It is expected that the Superintendent will promptly take the necessary steps to correct these infractions.

2. Repeated Minor Infractions of the Safety and Loss Prevention Conditions or Failure of the Superintendent to Promptly Correct Minor Infractions Pointed Out by METRA’s Construction Manager:

a. Repeated minor infractions, or infractions that are not promptly corrected by the Superintendent, will result in the Contractor being advised in writing by METRA’s Construction Manager of such violations and will require the Contractor to respond in writing as to what steps shall be taken in order to correct the infractions. The Contractor shall then take immediate corrective action. It is required that all corrective actions will be completed as described and detailed in writing. Additionally, these infractions will be discussed and documented at Weekly Progress Meetings.

3. Serious Violations of the Safety and Loss Prevention Conditions or Failure by the Contractor to Take the Corrective Actions Outlined in Paragraph 2 of the Penalties for Non-Compliance Above:

a. If the Contractor fails to satisfactorily respond to the steps outlined in Paragraph 2, METRA’s Chief Engineering Office will issue the Superintendent a written “Stop Work Order” that will require the Contractor and all of its subcontractors to immediately cease work activities on the project, and for all non-supervisory personnel of the Contractor and its subcontractors to immediately vacate METRA’s premises.

b. Additionally, if any employees of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors seriously violate the requirements of the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions, a written “Stop Work Order” will be issued by METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer with the same requirements and conditions detailed in the preceding paragraph. Such serious violations must include, but will not be limited to, the following:

1) Failure by the Contractor or any of its subcontractor’s personnel to comply with FRA or METRA’s Requirements for Fall Protection while working on bridges.



2) Failure by the Contractor or any of its subcontractor’s personnel to comply with FRA or METRA’s Requirements for On Track Safety and/or Roadway Worker Protection.

3) Refusal by the Contractor or any of its subcontractor’s personnel to obey the signals and directions given to them by METRA’s Flagman.

4) Personnel of the Contractor or any of it subcontractors performing work at track level, or within 25’ of any track, outside of the hours specified in these Detailed Specifications.

5) Personnel of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors performing work at track level, or within 25’ of any track, at any time without a METRA Flagman being present.

6) Personnel of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors performing work on METRA property after the issuance of a “Stop Work Order”.

7) Failure by the Contractor or any of its subcontractor’s personnel to maintain the premises of METRA in a secure condition, which could potentially result in an accident or damage to Railroad property or equipment.

8) Assault on a METRA employee by an employee of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.

9) Any activity of the Contractor or its subcontractors that causes, or directly contributes, to an FRA Reportable Injury to any on-duty employee of METRA.

10) Intentional return of an individual employed by the Contractor or any of its subcontractors to the Project and/or premises of METRA, barred under the conditions described in Section 1.08, A.

11) Any activity of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors that causes or directly contributes to a derailment or any other train accident.

c. After the issuance of a “Stop Work Order”, METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer will immediately meet on-site with METRA’s Construction Manager and the Contractor’s Superintendent to discuss what steps will be taken to resume construction activity on the Project. The Superintendent will be issued a written set of instructions by METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer detailing what work must be done, in order to bring the Project back into compliance with the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions. Any work activity by the Contractor or its subcontractors at this time will be limited to the corrective action required for bringing the Project back into compliance with these conditions.

d. At this time, METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer may require that one or more employees of the Contractor or its subcontractors be prohibited from working on the Project or occupying METRA’s property. The Superintendent will then be required to furnish METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer with the names of those individuals.



e. When the corrective action has been completed, and the Project has been brought back into compliance with the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions, METRA’s Chief Engineering Officer will issue a written “Resume Work Order” to the Superintendent.

1) NOTE: Any time lost by the Contractor resulting from the enforcement by METRA of “Penalties for Non-Compliance” will count as contract days. Any requests by the Contractor for a Contract Extension will be denied.

4. ANY Additional Serious Violations of the Safety and Loss Prevention Conditions

a. In the event that the Contractor or any of its subcontractors seriously violates the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions again, a written “Stop Work Order” will be issued to the Superintendent by METRA. All work on the Project will immediately cease and all employees of the Contractor and its subcontractors will immediately vacate the premises of METRA.

b. After the issuance of a second and subsequent “Stop Work Order(s)”, the President, Chief Executive Officer, or equivalent of the Contractor must contact METRA’s Deputy Executive Director - Operations, in writing, to request that a hearing be held to discuss what steps must be taken by the Contractor in order to resume work on the Project. A hearing will be scheduled at the earliest opportunity by METRA’s Deputy Executive Director - Operations, at 547 West Jackson Boulevard in Chicago, Illinois.

c. At the hearing, it will be the responsibility of the President, Chief Executive Officer, or equivalent of the Contractor to make a presentation to METRA detailing what steps will be taken by the Contractor, in order to bring the Project back into compliance with the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions of the Contract, as well as what steps will be taken by the Contractor to insure that no additional violations of the conditions of this Section will occur. Acceptance or denial of the presentation will be at the discretion of METRA’s Deputy Executive Director - Operations.

d. When METRA’s Deputy Executive Director - Operations has been satisfied that the proper corrective measures will be taken by the Contractor, the Contractor will be issued written instructions regarding what steps must be taken by them, prior to receiving a written “Resume Work Order”. All activity by the Contractor and its subcontractors on the premises of METRA during this time will be limited to the corrective measures that will bring the Project back into compliance with the Safety and Loss Prevention conditions.

e. When all corrective work has been completed, the Contractor will be issued a written “Resume Work Order” by METRA.

1) NOTE: As stated previously, any time lost by the Contractor resulting from the enforcement by METRA of “Penalties for Non-Compliance” will count as contract days. Any requests by the Contractor for a Contract Extension will be denied.



2) Any additional serious violations will be handled in the same manner as detailed in Paragraph 4 above.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 72 00 - 1 DAMAGE TO UTILITIES Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 72 00

DAMAGE TO UTILITIES

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section specifies the requirements for damages to utilities. The work under this Section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required to repair any damages caused by the Contractor at their own expense.


3.01 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Utility Companies whenever any work that is required under any Utility agreements must be performed, in conjunction with the construction that is required under this Contract. It is suggested that the Contractor first contact JULIE (1-800-892-0123) or DIGGER (City of Chicago) at (312) 744-7000 – JULIE or DIGGER dependent on project location to expedite utility notification. The Contractor shall contact each individual Utility Company that aren’t members of the JULIE (or DIGGER) system that may be affected by the Work, in order to determine whether other interferences exist and for any other requirements related to the work involving utility facilities, prior to submitting its bid proposal.

B. The Contractor shall procure all permits and licenses, pay all charges and fees, and give all notices necessary for the lawful prosecution of the Work, including such permits and licenses as may be required in connection with the transportation of materials or equipment over roads, streets, highways, or railroads.

C. The Contractor shall also contact the appropriate Metra Division Engineering Office to schedule a site utility marking with electrical, signal, and water services. The Contractor must be present at this utility marking. Any damaged railroad utilities will be retained by the Railroad and all costs will be paid for by the Contractor.

D. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has taken into account in its proposal all Utility facilities in their present and relocated positions, as well as all Utility adjustments and relocation work that will affect its progress and performance of the Project. No damages or additional compensation will be allowed to the Contractor for any delays or inconvenience sustained by it, due to interference from Utility facilities or Utility adjustments or relocation work.

E. The Contractor shall not interfere with, cause damage to, or interrupt any facilities of any Utility, whether or not they are the subject of any Utility agreement. The Contractor shall


Metra / Rock Island District 01 72 00 - 2 DAMAGE TO UTILITIES Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

immediately inform the affected Utility and give written notice to METRA, whenever the Contractor has interfered with, caused damage to, or interrupted any facilities of any Utility. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Utility Company in the prompt repair and restoration of such Utility facility and shall be responsible to the Utility Company for the cost of such repairs and restoration work. The Contractor shall be held responsible for maintaining its performance of the Contract and completing the Project by the Completion Date, despite the Contractor's interference with or interruption of any facilities of any Utility.

F. Any posts that are to be located near or over any buried cables shall be installed by first digging a hole by hand, and then installing the post and back-filling the hole. No posts shall be driven under such conditions. Care shall be taken while digging by hand, so as not to damage the cable(s).

G. All efforts on METRA's part will be given to advise the Contractor of the locations of underground cables. However, it shall be understood that such efforts by METRA do not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities for restoring damaged Utilities resulting from the activities of any employee, subcontractor, agent, or representative of the Contractor.

H. The Contractor shall also be responsible for notifying owners of other cables and underground facilities, which may be jeopardized by the Contractor's operations in the same manner as required for giving notice to METRA.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 73 29 - 1 CUTTING AND PATCHING Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY: A. Definition: Cutting and patching includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the

installation of Work, and the repair required to restore materials to their original or better condition. 1. Cutting and patching is performed for coordination of the Work, to uncover Work for

access or inspection, to obtain samples for testing, to permit alterations to be performed, or for other similar purposes.

2. Cutting and patching performed during the manufacture of products or during the initial fabrication, erection, or installation process is not considered to be cutting and patching under this definition. Drilling of holes to install fasteners and similar operations is also not considered to be cutting and patching.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: A. Refer to Division 02 for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. B. Refer to other Sections of these Specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements

and limitations applicable to individual units of Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of

the time cutting and patching will be performed if Owner requires approval of these procedures before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: 1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and

indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes

to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that

will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted.

6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure.

7. Approval by Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive Engineer's right to later require complete removal and replacement of defective Work.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that

would change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the

following structural elements:



a. Foundation construction. b. Bearing and retaining walls. c. Structural concrete. d. Structural steel. e. Lintels. f. Timber and primary wood framing. g. Structural decking. h. Stair systems. i. Miscellaneous structural metals. j. Exterior curtain-wall construction. k. Equipment supports. l. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and Equipment. m. Structural systems for special construction.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the

following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and Equipment. b. Air or smoke barriers. c. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. d. Membranes and flashings. e. Fire protection systems. f. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. g. Control systems. h. Communication systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems for special construction.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Engineer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually satisfactory manner. 1. If possible retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the exposed Work

listed below. If it is impossible to engage the original installer or fabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm. a. Processed concrete finishes. b. Stonework and stone masonry. c. Ornamental metal. d. Matched-veneer woodwork. e. Preformed metal panels. f. Firestopping. g. Window wall system. h. Stucco and ornamental plaster. i. Acoustical ceilings. j. Terrazzo. k. Finished wood flooring. l. Fluid-applied flooring. m. Carpeting.



n. Aggregate wall coating. o. Wall covering. p. Swimming pool finishes. q. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.

1.05 WARRANTY: A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by

methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS: A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, specified, or as directed by Engineer, use materials

for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ÍNSPECTION: A. Before cutting, examine the surfaces to be cut and patched and the conditions under which the

Work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the Work.

B. Before the start of cutting Work, meet at the Project site with all parties involved in cutting and patching. Review areas of potential interference and conflict between the various trades. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding with the Work.

3.02 PREPARATION: A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support of Work to be cut to prevent failure. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

C. Precautions: Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated, until provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.03 PERFORMANCE: A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and

patching at the earliest feasible time and complete Work without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance

of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: 1. Cut existing construction using methods that are least likely to damage elements to be

retained, or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original installer.

2. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill. Cut holes and slots as small



as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

3. Comply with requirements of Drawings C301, C302, C304, and E502where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling.

4. Bypass utility services such as pipe and conduit before cutting, where such utility services are shown or required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned. Cut off conduit and pipe in walls or partitions to be removed. After bypass and cutting, cap, valve, or plug and seal tight remaining portion of pipe and conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter.

C. Patching: 1. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified

tolerances for the Work. 2. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 3. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration

into retained adjoining Work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

4. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another finished area, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance, remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials. a. Where patch occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire

unbroken surface containing patch, after patched area has received prime and second coat.

5. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance.

3.04 CLEANING: A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where Work is performed. Remove dirt, dust, grease, paint

splatter, mortar, oils, sealants, and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

END OF SECTION 01 73 29


Metra / Rock Island District 01 74 00 - 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL


SECTION 01 74 00

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. METRA requires that this Project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.

D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration:

1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.

2. Corrugated cardboard.

3. Wood pallets.

4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring.

5. Concrete: May be crushed and used as riprap, aggregate, sub-base material, or fill.

6. Bricks: May be used on the Project if whole or crushed, and used as landscape cover, sub-base material, or fill.

7. Metals: Including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

8. Glass.

9. Plastic buckets.

10. Paint.

11. Plastic sheeting.

12. Rigid foam insulation.

13. Windows, doors, and door hardware.



E. The Contractor shall submit periodic Waste Disposal Reports - All landfill disposals, recycling, salvage, and reuse must be reported regardless of whom the cost or savings accrues. Use the same units of measure on all reports.

F. The methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:

1. Burning on the project site.

2. Burying on the project site.

3. Dumping or burying on other property, whether public or private.

4. Other illegal dumping or burying.

5. Incineration, either on- or off-site.

G. Regulatory Requirements: The Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with all regulatory requirements, including but not limited to, all Federal, State and local requirements pertaining to the legal disposal of construction and demolition waste materials.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 31 00 - Construction Procedures.

B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

C. Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls:

D. Section 01 63 00 - Substitutions and Product Options.

E. Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted. Not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like.

B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances (i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity).

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances (i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity).

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.



G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site, in order to remanufacture it into a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating, and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.

J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.

L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water.

M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate, beginning from the first time that they become waste.

N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.

P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

B. Submit a Waste Management Plan within ten (10) calendar days after receiving a Notice to Proceed, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs first. Submit a projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling.

C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, the means of disposal or reuse and all associated costs. Show both totals to date and since the last report.

1. Submit an updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment. Failure to submit this Report will delay payment.

2. Submit the Report on a form acceptable to METRA.

3. Landfill Disposal - Include the following information:

a. Identification of material.

b. Amount (in tons or cubic yards) of trash/waste material from the Project disposed of in landfills.



c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to each landfill, and the total disposal cost.

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials - Include the following information for each:

a. The identification of material, including those retrieved by the installer for use on other projects.

b. Amount (in tons or cubic yards), the date removed from the project site, and the receiving party.

c. Transportation costs, the amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvaging or recycling each material.

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

e. Certification from the receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.

5. Material Reused on the Project - Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material and how it was used in the Project.

b. Amount (in tons or cubic yards).

c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.

6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above as appropriate, regarding the disposal method being used.


3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 31 00 - Construction Procedures, for additional requirements.

B. See Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls, for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and the removal of facilities and services.

3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting the results of the Waste Management Plan.



B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the job site foreman, each subcontractor, METRA, and METRA’s Construction Manager.

C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction on the appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvaging, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at each stage of the Project.

D. Meetings - Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings:

1. Pre-construction meeting.

2. Regular job-site progress meetings.

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for the separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvaging, reuse, returning, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.

1. At a minimum, provide:

a. A separate area for the storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for blocking.

b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclables.

c. Recycling bins at worker lunch areas.

2. Provide containers (as required).

3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials that are to be recycled or salvaged.

4. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures that are nonhazardous, recyclable, or reusable to the maximum extent possible. Reuse project construction waste materials, if possible.

5. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic.

6. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery, as well as for convenience to subcontractors.

7. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly layout and label a specific area on-site.

8. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked, in order to avoid the contamination of materials.

F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to all applicable regulations.

G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site all identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent the contamination of materials and to maximize the recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to a recycling facility, in order to prevent the contamination of recyclable materials.



H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site. PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 77 00 - 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement


SECTION 01 77 00

PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1: GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Project Closeout shall refer to the general requirements near the end of each phase or stage, in preparation for final acceptance.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor's Responsibilities:

1. The Contractor shall formally request Pre-Final Inspections from METRA’s Construction Manager as detailed herein. All requests shall be transmitted in writing.

2. The Contractor will be held responsible to provide proper and safe access for METRA’s Construction Manager, so that they may properly inspect the Work.

3. The Contractor will be held responsible to notify all Municipal authorities and other agencies having jurisdiction in the area, in order to secure the necessary inspections and approvals as the work progresses. Failure to do so will be at the Contractor’s own risk.

4. Prior to requesting a Pre-Final Inspection, the Contractor must complete all contract work. The Contractor shall also submit a statement showing the accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

5. After the Pre-Final Inspection, the Contractor shall receive from METRA’s Construction Manager a punch list of items/work to be completed prior to Final Inspection.

6. Prior to requesting a Final Inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, the Contractor shall complete the following list of known exceptions:

a. Submit a final payment request with final releases and supporting documentation, not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

b. Submit a certified copy of METRA’s Construction Manager's final punch list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been accomplished or otherwise resolved for acceptance.



c. Submit specific warranties, final certifications, and similar documents. Comply with other requirements that are covered in other Divisions of these Specifications.

d. Submit a Consent of Surety.

e. Correct faulty materials and faulty workmanship.

f. Complete final clean-up requirements, including the touch-up of marred surfaces.

g. Submit a guarantee for the completed work.

h. Submit copies of all Test Reports not previously submitted, as specified in other sections of these Specifications.

7. After submitting the request for Final Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager will arrange a Pre-Final Follow-up Inspection, after which a final punch list will be provided to the Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all items/work on this list, then shall submit a certified copy of the list stating that each item has been accomplished or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

8. The Contractor shall be present at all Inspections.

B. METRA’s Construction Manager’s Responsibilities:

1. Upon receipt of the Contractor's request for a Pre-Final Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager will check that all prerequisites for this inspection have been met. If any prerequisites have not been met, METRA’s Construction Manager will notify the Contractor in writing within five (5) working days from the date of receipt. If the request is in order, METRA’s Construction Manager will notify the Contractor of the date(s) of the inspection. The inspection will be held within ten (10) working days from the receipt of a valid request for inspection.

2. Following the Pre-Final Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager will prepare a punch list stating all items/work to be completed or corrected by the Contractor prior to the Final Inspection. All punch list items will be approved by METRA’s Construction Manager. Transmittal of the punch list will be in writing. The Contractor shall not accept the transmittal by any other means, or from any party, other than METRA’s Construction Manager. The Contractor's failure to comply shall be at its own risk and expense.

3. Upon receipt of the Contractor's request for a Final Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager will check that all prerequisites for this inspection have been met. If any prerequisites have not been met, METRA’s Construction Manager will notify the Contractor in writing within five (5) working days from the date of receipt. If the request is in order, METRA’s Construction Manager will notify the Contractor of the date(s) for a Pre-Final Follow-up Inspection. The Pre-Final Follow-up Inspection will be held within ten (10) working days from the receipt of a valid request.



4. Following the Pre-Final Follow-up Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager will prepare a final punch list stating all items/work to be completed or corrected by the Contractor, prior to the Final Inspection. The procedures for this punch list will be as outlined previously.

5. Upon receipt of the Contractor's written notice that all final punch list items have been completed, METRA’s Construction Manager will notify the Contractor of the date(s) of the Final Inspection.

C. The Contractor is advised that the Final Inspection will take place only after the completion of all punch list items. METRA will issue a Certificate of Final Acceptance only after a successfully completed Final Inspection.


3.01 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE/AFTER FINAL PAYMENT

A. Prior to final payment, the Contractor shall furnish METRA’s Construction Manager with six (6) bound sets of prints and electronic files showing the "PROJECT RECORD” conditions, as well as any related and otherwise modified systems. METRA will make available to the Contractor the original drawings in order for the Contractor to reproduce one (1) set of transparencies.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible, and pay all costs involved, for the transfer and recording of all changes/deviations to a reproducible set of drawings, clearly marked "PROJECT RECORD" for METRA’s permanent records. The Contractor shall exhibit their seal and sign the reproducible set of drawings.

C. See Section 01 78 10 – Project Record Documents, for additional information.

3.02 FINAL CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of all construction debris from the building and/or site, resulting from its operations. The Contractor shall restore and repair all surfaces soiled and/or damaged by its construction operations.

B. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by METRA’s Construction Manager, remove temporary protection devices and facilities, which were installed during the course of the Work for protecting previously completed work during the remainder of the project construction periods.

C. The Contractor shall pay for all costs related to site cleaning. Cleaning shall be performed on driveways, curbing, and sidewalk areas, where hose-washing may be permitted.



D. The requirements for refuse removal, cleaning, and other related work as specified shall be completed prior to the Final Inspection and shall constitute one (1) of the conditions for final acceptance.

3.03 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor and its Sureties shall unconditionally guarantee all work to be performed and all materials to be furnished under the contract against defects in materials or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance by METRA’s Construction Manager. If a longer guarantee period is specified, the longer guarantee period shall apply.

B. Where guarantees are required for work performed by subcontractors, secure guarantees from said subcontractors addressed to and in favor of METRA.

C. Delivery of said guarantee shall not relieve the Contractor and its Sureties from any obligations assumed under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

D. Should defects develop in any work within the periods specified in the Contract Documents, due to a fault in materials and/or workmanship, the Contractor shall make repairs and do the necessary work to correct defective work so that it fully complies with the Contract Documents, to the satisfaction of METRA’s Construction Manager. Starting within ten (10) days after a written notice from METRA, the Contractor shall perform such repairs and corrective work, including the replacement of other work damaged by or otherwise affected by the repairs or corrective work performed, or which may have been damaged by defective work, at no additional cost to METRA. Complete such repairs or corrective work as rapidly as possible.

E. In case the Contractor or its Surety fail to do the work so ordered, METRA’s Construction Manager may have work done and charge the cost thereof against monies retained, as provided for in the Contract Documents. If said monies are insufficient to pay such a cost, or if no money is available, then the Contractor and its Surety agree to pay METRA such an amount as will fully reimburse METRA for such work.

F. Guarantees required by the Contract Documents shall be delivered to METRA before the final voucher when the Contract is issued. They shall state that the time of the guarantees shall begin to run on the date of final acceptance, even though the guarantees are delivered prior thereto.


END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District 01 78 10 - 1 PROJECT RECORD Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement DOCUMENTS


SECTION 01 78 10

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1: GENERAL


A. The Contractor shall furnish to METRA’s Construction Manager at the time of Contract closeout, the required number of record copies of the following:

1. Project Record Drawings and Specifications

2. Field Test Records

3. Anything else required per the Contract Documents

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Section 00 70 00 – General Conditions

B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals

C. Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout

1.03 REFERENCE

A. Metra’s Engineering CADD Manual

1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS

A. Store any documents for METRA apart from the documents used during construction.

B. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, and legible condition and in good order.

C. Make documents available at all times for inspection by METRA’s Construction Manager.

1.05 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat and large printed letters.

B. The Contractor must create a Drawing Log, listing each sheet, with the current revision as listed in the title block and the date revised.

C. Mark-up Procedure for Project Record Drawings:

1. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until all required information is recorded. During progress of the Work, maintain a white-print set (blue-line or black-line) of the Contract Drawings and shop



drawings, with a mark-up of all actual installations that vary substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whatever drawing is most capable of showing the actual physical condition, fully and accurately. Where shop drawings have markups, mark cross-references on the Contract Drawings at corresponding locations. Mark with erasable colored pencil, using separate colors where feasible, to distinguish between changes for different categories of work at the same general location. Mark-up important additional information, which was either shown schematically or omitted from the original drawings. Give particular attention to information related to concealed work, where it would be difficult to identify or measure by direct observation at a later date. Require each person preparing a mark-up to initial and date the mark-up and indicate the name of their firm. All changes shall be ‘bubbled’ and cross referenced with documentation of the change. The drawing revision shall be maintained on each drawing with the date and source for all new sheets. Final submittals shall be dated and marked “PROJECT RECORD”. A Drawing Log must be maintained detailing all up-to-date revisions to the drawings.

D. Project Record Drawings (Required Information): Marked drawings must record, but not be limited to, the following information:

1. Horizontal and vertical locations of all underground utilities and appurtenances encountered during the work of the Contract, referenced to permanent surface utilities.

2. Field changes to dimensions and details.

3. Changes made by RFI, ROCC, Contract Modification, and NCR, including a reference number.

4. Details not found on the original Contract Drawings.

5. Each person preparing a mark-up shall initial and date it, as well as indicate the name of their firm.

6. Update the Drawing Log with all revisions.

7. Final submittals at Project completion will be listed as “PROJECT RECORD” with a submittal date.

E. Superseded Sheets: If new sheets are issued, the new sheet must reference the source of the change (RFI, ROCC, CM, etc.) and the superseded sheet, if any. Superseded sheets must also be kept in the project record set, with the word “Superseded” stamped clearly in the center of the sheet. Both new sheets and superseded sheets must be maintained in the Drawing Log.

F. Shop Drawings: The PROJECT RECORD DRAWING set shall include approved shop drawings for the following work items: Structural steel, Electrical, Plumbing, Mechanical, project specific systems as determined by the Engineer (ex. Elevator shop drawing, snow melt system, overhead crane, etc.). All included shop drawings shall be incorporated into the Drawing Log.



G. Project Specifications and Mark-up Procedures: During the progress of the Work, maintain one (1) copy of the specifications, including all addenda, Change Orders, and other similar modifications issued in printed form during construction. In addition, mark-up variations (of substance) in the actual work in comparison with the rest of the specifications and modifications as issued. Give particular attention to substitutions, the selection of options, and other similar information on work where it is concealed or could not otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Mark all changes made by RFI, ROCC, Contract Modification, and NCR, including a reference number. Where feasible, mark-up any variations on the blank left hand pages of the Project Manual, facing the printed right-hand pages containing the original text affected by the variation. The final submittal at Project completion will be listed as “PROJECT RECORD” in the title block, with a submittal date. Upon completion of the mark-ups, submit the specifications to METRA’s Construction Manager for METRA’s records.

H. The Contractor must submit all electronic files with their complete submittal at the end of a project in accordance with Metra’s Engineering CADD Manual. Prior to submittal, METRA’s Construction Manager will specify the details related to electronic files to the Contractor.

I. Printing Arrangements and Costs: The printing of original drawings and the costs to produce transparencies and other prints, as required herein, shall be the Contractor's responsibility.

J. Record Product Data: During progress of the Work, maintain one (1) copy of each product data submittal and mark-up significant variations to the actual work in comparison with the information submitted. Include the variations in products delivered to the site, variations from the manufacturer's instructions and concealed products, and the portion of the Work that cannot otherwise be readily discerned at a later date by direct observation. Note all related Change Orders and the related mark-ups of record drawings and specifications. Upon completion of the mark-ups, submit one (1) complete set to METRA’s Construction Manager for METRA's records.

K. Record Sample Submittal: Immediately prior to the date(s) of the Pre-Final Inspection, METRA’s Construction Manager (and including other METRA personnel as desired) shall meet with the Contractor at the site to determine which (if any) of the submitted samples maintained by the Contractor during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to METRA, for their records. Comply with METRA’s Construction Manager's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to METRA's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in the manner specified for the disposal of surplus and waste materials, unless otherwise indicated or directed by METRA’s Construction Manager.

L. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other sections of these specifications for requirements pertaining to miscellaneous record keeping and submittals, in connection with the actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date(s) of the Pre-Final Inspection, complete all miscellaneous records and place them in good order (properly identified and bound or filed), so that they’re ready for continued use and reference by Metra. Submit them to METRA’s Construction Manager for METRA's records. Categories requiring miscellaneous work records are recognized to include, but not necessarily limited to, the following:



1. All required field records on excavations, foundations, underground construction, wells, and other similar work.

2. Material certification for all permanent materials on the Project.

3. Operation & Maintenance Manuals.

4. An accurate survey showing the locations and elevations of all underground lines, including invert elevations of drainage piping.

5. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or unit allowances.

6. Chemical treatment records (wood, soil, etc.).

7. Ambient and substrate condition tests.

8. The testing and qualifications of tradesmen.

9. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities and the Testing and Inspection Agency.

a. Final inspection and correction procedures.

b. Statements of application.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor must provide METRA’s Construction Manager on-site access to the Project Record Drawings and Specifications for review. Monthly drawings will be reviewed for proper maintenance, current status, and accuracy.

B. At Contract Closeout, deliver all record documents to METRA’s Construction Manager. The Contractor shall submit all required record documents for METRA’s Construction Manager's review and approval, and shall revise the same and resubmit them as directed. The Contractor’s request for final payment shall not be submitted and will not be accepted until all final and approved record documents have been received by METRA’s Construction Manager.

C. Accompany the submittal with a transmittal letter, stating the following:

1. Date.

2. Project title and number.

3. The Contractor's name and address.

4. The title and number of each record document transmitted.

5. Signature of the Contractor or their duly authorized representative.

D. Copies and Distribution: Upon completion of the record drawings, prepare six (6) blue-line or black-line prints of each drawing, regardless of whether changes and/or additional



information were recorded on them or not. Organize each of the six (6) copies into manageable sets; bind them with durable paper cover sheets and print suitable titles, dates, and other forms of identification on the cover of each set. Organize and bind all mark-up sets of prints (maintained during the construction period) in the same manner. Submit marked-up sets and copy sets to METRA’s Construction Manager. In addition, electronic files (PDFs and native files like CADD, Word, Excel, etc.) of all Project Record Drawings and Specifications shall be organized in a similar fashion and must be submitted at Project Closeout, on a CD, flash drive, or external hard drive, to METRA’s Construction Manager at no additional cost. All PDFs shall be of a high resolution if there are any scans being submitted.

PART 2: PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3: EXECUTION (NOT USED) PART 4: MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 See Section 00 70 00 - General Conditions

END OF SECTION


Metra / Rock Island District

Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement

02 41 19 - 1 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

DIVISION 02: EXISTING CONDITIONS

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this

Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.

3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section 01 10 00 – Summary of Scope.

B. Section 01 73 29 – Cutting and Patching.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS:

A. The American Society of Safety Engineers

1. ASSE A10.6-2006: Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations (ANSI)

B. Code of Federal Regulations

1. 40 CFR 82-2012: Protection of Stratospheric Ozone

C. NFPA

1. NFPA 241-2013: Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations

D. Resilient Floor Covering Institute

1. Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings. 2011.

1.5 DEFINITIONS:

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to

prevent damage, and store.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to

prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.

E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle

methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items

unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.





1.6 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP:

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to,

cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of

interest or value to Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property

of Owner.

1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.

1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS:

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid

delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates

exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.8 SUBMITTALS:

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building.

C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the

measures proposed for protecting individuals and property. Indicate proposed locations and

construction of barriers.

D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending

dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and

of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction,

including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition

operations.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible

for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and

that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of

technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect

after completion of selective demolition.

H. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification

program





1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS:

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition

area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner

as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before

proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in

the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.

2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a

separate contract.

E. Hazardous Materials: Present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A

report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report

to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous

materials except under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

3. Owner will provide material safety data sheets for suspected hazardous materials that

are known to be present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished

because of building operations or processes performed there.

F. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

G. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.11 WARRANTY:

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or

damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved

contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding.

B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying

that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit

documentation at Project closeout.

1.12 COORDINATION:

A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS





2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective

demolition operations.

B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and

hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that

existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents.

C. Steel Tendons: Locate tensioned steel tendons and include recommendations for

de- tensioning.

D. Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with

building demolition operations.

E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings.

1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused

by salvage operations.

2. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be

reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of

measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact

reproduction.

3.2 PREPARATION:

A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical

equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving

areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies





3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that

maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC

systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap

or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same

or compatible piping material and leave in place.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect,

and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and

plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible

ductwork material and leave in place.

3.4 PROTECTION:

A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area

and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of

existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water

leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that

are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed.

5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and

cooling specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports

as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of

construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement

or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL:

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within

limitations of governing regulations and as follows:





1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.

Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing

supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining

construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not

hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid

marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of

hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-

suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 2 hours after flame-cutting operations.

6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials

and promptly dispose of off-site.

8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to

avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not

to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and

other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

C. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous

materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and

soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a

suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their

original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.





3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS:

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at

least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from

reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then

remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to

remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between

saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,

using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts.

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up

and remove.

E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to

recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor

Coverings.”

3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them

according to Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent

surfaces and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device

that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 00 - Construction Waste

Management and Disposal.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

3.8 CLEANING:

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective

demolition operations began.

3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE:

A. Remove: Existing 15kV switchgear and foundation, TUSS-2 Wayside unit substation and foundation,

wayside power boxes, pole transformers, poles, lights mounted to poles.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Lights mounted to poles near buildings or other fixed structures where the

lights may be relocated.



DIVISION 03: CONCRETE

SECTION 03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

03 30 00 - 1 Metra / Rock Island District

Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and DIVISION 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete

materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Exterior Equipment Foundation Pads.

2. Concrete Ductbank.


A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M 182-2005 (Reapproved 2009) - Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute

or Kenaf and Cotton Mats.

B. American Concrete Institute:

1. ACI 117-2010 - Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

2. ACI 301-2010 - Specifications for Structural Concrete.

3. ACI 302.1R-2004 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.

4. ACI 304R-2000 (Reapproved 2009) - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and

Placing Concrete.

5. ACI 304.2R-1996 (Reapproved 2008) - Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.

6. ACI 305R-2010 - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting.

7. ACI 306R-2010 - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.

8. ACI 308.1-2011 - Specification for Curing Concrete.

9. ACI 318-2011 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

10. ACI 347R-2014 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

11. ACI CP-1-2008 - Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field Testing

Technician - Grade I.

12. ACI SP-66-2004 - ACI Detailing Manual.

C. American Institute of Steel Construction:

1. AISC 303-2010 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.

D. ASTM International:

1. ASTM A82/A82M-07 - Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A184/A184M-06 - Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for

Concrete Reinforcement.





3. ASTM A496/A496M-07 - Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete

Reinforcement.

4. ASTM A615/A615M-09b - Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for


5. ASTM A706/A706M-09b - Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for


6. ASTM A1064/A1064M-10 - Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire

Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.

7. ASTM C31/C31M-08b - Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field.

8. ASTM C33/C33M-08 - Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

9. ASTM C39/C39M-09a - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete

Specimens.

10. ASTM C42/C42M-04 - Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed

Beams of Concrete.

11. ASTM C94/C94M-09 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

12. ASTM C150-09 - Specification for Portland Cement.

13. ASTM C171-07 - Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.

14. ASTM C172-08 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.

15. ASTM C173/C173M-08 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method.

16. ASTM C231-09b - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Pressure Method.

17. ASTM C260-06 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

18. ASTM C309-07 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing

Concrete.

19. ASTM C430-08 - Test Method for Fineness of Hydraulic Cement by the 45-μm (No. 325)

Sieve.

20. ASTM C494/C494M-10 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

21. ASTM C595/C595M-09 - Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.

22. ASTM C618-08a - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for

Use in Concrete.

23. ASTM C881/C881M-02 - Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for

Concrete.

24. ASTM C989-09a - Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in

Concrete and Mortars.

25. ASTM C1017/C1017M-07 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing

Flowing Concrete.

26. ASTM C1059/C1059M-99 (Reapproved 2008) - Specification for Latex Agents for

Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete.

27. ASTM C1064/C1064M-05 - Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-

Cement Concrete.

28. ASTM C1077-10 - Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates

for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation.

29. ASTM C1240-05 - Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures.




30. ASTM C1315-08 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having

Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete.

31. ASTM D448-08 - Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction.

32. ASTM D1751-04 - Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving

and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).

33. ASTM D1752-04a - Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber, Cork, and Recycled PVC

Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.

34. ASTM E329-07a - Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or

Testing.

35. ASTM E1155-96 (Reapproved 2008) - Test Method for Determining FF Floor Flatness and

FL Floor Levelness Numbers.

E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. Manual of Standard Practice, 28th ed., 2009.

F. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association:

1. Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities, 1997.

G. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology:

1. DOC PS 1-09 - Voluntary Product Standard for Structural Plywood.

1.04 DEFINITIONS:

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the

following: Blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-

furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when

characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances

warrant adjustments.

1. Include aggregate gradation data.

2. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project Site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings conforming to ACI SP-66 that detail

fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules,

stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections,

tie spacing, hoop spacing, size and location of all openings, concrete protective cover, and

supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the

structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Engineer.

E. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

F. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Semirigid joint filler.

4. Joint-filler strips.





5. Repair materials.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete

products and that complies with ASTM C94/C94M requirements for production facilities and

equipment.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing

Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing

Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency

laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician -

Grade II.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from

the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures

from single source from single manufacturer.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract

Documents:

1. ACI 301, Sections 1 through 5.

2. ACI 117.

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:

A. Steel Reinforcement:

1. Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage

2. Store steel reinforcement blocked up off the ground and in orderly stacks.

3. Store only bars with the same identifying label in the same stack.

B. Admixtures: Store admixtures in such a manner as to avoid contamination, evaporation,

freezing, temperature changes, settling, or any damage which would adversely affect their

characteristics.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS:

A. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,

stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of

concrete surfaces, nor impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing

compounds.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.




2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

2.03 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES:

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to

length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and

fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports

from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to ACI SP-66 and CRSI's "Manual of

Standard Practice," and as follows:

1. Precast concrete bar supports shall be of greater compressive strength than surrounding

concrete and shall have a minimum bearing area of 9 sq. inches (5800 sq. mm).

2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS:

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,

and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II, gray. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F or C.

b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. The maximum amount retained on the No. 325 sieve shall be 10% as determined

according to ASTM C430.

3. The maximum amount of alkalies (NA2O + 0.658 K2O) shall be 0.60% determined

according to ASTM C114. A running average of three samples shall not exceed a

maximum of 0.50%.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33/C33M, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded.

Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Nominal Coarse-Aggregate Size:

a. Exterior Equipment Pads: 1-1/2 inches.

b. Concrete Ductbanks: 1-1/2 inches.

2. Fine Aggregate:

a. Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C94/C94M and potable.

2.05 ADMIXTURES:

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with

other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those

permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing

calcium chloride. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for use. Furnish technical

assistance from manufacturer's field representative upon request.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M, Type D.





2.06 CURING MATERIALS:

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing

approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B,

dissipating.

2.07 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be

applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface

to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement

as defined in ASTM C219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and

application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5,000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested

according to ASTM C109/C109M.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL:

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of

laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed

mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than

Portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25%.

2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25%.

3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50%.

4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50%, with fly

ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25%.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30% by weight of cement.

D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with

a W/C ratio below 0.50.

2.09 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS:

A. Exterior Equipment Foundation Pads: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,500 psi at 28 days.




2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.

3. Air Content: 5.5%, ±1.5% at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.

B. Concrete Ductbank: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 2,500 psi at 28 days.

2. Air Content: 5.5%, ±1.5% at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) nominal maximum

aggregate size.

2.10 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT:

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" and

tolerances given in ACI 117.

1. Fabricate with cold bends conforming to the recommended dimensions shown in ACI

318.

2. Field fabrication will be allowed only if Contractor has equipment to fabricate steel

properly.

3. Attach metal or plastic tags with identifying mark or length corresponding to mark

number or length on Drawing. Straight bars shall have mark number or size and length.

Bent bars shall have mark number.

4. Unless indicated otherwise, Contractor may continue steel reinforcement through

openings in walls and slabs, then field-cut the opening so that there will be the required

concrete cover between ends of bars and edge of opening.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXING:

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to

ASTM C94/C94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90ºF (30 and 32ºC), reduce mixing and

delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90ºF

(32ºC), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FORMWORK:

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 and ACI 347R, to

support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be

applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,

elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Avoid offsets between adjacent forms and construct so that shores, braces, and stiffening

members are in line with those below.

F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.

Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide

top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.





2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required

elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support

screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of

formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely

braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at

inconspicuous locations.

I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

J. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads

required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

K. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt,

and other debris just before placing concrete.

L. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and

maintain proper alignment.

M. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written

instructions, before placing reinforcement.

N. Earth Forming: Concrete for Ductbanks not exposed to public view may be placed directly

against soil, provided that the earth or rock has been carefully trimmed, is uniform and stable.

Increase width of elements by a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) from that indicated on

Drawings to provide additional concrete cover for reinforcement. Refer to drawings C301,

C302, C304 and E502 for details.

3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS:

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work

that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with

tolerances in SECTION 7.5 of AISC 303.

3.03 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS:

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does

not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than

50ºF for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete shall be hard enough not to be damaged

by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations shall be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that

supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70% of its 28-

day design compressive strength as determined by tests on control cylinders. All control

cylinders shall be stored in the structure or as near the structure as possible to receive

the same curing conditions and protection methods as given those portions of the

structure they represent. Control cylinders shall be removed from the molds at an age

of no more than 24 hours. All control cylinders shall be prepared and tested according

to ASTM C31 and ASTM C39 at the expense of Contractor by an independent laboratory

that complies with ASTM C1077. Control cylinders shall be tested within 4 hours after

removal from the Site.




2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without

loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or

otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply

new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.

Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete

surfaces unless approved by Engineer.

3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT:

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before

placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that

would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and

support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack

weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Do not bend bars embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete without approval

from Engineer. If bending is permitted, conform to procedures of ACI 301 unless otherwise

prescribed by Engineer or the governing building code.

E. Splice steel where indicated. Splices shall be in full contact and shall conform to ACI 318.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, lap splices shall be Class B as defined by ACI 318.

2. Any additional Contractor-proposed splice shall be submitted for acceptance of location

and splice length.

F. Use wire ties that are 16-gage (1.6-mm) or larger, set with ends directed into concrete, not

toward exposed concrete surfaces.

G. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced in

both directions to minimize sagging. Do not place reinforcement directly on subgrade, vapor

barrier, or steel form deck and then pull up during concrete placement. Lap edges and ends of

adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing plus 2 inches (50 mm). Offset laps of adjoining

sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.05 JOINTS:

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at

locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

3. Clean and break laitance or other foreign material from bonding surface.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints to true alignment for a depth

equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:





1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing

each edge of joint with a groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of

contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on

concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades, adequate in number and power and with sufficient

replacement blades to complete the sawing at the required rate. Cut 1/8-inch wide

joints into concrete as soon as cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage

surface and before concrete develops random shrinkage cracks. Remove sludge and

cutting debris.

D. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated and at

right angles to joint. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete

bonding to one side of joint.

3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT:

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded

items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project Site, subject to

limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no

new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes

of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as

indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures

and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least

6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that

have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time

necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and

other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits

of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked

around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs or blocks during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb

slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

E. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and ACI 306R, and as follows:




1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused

by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. Monitor temperature of concrete in

place at corners or edges of formwork as applicable.

2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40ºF for three

successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the range

required by ACI 301 for the time duration indicated in Table 7.1 of ACI 306R. The

maximum allowable temperature drop during the first 24-hour period after protection is

discontinued shall be as indicated by Line 5 in Table 5.1 of ACI 306R.

3. Minimum temperature for concrete as mixed shall be as indicated by Lines 2, 3, and 4 in

Table 5.1 of ACI 306R. Maximum temperature for concrete as mixed shall be 10ºF

greater than the corresponding minimum temperature.

4. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete

on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

6. Air Heaters: Do not expose concrete to carbon monoxide or carbon dioxide fumes from

heaters or engines. Do not use oil- or coke-burning salamanders. Personnel shall be

present at all times to maintain safe, continuous operation of heating system.

F. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305R, and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 85ºF at time of placement. Chilled mixing water

or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is

calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is

Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep

subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3. Protect concrete with suitable insulation if rapidly decreasing nighttime temperatures

are anticipated, which would cause thermal shock to concrete placed during warm

daytime temperatures.

4. Protect concrete with temporary wet covering during any appreciable delay between

placement and finishing.

G. Pumping: Comply with ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R, and as follows:

1. Pumping shall not result in separation or loss of materials, nor cause interruptions

sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments.

2. Take samples for testing both at the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge

end. Loss of slump in pumping equipment shall not exceed 2 inches (50 mm).

3. Do not convey concrete through pipe made of aluminum or aluminum alloy. Avoid

rapid changes in pipe size.

4. Limit maximum size of coarse aggregate to 33% of pipe diameter, and maximum size of

well-rounded aggregate to 40% of pipe diameter.

3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES:

A. Rough-Formed Finish: SF-1.0 per ACI 301. As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections

that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.





B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across

adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.08 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS:

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and

finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or

inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.

Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular

texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive broom finish.

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to Exterior Equipment Foundation Pads.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle

broom perpendicular to main traffic route, making uniform corrugations not more than

1/16 inch deep. Coordinate required final finish with Engineer before application.

3.09 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING:

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with ACI 301, ACI 306R for cold-weather protection, and ACI 305R for

hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry,

or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb./sq. ft. (1.0 kg/sq. m) per hour

before and during finishing operations, as determined by Figure 4.2 of ACI 305R. Apply

according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or

darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after

loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the

remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed

surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 for not less than seven days, by one or a combination of

the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist with the following materials:

a. Water.

b. Continuous water-fog spray.

c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends

lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive.

Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and

waterproof tape.




3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy

rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and

repair damage during curing period.

3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Engineer. Remove

and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Engineer's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to two

and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling

and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,

spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and

stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more

than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make

edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-

coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before

bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured

in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white Portland cement and

standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding

color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match

before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher

than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and

structural performance as determined by Engineer.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and

verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces

sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that

penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of

width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired

areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low

areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor

elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to

manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level

surface.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter,

by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean,





square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all

around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply

bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original

concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with

adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

6. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and

loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place

patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to

match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive

and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Engineer's

approval.

3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor shall engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to

perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to

ASTM C172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or

fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength

tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five

randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not

less than one test for each day's placement of each concrete mixture. Perform

additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for

each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's placement of each

concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40ºF

(4.4ºC) and below and when 80ºF (27ºC) and above, and one test for each composite

sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C31/C31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each

composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured

specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set

of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age

indicated.

b. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any

three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified




compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below

specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

c. Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer, and

Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall

contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement,

name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in

Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and

materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-

day tests.

7. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device

may be permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection

of concrete.

8. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete

when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, strengths, or other requirements

have not been met, as directed by Owner. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct

tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42

or by other methods as directed by Owner.

9. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

10. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not

comply with the Contract Documents.



DIVISION 13: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

SECTION 13 34 23

POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS

13 34 23-1



POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section covers requirements applicable to furnishing the following Power Distribution

Centers (PDCs):

1. Metra 47th Street 15kV Switchgear. The switchgear manufacturer will be responsible for

packaging and providing the PDC for its switchgear in accordance with these

specifications to the Contractor, for delivery to METRA at Project Location.

2. TUSS-2 Wayside Power 480V Switchboard. The switchboard manufacturer will be

responsible for packaging and providing the PDC for its switchboard in accordance with

these specifications to the Contractor, for delivery to METRA at Project Location.

B. PDCs shall be environmentally controlled, and shall consist of a coordinated grouping of

electrical power and control equipment as indicated on any accompanying Data Sheets

and/or Drawings. Any Data Sheets, Drawings, or other related documents accompanying this

Specification shall be considered a part of this Specification.

C. Equipment specified in this Section shall also conform to Section 26 05 10 – Basic Electrical

Requirements.

D. PDCs shall be NEMA 3R structures with exterior walls and roof fabricated from interlocking

panels.

E. Structural grid base and floor system shall be designed for applicable floor loading and

designed to allow PDCs to be lifted and transported with interior equipment installed.

F. Furnish, install, interconnect, and test the Equipment and Materials specified herein, as well

as any Equipment specified in any related documents.

G. Major equipment furnished in the PDCs by this Contract and installed and wired by this

Contract:

1. PDC 1:

a. One (1) 15kV Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Lineup:

(1) Main-tie-main configuration with utility metering sections, tie, mains, four

outgoing ways, and auxiliary control and metering sections.

b. Panelboards, switchboards, and transformers.

c. Interior raceway as specified or required.

d. Cable as specified or required.

2. PDC 2:

a. One (1) 480V Low-voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchboard/Motor Control Center

Lineup for Wayside power

H. Site conditions shall be considered when sizing and designing Equipment.

I. Provide openings with removable covers for future equipment to be installed later.


13 34 23-2





A. All Materials, Equipment, and labor supplied shall be in strict compliance with the statutes,

codes, and standards listed herein. Where conflicts exist between statutes, codes, and

standards, the more stringent requirement shall prevail. Applicable statutes, codes, and

standards are as listed below:

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).

3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

4. ASTM International (ASTM).

a. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

b. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.

c. ASTM A106/A106M - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for

High-Temperature Service.

d. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings

on Iron and Steel Products.

e. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and

Steel Hardware.

f. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy

Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel.

5. American Welding Society (AWS):

a. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

6. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

7. Factory Mutual (FM).

8. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

a. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

9. Metal Buildings Manufacturers Association (MBMA).

10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC).

b. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.

c. NFPA 72 -National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.

d. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.

11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

12. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

a. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames.

13. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).

14. International Building Code (IBC) 2012.

15. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

a. ASCE 7-10 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

16. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.04 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS:

A. Power Distribution Centers shall be manufactured under an established quality assurance

program.

1. Contractor shall submit for approval all quality plans, forms, and procedures applicable

to manufacture of PDCs.


13 34 23-3




B. PDCs shall be manufactured in a safe workplace that satisfies all applicable safety codes,

including OSHA, NESC, and NFPA 70E. If any violations are identified, Engineer may force work

to stop until corrections have been made. Contractual dates will not be adjusted for

downtime resulting from safety violations.

C. Notify Engineer two (2) weeks prior to factory tests.

D. Engineer or Engineer’s representative will be present during factory testing of equipment

installed in the PDCs.

E. Factory testing requirements are specified in Part 3 of this Section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit as specified in Division 01.

B. Includes, but not limited to, the following:

1. Design Criteria.

2. Drawing Legend.

3. Bill of Material including quantity, description, and part number.

4. Outline – Plan View (general arrangement, internal equipment layout, center of gravity,

weights, floor opening sizes and locations, recommended pier and tie down locations,

location of platforms and stairs, mounting details, cable entry area, and door swing

requirements).

5. Outline – Elevation View (general arrangement in elevation, recommended pier and tie

down locations, wall opening sizes and locations, location of platforms and stairs).

6. Enclosure services electrical diagram.

7. HVAC equipment sizing calculation including heat loss of all equipment.

8. Schematic and wiring diagrams of the complete electrical systems.

9. Wire List including all cables.

10. Panelboard schedules.

11. Layout showing bottom entry cables into cabinets with dimensions.

12. Foundation loads, anchorage requirements and details.

13. A structural analysis report including wind, seismic, and snow loads prepared and

stamped by a registered Professional Engineer.

14. Structural fabrication detail drawings.

15. Lifting lug details, lifting clearances, and lifting plan.

16. Photos of enclosure lifting at the factory.

17. Grounding lug details.

18. A list of all items removed for shipment that will need to be installed by others.

19. Installation details and assembly instructions, including details on sealing the shipping

splits.

20. Certified test reports.

21. Discrepancies list as specified.

22. All drawings, details, bills of materials, and related items shall be submitted

electronically in Adobe Acrobat (PDF) format.

23. Final drawings, details, bills of materials, and related items shall be provided on

recordable compact disc (CD) or flash drive with all drawing files in Adobe Acrobat (PDF)

and native files in AutoCAD 2010 format or newer.


13 34 23-4




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION:

A. All Equipment and Material designs furnished shall be identical to equipment and material

designs having an acceptable history of domestic service for a period of not less than three

years at comparable temperature, voltage, and design stress levels.

B. Equipment and Material designs with less than three years of actual service will be considered

from established manufacturers, but shall be furnished only if accepted by Engineer prior to

award of Contract.

2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER

1. Salient Characteristics: The following are salient characteristics of the product:

a. The premanufactured power distribution center shall be a steel structure designed

to be installed on a concrete slab. Power distribution center shall come with all

required doors, cooling, Lighting, Receptacles, Raceways, and required supporting

devices as required for a fully functioning system.

2. MANUFACTURERS:

a. Parkline

b. Atkinson AZZ

c. Eaton / Pederson Power Products

d. Fibrebond

e. Intermountain Electronics, Inc. (South Point, OH only)

f. Koontz-Wagner (South Bend, IN only)

g. Lectrus (Chattanooga, TN only)

h. M&M Coastal

i. Powell Industries, Inc.

j. Protect Controls, Inc. (PCI)

k. Or approved equal meeting the salient characteristics of this specification.

2.03 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT:

A. The general arrangement, overall building length and width, shipping split, and equipment

locations are approximate. Exact equipment sizes, and layout shall be determined by this

Contract.

B. Working space, access aisle ways, and means of egress shall comply with NEC, OSHA, and Life

Safety Code.

C. Drawings contain schematic approximate layouts for equipment. Exact equipment sizes shall

be determined by this Contract.

D. Drawing contain schematic approximate layout for PDCs. Exact building height shall be

determined by this Contract.

E. All field cables will enter the PDC from below.

F. The PDC Manufacturer shall confirm that the equipment layout accommodates the following

requirements:

1. Adequate space for breaker pull out and switch maintenance.

2. Minimum number of shipping splits.

3. Adequate space for equipment ventilation.

4. Adequate space for personnel and equipment movement.

5. Adequate space for cable entry.

6. Adequate space for door swings.


13 34 23-5




7. Placement of operator controls and meters between 4 feet and 6 feet from the floor.

8. Ventilation flows are not obstructed.

9. Floor openings are unobstructed by support beams.

10. Minimize wiring that crosses shipping splits.

11. Allow for proper bending radii of cables.

12. Raceways and ductwork do not obstruct lighting.

13. Raceways and ductwork do not obstruct the movement of the breaker lift truck.

14. Adequate space for storage of the breaker lift truck.

G. The Supplier shall determine the maximum height, length and width of the PDC shipping

sections that can be safely transported to the Site.

2.04 STRUCTURE:

A. The PDC shall be designed and constructed for outdoor use under wind and seismic load

conditions at the site.

B. Support for the PDC will be a continuous pad. Support point locations to be coordinated with

Engineer.

C. The building and all components mounted thereon shall be designed for and anchored

sufficiently for transportation to the jobsite.

D. Building Construction:

1. Base:

a. The base frame shall be of all welded, seamless construction utilizing ASTM

A36/ASTM A572 Grade 50 structural steel members, sized and arranged for proper

strength, and able to withstand the stress and loads which will result when lifting

the complete factory fabricated and equipped assemblies and other loads as

indicated. Welding shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWS D1.1.

Welders certified through the 4G position shall perform all welding. Suppliers shall

be prepared to show welders' certificates.

b. The base structural members shall not interfere with or obstruct the areas

designated for routing of power cables or control wiring.

c. Deflection during lifting or supporting shall not exceed L/240.

d. The base shall have removable lifting/jacking devices to facilitate handling and

installation. The normal lifting for transportation and installation shall be by means

of a crane making a single point lift using suitable rigging.

e. The base shall have four (4) copper grounding pads located at each corner of the

structure. The ground pads shall be mechanically bonded to the base steel and

electrically connected with a minimum of #4/0 bare or coated cable or 2-inch by

1/4-inch bare copper busbar to a 2-inch by 1/4-inch bare copper busbar perimeter

loop located 6 inches below ceiling inside the PDC. Each ground pad assembly shall

include two 3/8-inch to 16 UNC threaded brass studs to permit connection of a

NEMA 2-hole cable lug.

f. Provide structural base with 8- to 10-mil coverage of undercoating.

2. Floor:

a. The floor loading shall be rated not less than 250 pounds per square foot

distributed load.

b. The PDC floor shall be a minimum of ¼-inch steel plate welded to the perimeter

members and to the cross members of the base.


13 34 23-6




c. Floor cutouts shall be provided under all switchgear, motor control centers, panels

and other electrical equipment to provide cable access. The cutouts shall be

unobstructed by floor structural members.

d. Floor cutouts shall have ¼-inch gasketed aluminum cover plates.

3. Frame:

a. The entire PDC shall be framed to provide moment resisting welded connections

at base to walls, side walls to end walls, and walls to roof to minimize overall

deflection, twisting, and elastic instability during lifting and supporting.

b. All wall openings, such as doors, windows, etc. shall be framed with 3-inch square

steel tubing or equivalent.

c. All frame connections shall be welded.

4. Walls:

a. The height from floor to ceiling shall be adequate for cable tray, cable tray

separation requirements, and access for the breaker lift truck under the cable tray.

b. The exterior and interior walls shall be 16-gage paint quality galvanized steel, and

shall consist of formed vertical panels.

c. The nominal thickness of the wall, including the required frame structure, shall be

a minimum of 3 inches.

d. Interior walls, supporting panels, and structure shall be designated so that interior

loads of 400 pounds per linear foot of wall length may be attached to the wall

without compromising the design wind load.

e. Should damaged exterior wall panels need to be replaced, tubular frame design

shall facilitate replacement without disrupting the integrity of the roof and

adjoining wall panels or adjacent walls.

f. Busway, where indicated, shall enter the wall. Provide flashing and weather-tight

construction.

5. Roof and Ceiling:

a. The exterior roof shall be 12-gage paint quality galvanized steel panels.

b. The roof design live load shall be 30 PSF.

c. The roof shall have a pitch design with a minimum slope of ¼” per linear foot and

shall be designed to support interior or exterior loads of 100 pounds per linear

foot without compromising the roof load design.

d. Roof shall be a centerpeak design without any trusses on split buildings and sloped

or centerpeak on non-length wise split buildings.

e. The ceiling shall consist of formed 12-gage paint quality galvanized steel panels.

The ceiling assembly shall be designed to retain the insulation and to provide a

smooth ceiling surface.

f. Minimum indoor ceiling height shall be 10 ft.-0 inches.

E. Platform and Stair Construction:

1. The platform and stair supports shall be designed based on the specified PDC height

with exact dimensions to be approved by Engineer prior to construction.

2. Provide 4 feet minimum wide platforms and stairs as required to access each personnel

and equipment access door.

3. Handrail:

a. Handrail shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code specified in the

References section.

b. Handrail shall conform to ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B or ASTM A106, Grade B.


13 34 23-7




c. Handrail posts and rails shall be 1 ½ -inch nominal (1.9-inch OD) round, black

standard-weight pipe.

d. Post spacing shall not exceed 6 feet from center-to-center.

e. Form and weld all handrails. Grind all welds smooth and even with the surface of

the pipe, including field welds required for erection.

f. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

g. Handrails within 10 feet of all doors shall be removable to facilitate removal of

equipment from PDC.

4. Kick Plates:

a. Furnish at the edge of uncovered openings and at the edge of walkways and

platforms 4 feet or more above adjacent floors or ground where persons can pass

or machinery is located.

b. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

5. Steel Floor Grating:

a. One-piece, resistance-welded, carbon-steel construction without notching of

bearing or cross bars before welding and conforming to NAAMM MBG 531.

b. Main Bearing Bars:

(1) Exterior - Exposed to Weather: Serrated.

(2) Interior - Not Exposed to Weather: Plain.

c. Fabrication shall conform to NAAMM MBG 531 and MBG 533.

d. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

6. Stairs:

a. Stairs shall conform to the requirements of the Building Code specified in the

References section.

b. Treads:

(1) Open-riser type with grating as specified herein.

(2) Nosings for grating stair treads shall be standard checkered-plate nosing.

c. Stairs shall extend to 1 ½ inches above top of concrete. Grout will be used

between stairs and concrete. The use of 6-inch leveling pad is not acceptable.

d. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

7. Vertical Supports:

a. Vertical supports shall extend to 1 ½ inches above top of concrete. Grout will be

used between stairs and concrete. The use of 6-inch leveling pad is not acceptable.

8. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.

F. For PDCs with multiple shipping sections, provide NEMA 1 junction boxes at the shipping

splits for easy breakdown of the PDC facilities wiring for shipment and reconnecting at the

jobsite.

G. Prior to shipment, the open ends/sides of each shipping section shall be crated

(weatherproofed) for transit to the jobsite. Crating shall be made of wood framing and

plywood boards. The use of plastic sheeting alone is not acceptable. A company recognized

and experienced in the trade must perform the crating.

H. Wall Penetrations:

1. Where wall penetrations are required, the openings shall be completely framed with ¼”

aluminum cover plates with neoprene gasket.

2. All wall penetrations shall be made in the walls prior to bending with the appropriate

machinery. No manual cutting of wall penetrations via jigsaw, plasma torch, etc. shall be

permitted.

3. Wall penetrations shall be framed openings.


13 34 23-8




4. Where wall penetrations are designed for cable entry, the cable tray or raceway shall be

sloped towards the exterior to prevent water from entering the PDC.

I. All fastening hardware shall be zinc plated or stainless steel. Welding of galvanized steel and

rivets shall not be an acceptable method of exterior fastening. Base bolts may be carbon steel

Grade 8 zinc dichromate plated.

J. The walls, roof and floor shall be fully insulated, with a minimum of R-18 insulation.

1. The walls and roof shall be provided with fiberglass batt type insulation or urethane

board type insulation.

2. The floor shall be provided with spray type insulation that is fire resistant with a flame

spread rating of 25 or less.

2.05 DOORS:

A. Provide doors as indicated on the Drawings or, if not shown, a minimum of one (1) 72- by 84-

inch double door and two (2) 36- by 84-inch single doors for each PDC.

B. Egress doors shall be located in accordance with NFPA 101 Life Safety and the Building Code.

C. The doors shall have solid core metal exterior doors that can accommodate a 2,500 pound

magnetic door latch for securing the door and rim exit type panic hardware and hinge preps

for three 4” x 4” hinges per door.

D. Provide a 2 hour fire rated 12” x 12” window in each door with safety glass.

E. The active entry/exit doors shall have a low profile rim exit device, a grip handle style door

knob outside trim with cylinder lock in the knob, and a heavy duty reversible door closure

with a hold/open feature.

F. Provide six (6) sets of keys.

G. Provide a rain hood above each door.

H. Provide a removable transom above the doors for moving equipment in and out of the PDC.

2.06 PAINT:

A. The paint used shall be heavy duty paint.

B. The skid shall be sandblasted to remove rust and scale prior to painting. A minimum of 4-mil

application of epoxy iron oxide primer shall be provided.

C. The floor shall be provided with a 2- to 3-mil application of "Red" epoxy iron oxide primer,

followed by a 2- to 3-mil application of epoxy, with a non-skid finish.

D. The exterior and interior of the building shall be painted using the manufacturer’s standard

coating system.

E. Color:

1. The interior walls shall be painted white.

2. The interior floor shall be painted ANSI-61 gray.

3. The exterior shall be painted a color selected by the Owner based on color samples

provided by the Supplier.

2.07 HVAC:

A. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) equipment shall be sized and provided.

HVAC equipment size shall be based on maintaining an interior temperature range of 60 to

80ºF with N+1 redundancy while taking into consideration the heat load of the equipment

and the Site conditions.

B. HVAC equipment shall consist of industrial grade self-contained wall mount units, complete

with supply and return grilles, lockable circuit breaker or disconnect switch, manual

thermostat, barometric fresh air damper, and a one-inch disposable air filter.


13 34 23-9




C. HVAC Manufacturers:

1. Marc Climate.

2. Specific Systems.

3. Bard.

4. Approved Equal meeting the salient characteristics of this specification

D. Provide high-pressure control, low-pressure control, low ambient control, compressor anti-

cycle relay, and alarm relay.

E. Provide lead-lag controller to sequence multiple HVAC units.

F. Provide drain pipe for HVAC condensation drain lines for connection to gutter downspouts.

G. If a fire suppression system is to be installed in the PDC, provide blanking plates over the

HVAC outside makeup air intake to allow the PDC to hold pressure.

2.08 LIGHTING:

A. The building shall be provided with industrial strip LED lighting fixtures, 120Vac, controlled via

three-way wall switches to be located at each entry door. Interior light levels shall be 50-foot

candles at 3 feet above the floor and shall be installed to avoid blockage by the cable trays.

B. Provide outdoor photocell controlled lighting above each door and on each building side.

C. Exterior lights shall be wall mounted 75-watt-equivalent LED, suitable for use in wet locations

and have automatic dusk to dawn photo control. Exterior lights shall be shielded and focused

downward to mitigate light pollution.

D. Provide battery powered exit lights inside the building with red LED lamps, 6V battery, 120V

operation, capable of operating for 120 minutes on battery.

E. Provide battery powered emergency fixtures with 12-watt halogen heads, 6V battery, 120V

operation, capable of operating for 120 minutes on battery.

F. Exit light and battery powered halogen heads may be included as a single combined unit for

fixtures located above doorways.

G. Emergency lighting shall meet the minimum requirements in the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101).

2.09 RECEPTACLES:

A. Furnish, install and wire a minimum of six (6) 20A duplex receptacles on interior walls.

Receptacles shall be divided into two separate circuits.

B. Furnish, install and wire a minimum of four (4) 20A weather-protected GFCI duplex

receptacles on exterior walls. Receptacles shall be rated for area classification. Manufacturer

to provide down stub-out conduits for installing, others to mount receptacles 4 feet above

grade. Manufacturer to coil required amount of cable inside PDC for shipment.

C. Provide in-use covers for all exterior 120Vac receptacles.

2.10 WIRING:

A. All PDC lighting, receptacle, and HVAC wiring shall be single conductor, stranded copper, with

THHN/THWN 600V insulation with a minimum size of 12 AWG.

B. Power for lights, receptacles, HVAC and other PDC building services shall be derived from the

480V Motor Control Centers and 120/208V power panels.

C. All wiring internal to the PDC shall be installed by this Contract and includes, but is not limited

to the following services.

1. Power cables:

a. Building services (lighting, receptacles, and HVAC).

b. Power feeds to 120Vac receptacles.

c. Power to the 120/208V transformers and panelboards.


13 34 23-10




d. AC space heater power from the 208/120V panelboard to each switchgear lineup

as required by this Contract.

e. 125Vdc power to the breaker test cabinet.

f. 5 kV power cables between 4,160V switchgear and soft starters.

g. 120Vac UPS power to 5 kV Soft Starters.

h. 125Vdc power to 5 kV Soft Starters.

2. Power Cables furnished and installed by others.

a. Power from the 480V Switchgear to 480V MCCs if across shipping splits.

3. Control cables:

a. All interconnecting control circuits indicated on the one line diagrams and

schematics including circuits for control and protection (switchgear, UPS, HVAC,

etc.).

b. DCS controls, indication, and alarms including, but not limited to, those

summarized in Table 1 at the end of this section.

4. Cable shall meet the requirements of the cable specifications attached to this Section:

a. BC1 - Ground cable.

b. CAT 5E - Ethernet cable.

c. CRN1 - Control cable.

d. FIB1 - Fiber cable.

e. IRN1 - Instrument cable.

f. PRN1 - 5,000V - Single conductor power cable.

g. SRN1 - 600V - Single conductor power cable.

h. SRN2 - 600V - Multi-conductor power cable.

i. SVN3 - Single conductor (THHN) power cable for lighting, receptacles and HVAC

(installed in conduit).

j. SW1 – 600V SIS wire.

5. All 120Vac UPS and 125Vdc circuits shall not be installed in the same wireway as

building utility wiring.

6. 120Vac UPS and 125Vdc cabling shall be per datasheets and not THNN single conductor.

7. Power circuits shall be sized per NEC and #12 AWG minimum.

8. Non-DCS control circuits shall be #14 AWG minimum.

9. Current transformer circuits shall be #10 AWG minimum.

10. Instrument cables shall be #16 AWG minimum.

11. Furnish all wiring integral to all Equipment, including wiring across shipping splits, if

required.

12. For control and instrument interconnection wiring, both ends of the wire shall be

provided with polyolefin sleeve type wire markers.

13. Wire markers shall be stamped to indicate the cable number, schematic number or

other designation that will identify the opposite end destination.

14. Make all internal wiring connections at Equipment terminals or terminal blocks; splices

in wiring will not be acceptable.

2.11 RACEWAY:

A. A 6” x 6” metal wireway, with hinged or bolted cover shall be provided around the PDC

perimeter at the junction of the walls and ceiling. This wireway shall contain all PDC facilities

wiring such as lighting, receptacles, and HVAC.

B. Aluminum ladder type cable tray shall be provided as required to maintain cable class

separation and shall include 20% spare capacity. Sufficient cable tray shall be provided to


13 34 23-11




support cables installed by this Contract. Buildings having cable tray systems shall be provided

with structural steel channel supports in the ceiling. The use of unistrut fastened directly to

the ceiling for cable tray support shall be permitted only if the ceiling is properly designed for

the load of the cable tray system and cables. The support from the channel supports shall be

via all thread and unistrut hangers. Provide double nuts on hanger rods.

C. Supply overhead cable tray raceway for internal PDC power and control cables.

D. Overhead raceway shall be provided to connect the 480V switchgear to the 480V motor

control centers.

E. Rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be utilized for all applications. EMT conduit is not

permitted.

F. Size conduits as required by the NEC.

G. Use sealing fittings as required by the NEC.

2.12 GROUNDING:

A. All equipment shall be grounded per NEC.

B. Provide continuous bare copper bus bar for interior perimeter ground located on the upper

portion of the PDC walls.

C. Provide bare copper bus bar from interior perimeter ground bus to exterior ground pads

located on PDC base.

D. Provide continuous bare copper ground on the exterior of all cable trays and tie to building

perimeter ground.

2.13 FIRE/HEAT DETECTION:

A. Design, furnish, and install a fire protection system including all associated components,

initiating and signaling devices and all associated electrical components including wiring,

conduits and raceways.

B. Fire detection, actuation, alarm and signaling system shall be designed in accordance with

NFPA 70 and NFPA 72.

C. All components and systems furnished shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)

and/or approved by Factory Mutual (FM).

D. System shall consist of :

1. VESDA (very early smoke detection apparatus) type smoke detectors.

2. Pull stations at each personnel door.

3. Local amber lens strobe and horns.

E. All components shall be addressable and capable of communicating over a hardwired twisted

pair connection with a fire protection control panel located remote from the PDC.

2.14 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

A. Provide two (2) 10 lb. hand portable dry-chemical fire extinguishers.

B. Extinguishers shall be multi-purpose (suitable for type A, B and C fires) and shall be UL

approved.

2.15 GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS:

A. Provide adequate gutter and downspout drainage systems for collection and disposal of

rainwater to grade level.

B. Location of downspout outlets to be coordinated with Owner.


13 34 23-12




2.16 STORAGE CABINETS AND DESKS:

A. Provide the following equipment in each PDC:

1. One (1) storage cabinet for spare parts and OEM manuals. Cabinet shall be a heavy duty

wall-mount.

2. One (1) industrial workbench for installation in each PDC. Workbench shall be a

minimum of 6 feet in length. Workbench top shall be made of wood or metal.

2.17 NAMEPLATES:

A. Provide engraved, laminated plastic nameplates for each piece of equipment as specified in

Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

B. Nameplates shall be provided on the exterior side of all doors in each PDC indicating the PDC

name.

C. Nameplates shall be 1.5 inches high and 6 inches long for panelboards, transformers, control

panels and equipment enclosures.

D. Nameplates shall be 1 inch by 3 inches for individual devices such as HVAC equipment and

welding receptacles.

E. Engrave nameplates with equipment tags provided on the Contract Drawings. Where tags are

not indicated, provide tags on Submittal Drawings for review and engrave on nameplates.

2.18 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS:

A. Manufacturer shall provide a recommended spare parts list.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:

A. Install and ground equipment as required by NEC.

B. Assemble shipping sections together and make up all wiring and bus connections.

C. Level equipment and anchor to the floor.

3.02 RACEWAY INSTALLATION:

A. Install raceway as required by NEC.

B. Flexible conduit shall not exceed 6 feet.

3.03 WIRE INSTALLATION:

A. Install cabinet-to-cabinet wiring as required by NEC and as follows:

1. Connect all wiring as indicated on approved Supplier's schematics.

2. For cabinet-to-cabinet wiring in the PDC, label all wires at equipment studs and terminal

blocks with slip-on wire sleeves stamped to indicate the cable opposite end destination.

3. Maintain separation between power, control and instrument/communication cables.

4. Install all cable in tray, conduit or wireway.

5. Maintain the manufacturer recommended bending radius for all cables.

6. If supplied, all fiber optic cable shall be installed in orange corrugated innerducts and

placed in cable tray or conduit.

7. In control cabinets, strip the cable jackets back to the entry point and insulate all

shields. Provide enough excess cable to allow all conductors to reach any point in the

cabinet Provide as-built panel indexes in each power panel.

8. Analog signal cables shall be left in the cable jacket to within 6 inches of terminations.


13 34 23-13




3.04 SHIPPING PREPARATION:

A. Prior to shipment, wiring that crosses a shipping split shall be coiled, tagged, and secured to

ensure that the cable is not damaged during shipment and installation. The cable tag shall

clearly and unambiguously define the termination location for the cable. A matching tag shall

be attached to the termination location.

3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION:

A. Contractor shall perform continuity test for all installed wiring.

B. Test cable insulation of all power cables installed by this Contract with a 500V megger for one

minute.

C. All 15 kV cable installed shall be hi-pot tested.

D. All installed equipment shall be functionally tested in accordance with the Specifications.

E. Torque and megger all power panels, switchgear bus, MCC bus, and ground bus.

F. The following provisions shall be made by this Contract for the witnessed factory tests.

1. Allow for up to five (5) people representing the Owner to witness the factory tests.

2. Allow time for the Owner’s representatives to visually inspect the equipment and review

reports of completed tests.

3. Factory testing shall include witnessed functional testing of the switchgear, lockouts,

transfer schemes, and equipment testing specified in other sections of the Specification.

4. Verify all I/O points by functionally testing each circuit. For equipment that won’t be

powered up, continuity checks shall be performed on all circuits.

G. The Supplier shall have in place a system of recording, correcting, and verifying resolution of

discrepancies discovered during the inspection and testing process.

H. A copy of the discrepancies list shall be provided to the Owner following the factory test.

I. The discrepancies list shall be resubmitted after shipment indicating the status of each item.

J. Test reports shall be available upon request.

K. A final copy of all certified test reports shall be provided in the O&M manuals. Electronic

copies shall be provided on a CD with all other final Contract Documents.

3.06 FIELD SERVICES:

A. Contractor shall unload, install, and test the PDC with assistance from factory service

personnel and shall provide the following services:

1. Removal of temporary shipping covers.

2. Mating of building shipping splits (ensure required gasket material is applied first).

3. Roofing and water sealing of shipping splices.

4. Leveling of the PDC.

5. Re-termination of cables that cross the shipping splits.

6. Installation of shipped loose items.

7. Check operation of HVAC units.

8. Repaint floors.

9. Touch up paint walls, roof, and HVAC units.

10. Adjust doors.

11. Inspect seals on shipping splits, wall penetrations, gutters, etc.

B. No field service time shall be charged to the Owner to correct manufacturing defects.



DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL

SECTION 26 05 10

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

26 05 10 - 1




PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical

installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this

Section to expand the requirements specified in DIVISION 01:

1. Submittals.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Record documents.

4. Maintenance manuals.

5. Rough-ins.

6. Electrical installations.

7. Cutting and patching.

8. Electrical Demolition.

9. Touch-up Painting.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following work components:

1. Furnish and install (including supports) the following equipment as per the Drawings

and Specifications:


A. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.

B. Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.


A. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS).

B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).

C. National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS): Except where the NEIS requirements

specifically deviate from specific requirements of the CEC, the NEC shall take precedence.

D. Chicago Electrical Code (CEC) - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

E. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):

1. IEEE C2 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.

B. PCB: Polychlorinated biphenyl.

C. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.


26 05 10 - 2




1.06 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit as specified in DIVISION 01.

B. Refer to each Section of this Division for specific Submittal requirements.

C. Provide Conforming to Construction Records schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams.

D. Provide product data on electrical material and products.

E. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with DIVISION 01, for equipment rooms, and

other congested areas to a scale of 1/4 inch=1 foot-0 inch or larger if required. Detail major

elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relationship

with other systems, installations, and building components. Drawings shall be prepared on

30-by-42-inch sheets. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and

where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of

the Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Indicate the proposed locations of major raceway systems, equipment, and materials.

2. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required

for periodic maintenance.

3. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.

4. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.

5. Equipment connections and support details.

6. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.

7. Support details.

8. Indicate scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into

the building during construction.

9. Prepare floor plans, elevations, and appropriate details to indicate penetrations in

floors, walls, and ceilings, and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.

10. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations, air outlets, air

inlets, light fixtures, communications systems' components, sprinklers, heat detectors,

smoke detectors, motion detectors, speakers, and other ceiling-mounted devices.

11. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work.

F. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 77 00 - Project

Closeout. In addition to the requirements specified in DIVISION 01, indicate installed

conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location for both exterior and interior; locations of

control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; fuse sizes, circuit breaker

sizes and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building

lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed.

G. Engage the services of a licensed Land Surveyor or licensed Professional Engineer registered

in the state in which the Project is located to record the locations and invert elevations of

underground installations.

H. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout. In

addition to the requirements specified in DIVISION 01, include the following information for

equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data, tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers

of replacement parts.


26 05 10 - 3




2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and

normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency

instructions; lockout/tagout procedures; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventive maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions, lubrication charts and schedules.

5. "Conforming to Construction Records" schematic and wiring diagrams.


A. Deliver products to the Project Site properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

1.08 WARRANTY:

A. Provide a minimum one-year warranty on all electrical equipment. Warranty period shall

begin when equipment is permanently energized or started unless specified otherwise.

Contractor shall provide written notification to Owner's Representative prior to this warranty

start date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS:

A. Unless indicated otherwise, all equipment and material shall be new, undamaged and meet

the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Where UL requirements are not

applicable, equipment and material shall be identified as such by Contractor and approved by

Owner before purchase and installation.

2.02 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COMPLIANCE:

A. Contractor warrants that all equipment, devices, items, systems, software, hardware, or

firmware provided shall properly, appropriately, and consistently function and accurately

process date and time data (including without limitation: calculating, comparing, and

sequencing). This warranty supersedes anything in the Specifications or other Contract

Documents which might be construed inconsistently. This warranty is applicable whether the

equipment, device, item, system, software, hardware, or firmware is specified with or without

reference to a manufacturer's name, make, or model number.

2.03 FINISHES:

A. For equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment

finish.

B. Galvanized surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION:

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the

actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications and the equipment submittals for rough-in requirements.

C. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems, materials, and

equipment. All electrical work and material shall comply with the following requirements:

1. NFPA 70 - The National Electrical Code (NEC).


26 05 10 - 4




2. IEEE C2, National Electrical Safety Code, Federal Information Processing Standards

Publication (FIPS).

3. NECA National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS) (all except Table 1 of NECA 1).

4. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components. Equipment motor horsepower sizes and kilowatt sizes shown are

approximate. If equipment of a different size is furnished by Contractor, Contractor

shall furnish and install the proper support equipment, motor starter, switchgear,

feeders, fuses, circuit breaker, disconnect switch, wire, and conduit required for the

equipment furnished, at no additional cost to Owner.

5. Verify all existing dimensions by field measurements.

6. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction to allow for electrical installations.

7. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

8. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment

for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring

positioning prior to closing in the building. Coordinate concrete pads, bases, roof curbs,

and related items.

9. Coordinate with all other building trades.

10. Where mounting heights are not specifically detailed, specified, or dimensioned, install

systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

11. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised

service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each

service.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown

only in diagrammatic form. Should coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to Owner's Representative in writing.

13. Install systems, materials, and equipment level, plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

14. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for

ease of disconnecting with minimum of interference with other installations.

15. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. The

electrical Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing access panels required for

electrical equipment. Access panels shall be installed by Contractor.

16. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems

required to be installed at a specified slope.

17. All equipment and materials shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 70 - The National

Electrical Code (NEC).

18. All equipment conductor termination provisions shall be UL listed for 75ºC conductors.

19. All electrical equipment and installations shall be of adequate strength to withstand,

without failure, forces encountered in defined Seismic conditions.

20. Install raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays and busways clear of obstructions and

clear of the required working space of equipment.

D. Refer to each section of this Division for specific performance requirements.


26 05 10 - 5




E. (Disposal of existing fluorescent lamps shall be by Contractor shipping the lamps to an EPA

approved recycler for recycling. All shipping and disposal costs will be paid by Contractor at

no additional expense to Owner).

F. (Existing pre-1980 fluorescent lamp ballasts and ballasts not marked "no PCBs" (or are not

dated with manufacturing date) shall be assumed to contain PCBs. Contractor shall dispose of

PCB fluorescent ballasts by shipping the ballasts to an EPA approved PCB incineration facility.

All shipping and disposal costs will be paid by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner).

3.02 DEMOLITION:

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or

disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of

equal capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be

demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring indicated to be abandoned in

place, 2 inches below surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to

match existing surface finish.

D. Remove demolished material from Project Site.

E. Remove, store, clean, re-install, reconnect and make operational components indicated for

relocation.

3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING:

A. General: Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces

required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades

involved. Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and

Patching. In addition to the requirements specified in DIVISION 01, the following

requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting and patching for electrical equipment and materials required to:

a. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.

b. Remove and replace defective work.

c. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents.

d. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing.

e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.

f. Upon written instructions from Engineer, uncover and restore work to provide for

Engineer's observation of concealed work if installed without using the proper

specified procedures.

B. For work in existing installations, the Contractor shall cut, remove, and legally dispose of

selected electrical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including, but not

limited to, removal of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by

the new work.

C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled

to be removed.

D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of

dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

E. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent

installations.


26 05 10 - 6




F. All penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings and floors shall be sealed with a UL listed

and FM Global approved sealant system that matches the fire rating of the surface

penetrated.

G. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components that must be cut for the electrical

installation or are damaged by Contractor using new materials matching existing materials.

H. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the

original installation.

I. All cutting, patching, and repairing shall be subject to the supervision and the approval of

Owner's Representative.

J. Repair and re-finish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent

undisturbed surfaces. Install new fire proofing where existing fireproofing has been

disturbed. Repair and re-finish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades

involved.

3.04 FINISHES:

A. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to suit

degree of damage at each location.

B. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing and

application of successive coats.

C. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

D. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.

3.05 CLEANING:

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

3.06 PROTECTION:

A. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes

and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




SECTION 26 05 13

MEDUIM-VOLTAGE CABLES

26 05 13 - 1



MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes cables and related cable splices, terminations, testing equipment, and

accessories for medium-voltage (2001 to 35,000 V) electrical distribution systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. Jacket: A continuous nonmetallic outer covering for conductors or cables.

B. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.

C. Sheath: A continuous metallic covering for conductors or cables.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For each type of cable. Include splices and terminations for cables and cable

accessories.

B. Samples: 16-inch (400-mm) lengths for each type of cable specified.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS:

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each type of cable and accessory.

C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer: Engage a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material manufacturer, to

install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS:

A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after

arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than five business days in advance of proposed interruption of

electric service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written

permission.

1.08 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:


26 05 13 - 2




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with IEEE C2 and NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

2.01 CABLES:

A. Salient Characteristics: The following are salient characteristics of the product:

1. Cable Type: Type MV 105.

2. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS8, diameter per ICEA.

3. Conductor: Copper.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Aetna Insulated Wire, Inc.; a Berkshire Hathaway company.

2. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

3. Kerite; a Marmon Wire & Cable/Berkshire Hathaway company.

4. Okonite Company (The).

5. Prysmian Cables & Systems.

6. Southwire Company.

7. Or approved equal meeting the salient characteristics of this specification.

C. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.

D. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber.

1. Voltage Rating: 15 kV.

2. Insulation Thickness: 133% insulation level.

E. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.

F. Shielding and Jacket: Corrugated copper drain wires embedded in extruded, chlorinated,

polyethylene jacket.

G. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC.

2.02 CONNECTORS:


1. Comply with ANSI C119.4 for connectors between aluminum conductors or for

connections between aluminum to copper conductors.

2. Copper-Conductor Connectors: Copper barrel crimped connectors.


following:

1. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.

2. Prysmian.

3. Adalet; a Scott Fetzer company.

4. DSG-Canusa; a Shawcor company.


2.03 SOLID TERMINATIONS:


1. Cold-shrink sheath seal kit with preformed sleeve openings sized for cable and insulated

conductors.


following:


26 05 13 - 3





2. Prysmian.




C. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class

shall be equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable

terminations.

1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief tube; multiple,

molded-silicone-rubber, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and compression-type

connector.

2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type with heat-shrink inner stress control and outer

nontracking tubes; multiple, molded, nontracking skirt modules; and compression-type

connector.

3. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress-relief shield

terminator; multiple-wet-process, porcelain, insulator modules; shield ground strap; and

compression-type connector.

4. Class 1 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube,

shield ground strap, compression-type connector, and end seal.

5. Class 2 Terminations, Indoors: Kit with stress-relief tube, nontracking insulator tube,

shield ground strap, and compression-type connector. Include silicone-rubber tape;

cold-shrink-rubber sleeve; or heat-shrink, plastic-sleeve moisture seal for end of

insulation whether or not supplied with kits.

6. Class 3 Terminations: Kit with stress cone and compression-type connector.

2.04 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS:


1. Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole, cable

terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for

cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.


following:


2. Prysmian.




C. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on

cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.

D. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A-load make/break and

continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and material

of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

E. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 200 or 600-A continuous-current rating;

designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation

diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point on

terminator body that is capacitance coupled.

F. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary

terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal


26 05 13 - 4




units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connection between

terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands,

stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware.

1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire.

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for

removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction.

3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective

caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and carrying

case.

4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on

accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated

isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator.

G. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in test

points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators

capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool.

H. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and

carrying case.

2.05 SPLICE KITS:


1. Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing kit manufacturer.


following:


2. Prysmian.




C. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific sizes,

materials, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required

for complete splice, with detailed instructions.

1. Combination tape and cold-shrink-rubber sleeve kit with rejacketing by cast-epoxy-resin

encasement or other waterproof, abrasion-resistant material.

2. Insulation type and thickness shall match the cable being installed.

2.06 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TAPES:


1. Ethylene/propylene rubber-based, 30-mil (0.76-mm) splicing tape, rated for 130ºC

operation. Minimum 3/4 inch (20-mm) wide.


following:


2. Prysmian.




2.07 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS:


26 05 13 - 5





1. 10-mil-thick, corrosion-protective, moisture-resistant.


following:


2. Prysmian.




C. Arc-Proofing Tape: Fireproof tape, flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3 inch

(8-mm) thick, and compatible with cable jacket.

D. Glass-Cloth Tape: Pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1 inch (25-mm) wide.

2.08 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Purchase and turn over to Owner the following test equipment in the quantities listed:

1. Two (2) Digital Voltage Indicator Kit DVI-100/K01 with PT-DVI Proof Tester

2. One (1) Phenix Technologies 475-20, 75 kVDC portable DC Hipot

3. One (1) 15kV Diagnostic DC insulation resistance tester, Model MIT1525-US

2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Test and inspect cables according to ICEA S-97-682 before shipping.

B. Test strand-filled cables for water-penetration resistance according to ICEA T-31-610, using a

test pressure of 5 psig (35 kPa).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.

B. Proof conduits prior to conductor installation by passing a wire brush mandrel and then a

rubber duct swab through the conduit. Separate the wire brush and the rubber swab by 48 to

72 inches (1200 to 1800 mm) on the pull rope.

1. Wire Brush Mandrel: Consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit

inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull

ropes. If an obstruction is felt, pull the brush back and forth repeatedly to break up the

obstruction.

2. Rubber Duct Swab: Consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the

conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching

the pull ropes. Pull the rubber duct swab through the duct to extract loose debris from

the duct.

C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions

and sidewall pressure values.

1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that does

not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips, that

do not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to

cable.

3. Use pull-in guides, cable feeders, and draw-in protectors as required to protect cables

during installation.


26 05 13 - 6




4. Do not pull cables with ends unsealed. Seal cable ends with rubber tape.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members

and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Install cables so that splices are minimized.

F. Support cables according to SECTION 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

G. Install direct-buried cables on leveled and tamped bed of 3-inch (75-mm) thick, clean sand.

Separate cables crossing other cables or piping by a minimum of 2 inches (50-mm) of tamped

earth, plus an additional 2 inches (50-mm) of sand. Install permanent markers at ends of

cable runs, changes in direction, and buried splices.

H. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches (305-mm) above cables.

I. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around

walls by the longest route from entry to exit; support cables at intervals adequate to prevent

sag.

J. Install sufficient cable length to remove cable ends under pulling grips. Remove length of

conductor damaged during pulling.

K. Only install cable splices where indicated; use standard cold shrink kits.

L. Install terminations at ends of conductors, and seal multiconductor cable ends with standard

kits.

M. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:

1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no feeder

is indicated to be connected.

2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: At each terminal junction, with one on each

terminal.

3. Standoff Insulator: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal.

N. Arc Proofing: Unless otherwise indicated, arc proof medium-voltage cable at locations not

protected by conduit, cable tray, direct burial, or termination materials. In addition to arc-

proofing tape manufacturer's written instructions, apply arc proofing as follows:

1. Clean cable sheath.

2. Wrap metallic cable components with 10-mil (250-micrometer) pipe-wrapping tape.

3. Smooth surface contours with electrical insulation putty.

4. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with coated side toward cable.

5. Band arc-proofing tape with two layers of 1-inch (25-mm) wide half-lapped, adhesive,

glass-cloth tape at each end of the arc-proof tape.

O. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements.

P. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated.

Q. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.

Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,

and hardware.

R. Ground shields of shielded cable at one point only. Maintain shield continuity and

connections to metal connection hardware at all connection points.

S. Identify cables according to SECTION 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification. Identify phase and

circuit number of each conductor at each splice, termination; pull point, and junction box.

Arrange identification so that it is unnecessary to move the cable or conductor to read the

identification.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


26 05 13 - 7




B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing medium-voltage cables and before electrical circuitry has been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

3. Perform direct-current High Potential test of each new conductor according to

NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommended maximum test

voltage.

4. Perform Partial Discharge test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3

and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Perform Dissipation Factor test of each new conductor according to NETA ATS, Ch. 7.3.3

and to test equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Medium-voltage cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.




SECTION 26 05 19

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

26 05 19 - 1



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600V and less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600V and less.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMEMTS:

A. SECTION 26 05 13 – Medium Voltage Cables for single-conductor and multiconductor cables,

cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2,001 to 35,000V.


A. Applicable Standards (latest edition):

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM A53/A53M - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated

Welded and Seamless.


Requirements; 2018.

3. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):

a. 29 CFR - Labor, Chapter XVII - Occupational Safety and Health Administration,

Department of Labor, Part 1910 - "Occupational Safety and Health Standards,"

Subpart A - "General," Section 1910.7 - "Definition and Requirements for a

Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory."

4. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE):

a. IEEE 141 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial

Plants (the Red Book).

b. IEEE 241 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial

Buildings (the Gray Book).

5. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

a. NETA Acceptance Testing Specification - Acceptance Testing Specifications for

Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems.

6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. NEMA WC 26 - Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard (EEMAC 201).

b. NEMA WC 70 - Non-Shielded Power Cable 2,000V or less.

7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):

a. UL 4 - Armored Cable.

b. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables.

c. UL 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.


26 05 19 - 2





d. UL 486B - Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.

e. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables.

f. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.

g. UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables.

h. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables.

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.06 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the National Electrical Testing

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the National Electrical

Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES:

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.

2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.

3. General Cable Corporation.

4. Southwire Company.

5. Pyrotenax.

6. Or approved equal meeting the following salient characteristics:

a. Copper

b. THHN or XHHW insulation

c. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70.

d. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for Types THHN-THWN and

XHHW.

e. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70 for nonmetallic-sheathed cable,

Type NM and Type SO with ground wire.


26 05 19 - 3





2.02 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES:


following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.

4. 3M; Electrical Products Division.

5. Tyco Electronics Corp.

6. Or approved equal meeting the following salient characteristics:

a. Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,

and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS:

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the location where installed.

B. Conductors: Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG.

C. Conductor Material: Use copper for all sizes.

D. Feeders: Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

E. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and

larger.

3.02 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING

METHODS:

A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single

conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type XHHW, single


E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in

raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single


G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:

Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits in Cable Tray: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

J. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

K. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES:

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.

B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work.

C. Do not pull wire and cable until raceway system is complete. Pull conductors simultaneously


26 05 19 - 4





where more than one is being installed in same raceway.

D. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

F. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that

will not damage cables or raceway.

G. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,

and follow surface contours where possible.

H. Support cables according to SECTION 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

I. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to SECTION 26 05 53 – Electrical

Identification.

J. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. All splices shall be made in junction boxes.

K. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and neatly train the

conductors to terminal points. Circuits with conductors larger than No. 10 AWG shall be

bundled together inside of enclosures. Make terminations so there are no bare conductors

visible at the terminal.

L. Table 1:

1. Insulation Color Coding for Phase Identification:

2. Color code 600V insulated, service entrance, feeder, and branch circuit conductors with

factory-applied colored insulation for No. 8 AWG and smaller (except: No. 6 AWG and

smaller for green ground wire); 1-inch band of colored tape at all splices and

terminations for No. 6 AWG and larger (except: No. 4 AWG and larger for green ground

wire) as follows:

208Y/120V Phase 480Y/277V

Black A Brown

Red B Orange

Blue C Yellow

White Neutral Gray

Green Ground Green

M. Group circuits in conduit such that no conduit contains more than a total of three phase

conductors, one neutral conductor, and one ground conductor (unless indicated or specified

otherwise).

N. Install wire and cable numbers on all field wiring that matches electrical schematics.

3.04 CONNECTIONS:

A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings,

materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated.

1. Lighting and receptacle circuit connectors for No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be twist-on

spring solderless connectors. Provide silicone filled twist-on watertight/raintight

connectors for all lighting circuits and receptacles circuits routed outdoors or indoors in

wet locations.


26 05 19 - 5





2. Nonlighting and nonreceptacle circuit connectors for No. 12 AWG and larger shall be

solderless connectors.

3. All uninsulated joints shall be taped to provide an insolation value equal to that of the

wire.

B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.

C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess

equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS:

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies.

3.06 FIRESTOPPING:

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and

prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

2. Prior to energizing, check all installed feeders and building service wires and cables with

insulation megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure

requirements are fulfilled. Record and submit all field test data. Megger 300V cables

with 500Vdc megohm meter between each conductor and ground. Megger 600V cables

with 1,000Vdc megger between each conductor and ground. Also, megger between

adjacent conductors. Megger cables after installation (not on cable reel) with cables

disconnected at both ends. The values must be approximately as follows:

Conductor Size

AWG or MCM)

Resistance

(Megohms-1,000 ft.)

14-8 200

6-2/0 100

3/0-500 50

3. Do not test wires or cables with an ac test set.

4. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

5. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each splice in cables and conductors

No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box and equipment covers so splices are accessible to


26 05 19 - 6





portable scanner.

a. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of

each splice 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

b. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or

to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

c. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies splices

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING

26 05 26 - 1


Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies electrical grounding and bonding as indicated on Drawings and

schedules and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass

systems, circuits, and equipment.

B. Type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section includes the following:

1. Solidly grounded. Grounded through a ground connection in which no impedance has

been intentionally inserted.

C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section include the following:

1. Underground metal piping.

2. Underground metal water piping.

3. Underground metal structures.

4. Metal building frames.

5. Electrical power systems.

6. Grounding electrodes.

7. Counterpoise grounding loops.

8. Separately derived systems.

9. Raceways.

10. Service equipment.

11. Boxes and enclosures.

12. Equipment.

13. Lighting standards and poles.

14. Landscape lighting.

15. Signs.

16. Lightning protection systems.

17. Cable tray.

18. Chainlink fences and gates.

D. Refer to other DIVISION 26 Sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways, boxes and fittings,

and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with electrical grounding and bonding

work; not work of this Section.

1.03 REFERENCES:

A. Applicable Standards:

1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Comply with applicable

requirements and recommended installation practices of the following IEEE Standards

pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment:

a. 32 - Requirements, Terminology, and Test procedures for Neutral Grounding


26 05 26 - 2



GROUNDING

Devices.

b. 80 - Guide for Safety in Substation Grounding.

c. 81 - Guide for Measuring Ground Resistance, and Potential Gradient in the Earth.

d. 141 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for Industrial Plants.

e. 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding Industrial and Commercial Power

Systems.


Requirements; 2018.


a. 780 - Lightning Protection Code.

4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Comply with applicable requirements of the following

standards. Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-listed and labeled for

their intended usage.

a. 467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

b. 486A - Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.

c. 869 - Electrical Service Equipment.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to DIVISION 01 and SECTION 26 05 10 – Basic Electrical Requirements for administrative

and procedural requirements for Submittals.


1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and

associated accessories.

2. Qualification Data: For Qualified Testing Agency and testing agencies field Supervisor.

3. All field test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Grounding Products:

1. Salient Characteristics: The following are the salient Characteristics of the products:

a. Conductors

(1) Material: Uninsulated Stranded Copper

b. Grounding Bus:

(1) Annealed Copper, Predrilled, Rectangular Shape

c. Ground Rods

(1) ¾”x10’ Copper clad steel

2. Manufacturers:

a. Adalet-PLM Div; Scott Fetzer Co.

b. Anderson/Square D.

c. Burndy Corporation.

d. Cadweld Div; Erico Products Inc.


26 05 26 - 3



GROUNDING

e. Crouse-Hinds Div; Cooper Industries.

f. Ideal Industries, Inc.

g. Joslyn Corporation.

h. Myers Electric Products, Inc.

i. O. Z. Gedney Div; General Signal Corp.

j. Thomas and Betts Corp.

k. Or approved equal meeting the salient characteristics of this Specification.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING:

A. Materials and Components:

1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding

systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to,

cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes, bonding

jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for a complete

installation. Where more than one type component product meets indicated

requirements, selection is Contractor's code-compliance option. Where materials or

components are not indicated, provide products which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE

requirements and with established industry standards for those applications.

2. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide insulated electrical grounding

conductors for equipment grounding conductor connections that match power supply

wiring materials and as a minimum are sized according to the NEC. Provide uninsulated,

stranded, tinned, copper cable for ground electrode conductors.

3. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by

100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm)

apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in

switchboards, 600V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5,000V.

4. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals, and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates,

connectors, terminals, lugs, and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector,

terminal, and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications.

a. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure

type with at least two bolts.

b. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit

manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

c. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-

type wire terminals and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.

5. Ground Rods or Ground Electrodes:

a. Grounding Electrodes: Steel with copper clad exterior, 3/4-inch diameter by 10

feet (minimum) long.

6. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-

shrinkable insulating tubing, welding materials, bonding straps, as recommended by

accessories manufacturers for type service required or indicated.

7. Field Welding: Provide exothermic welded connections where grounding conductors

connect to underground grounding conductors and underground grounding electrodes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATIONS:

A. Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in accordance with


26 05 26 - 4



GROUNDING

manufacturer's instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation,"

and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with

requirements.

B. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

C. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when

indicated as part of duct-bank installation.

D. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On

feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal

inspection, with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of

green and two bands of yellow.

E. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment,

and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall,

6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

2. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across

top of doorway, and down to specified height above floor; connect to horizontal bus.

F. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

5. Clean metal contact surfaces of clamp-on connectors to ensure electrical conductivity

and circuit integrity.

3.02 GROUNDING OVERHEAD LINES:

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Install two parallel ground rods if resistance to ground by a single, ground-rod electrode

exceeds 25 ohms.

C. Drive ground rods until tops are 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade in undisturbed

earth.

D. Ground-Rod Connections: Install bolted connectors for underground connections and

connections to rods.

E. Lightning Arrester Grounding Conductors: Separate from other grounding conductors.

F. Secondary Neutral and Transformer Enclosure: Interconnect and connect to grounding

conductor.

G. Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood piles with molding extended from

grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.

3.03 GROUNDING UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.

B. Grounding Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod through manhole or

handhole floor, close to wall, and set rod depth so 4


26 05 26 - 5



GROUNDING

inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before

manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod

into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing

through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive insulating tape or heat-

shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete.

Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

C. Grounding Connections to Manhole Components: Bond exposed-metal parts such as inserts,

cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to

ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded,

hard-drawn copper bonding conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and

fasten to manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields according to written

instructions by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

D. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around

the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated

with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install

tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment

grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.

3.04 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING:

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with

grounding lug on substation, switchgear, switchboard, motor control center, or panelboard

ground bus. When conduit enters from below and is not connected to the enclosure, ground

equipment grounding conductor on conduit grounding bushing and then bond to ground bus

(or grounded enclosure if there is no ground bus).

C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to

those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway and power cords runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment

grounding bar terminal on busway.

9. Ground wireway at least once and at 10-foot intervals.

D. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by

NFPA 70, provide a sep0arate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS

J-STD-607-A.

1. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide

No.-4-AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding

electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central

equipment location.

2. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding

conductor on a 1/4- by 4- by 12-inch (6.3- by 100- by 300-mm) grounding bus.


26 05 26 - 6



GROUNDING

3. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

E. Wood Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate

insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with

branch-circuit conductors.

3.05 INSTALLATION:

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they

may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and

UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system

ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to

electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system

grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 10 inches below finished floor or final grade unless

otherwise indicated. Do not drill or jet. Drive ground rods into unexcavated portions of earth

where possible. If rods must be driven into excavated areas, drive rods after compaction of

backfill is completed.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as

otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if

any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod

length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding

electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

3. At grounding receptacles, drive rods to a depth such that the top of the receptacle is

flush with the finished surface.

D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are

specified in SECTION 26 05 43 – DUCT BANKS AND MANHOLES, and shall be at least 12 inches

(300 mm) deep, with cover.

1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated.

Install at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well

flush with finished grade or floor.

E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to

penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type

connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service

pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by

using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is

installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding

conductor conduit


26 05 26 - 7



GROUNDING

or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.

H. Ground Counterpoise Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each

building structure ground rod, extending around the perimeter of building, area, or item

indicated.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps

to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from building's foundation.

I. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding conductors and underground

electrodes. Ground electrode conductor shall not contain splices between the ground

electrode and the service entrance equipment.

J. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding

electrodes.

K. Ground each separately derived system neutral to:

1. Effectively grounded metallic water pipe.

2. Effectively grounded structural steel member.

3. Main building ground system.

L. Bond the system neutral to service entrance equipment enclosures.

M. Ground all exposed noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway

systems, grounding conductors in raceways and cables, receptacle ground conductors, and

metallic plumbing systems.

N. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts.

Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to

comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective

grounding.

O. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding

products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which

are subjected to corrosive action.

3.06 LABELING:

A. Comply with requirements in SECTION 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification for instruction signs.

The label or its text shall be green.

B. Install labels at the telecommunications bonding conductor and grounding equalizer and at

the grounding electrode conductor where exposed.

1. Label Text: "If this connector or cable is loose or if it must be removed for any reason,

notify the facility manager."



B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


26 05 26 - 8



GROUNDING

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,

and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance

level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test

wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors

are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of

precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural

drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of

reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod

assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,

and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and

their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena

that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1,000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1,000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohms.

5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify

Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.

END OF SECTION 260526



SECTION 26 05 29

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 29-1



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals for electrical equipment

and systems as well as construction requirements for concrete bases as indicated by Drawings

and schedules and/or specified in other Division 26 Sections.

B. Types of hangers, supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section include the

following:

1. Clevis hangers.

2. Riser clamps.

3. Steel rod coupling.

4. C-clamps.

5. I-beam clamps.

6. One-hole conduit straps.

7. Two-hole conduit straps.

8. Hexagonal nuts.

9. Round threaded steel rods.

10. Conduit clamps.

11. U-bolts.

12. Lead expansion anchors.

13. Toggle bolts.

14. Wall, ceiling, roof and floor seals.

15. Conduit cable supports.

16. U-channel strut system.

17. Fire and smoke stop compounds.


A. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 –

Concrete.

B. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are

specified as part of that equipment assembly in other Division 26 Sections.

C. Section 26 05 10 – Basic Electrical Requirements.

D. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding.


A. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents


26 05 29-2




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

unless otherwise indicated.

B. ASTM International(ASTM):

1. ASTM-A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip

Galvanized Coatings.

2. ASTM-E814 REV A - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop

Systems, pertaining to fire stop components.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

1. NECA 1 – Standard Practice of Good Workmanship In Electrical Construction.

F. Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC-PA 1 - Shop, Field and Maintenance Painting of Steel.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. Provide electrical devices, components, and fire stops which are UL-listed and labeled.

1.05 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA:

A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements

and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported

systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported

equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads

calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times

the applied force.

1.06 SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to Division 01 and Section 26 05 10 - Basic Electrical Requirements for administrative

and procedural requirements for submittals.


1. Product Data: Submit manufacture's data on supporting devices including catalog cuts,

specifications, and installation instructions, for each type of support, anchor, sleeve, and

seal.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of fabricated products, indicating weights,

strength, details of fabrication, and details of materials.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.08 COORDINATION:


26 05 29-3




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete

specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ANCHORS:


1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2, 5/8, or 3/4 inch as required.

2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16 by 4 inch or larger size as required.


following:

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. Ideal Industries, Inc.

3. Joslyn Manufacturing Co., Inc.

4. Eaton/Cooper; McGraw Edison Co.

5. Unistrut; Atkore International.


2.02 CHANNEL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS:


1. 12-gauge steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication for wet and outdoor locations, 12-

gauge standard green paint finish for dry and indoor locations, of types and sizes

indicated

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel system of one of

the following manufacturers.

1. Allied Tube & Conduit Corp.

2. Eaton/Cooper; B-Line Systems, Industries.

3. Erico International Corp.

4. Kindorf; Thomas & Betts Corp.

5. Power-Strut; Power Engineering Co.

6. Unistrut; Atkore International.


2.03 FIRE AND SMOKE STOP COMPOUNDS:


1. Firestop tested up to 3 hours in accordance with ASTM E 814 (UL 1479) and CAN/ULC

S115

2. Fire resistance tested up to 4 hours for construction joint systems in accordance with

ASTM E 1966 (UL 2079)

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel system of one of

the following manufacturers.

1. 3M Company.

2. Hilti, Inc.



26 05 29-4




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

2.04 MATERIALS:

A. Salient characteristics for each product type (supports, anchors, sleeves and seals, conduit

cable supports, strut systems, and fire and smoke stop compounds) are included as follows.

B. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard materials,

design, and construction in accordance with published product information, as required for

complete installation, and as herein specified. All supports shall be designed for the support

of the maximum number of conduits and their maximum conductor weights for maximum

conduit loading. Where more than one type of supporting device meets indicated

requirements, selection is Contractor's option. Do not use perforated metal straps for

supports.

C. Supports: Supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials indicated, and having the

following construction features.

1. Clevis Conduit Hangers: For supporting conduit; galvanized steel; with 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8- or

3/4-inch rod, size of clevis and rod as required.

2. Riser Clamps: For supporting conduit, galvanized steel, with two bolts and nuts.

3. Steel Rod Couplings: Provide 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8- or 3/4-inch straight rod couplings, size as

required.

4. C-Beam Clamps: Malleable iron, 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8-, or 3/4-inch rod, size as required.

5. I-Beam Clamps: Galvanized steel, with 3/8, 1/2-, 5/8-, or 3/4-inch rod, size as required;

3/8-inch horizontal "J" hook safety rod that bolts across the flange, flange width as

required.

6. One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; stamped plated steel, size as

required.

7. Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit, stamped plated steel, size as

required.

8. Hexagonal Nuts, Flat Washers and Lock Washers: For 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8-, or 3/4-inch rod,

size as required; galvanized steel.

9. Round Threaded Steel Rod: Galvanized steel, 3/8-, 1/2-, 5/8-, or 3/4-inch diameter, size

as required. Minimum size is 3/8-inch diameter.

10. Conduit Clamps: For supporting conduit; galvanized stamped steel, size as required.

11. U-Bolts: For supporting conduit; galvanized, size as required.

D. Anchors: Anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with the following construction

features.

1. Lead Expansion Anchors: 1/2, 5/8, or 3/4 inch as required.

2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16 by 4 inch or larger size as required.

E. Sleeves and Seals: Sleeves and seals of types, sizes, and materials indicated, with the

following construction features:

1. Pipe Sleeves: When penetrating a wall, ceiling roof or floor, provide pipe sleeves of one

of the following:

a. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with

snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves

from the following gauge metal: 3 inch and smaller, 20 gauge; 4 inch to 6 inch, 16

gauge; over 6 inches, 14 gauge.

b. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

c. Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.

d. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.


26 05 29-5




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

2. Wall, Roof and Floor Seals: Provide sleeves for conduit which penetrate foundation

walls below grade, floors, ceilings, or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and conduit

with nontoxic, UL-classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal.

3. Sleeve Seals: Provide modular mechanical type seals, consisting of interlocking

synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and

sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements

to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. Seal fire

rating shall equal or exceed that of the wall or floor penetrated.

4. Provide a fire-rated sleeve and seal equal to or exceeding the fire rating of the ceiling,

floor or wall being penetrated.

F. Conduit Cable Supports: Cable supports with insulating wedging plug for nonarmored type

electrical cables in risers; construct for rigid metal conduit (size as required) number of wires

as required, type wire as specified; construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip

galvanized finish.

G. U-Channel Strut Systems: Unless indicated otherwise, U-channel strut system for supporting

electrical equipment, 12-gauge steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication for wet and outdoor

locations, 12-gauge standard green paint finish for dry and indoor locations, of types and sizes

indicated; construct with 9/16-inch diameter holes, 8 inch o.c. on top surface, and with the

fittings as required which mate and match with U-channel.

H. Fire and Smoke Stop Compounds: Provide one of the following:

1. 3M Fire Barrier 2000+.

2. Hilti, Inc. FS-ONE.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION:

A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as specified, required, indicated, in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure

supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA and NFPA

70 for installation of supporting devices.

B. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support conduit properly from building

structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported

together on trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with spacing indicated and

as required by NFPA 70 or as indicated when less than NFPA 70 required spacing.

C. Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturer's recommended values. Ensure that

sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.

D. Design trapeze type supports, including fasteners to the structure to carry the following loads:

1. Outdoor supports shall have the following added to the calculated load:

a. Ice weighing 57 pounds per cubic foot to a thickness of (0) (0.25) (0.5) inches over

the projected area of the supports and conduit being supported.

b. Snow weighing 8 pounds per square foot over the projected area of the conduit

being supported.

c. Wind at 25 pounds per square foot acting in a downward direction.

2. The greater of the following:

a. The total calculated load multiplied by a factor of 4.

b. The total calculated load +200 pounds.


26 05 29-6




ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

E. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

F. Repair damage to painted finishes with paint recommended by manufacturer.

G. Install fire and smoke stop compounds at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors, ceilings

and roofs. Install fire and smoke stop compounds in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions to provide a fire seal rating equal to or greater than that of the surface

penetrated.

1. Testing shall be performed in accordance with ASTM-E814 REV A and applicable local

codes.

3.02 CONCRETE BASES:

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger

in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt

diameters from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials,

reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Division 03 - Concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.

3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 PAINTING:

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas

immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop

painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Touchup: Paint field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on

miscellaneous metal.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.




SECTION 26 05 33

RACEWAYS, BOXES, SLEEVES, SEALS AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

26 05 33 -1



RACEWAYS, BOXES, SLEEVES, SEAL

AND FITTINGS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies the following:

1. Conduit.

2. Wireway.

3. Surface metal raceways.

4. Outlet and device boxes.

5. Weatherproof boxes.

6. Junction boxes.

7. Pull boxes.

8. Fittings.

9. Bushings and ground bushings.

10. Locknuts.

11. Knockout closures.

12. Supports and accessories.

13. Sleeve-seal systems.

14. Sleeve-seal fittings.

15. Grout.

16. Silicone sealants.


A. Section 26 05 10 - Basic Electrical Requirements for administrative and procedural

requirements for submittals.

B. Section 26 05 26 – Grounding.

C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification.




B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA):

1. NECA NEIS 1 - Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC).

2. NEMA C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

3. NEMA C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC).


26 05 33 -2





4. NEMA RN1 - PolyVinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit

and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

5. NEMA TC-2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit.

6. NEMA TC-3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

7. NEMA TC-6 and 8 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities for Underground Installation.

8. NEMA TC-9 - Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground

Installation.

9. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.

10. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.

11. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000V Maximum).

12. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems.

13. NEMA VE 2 - Metal Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA-70 - National Electrical Code, (NEC). Comply with applicable requirements of NEC

pertaining to construction and installation of raceway systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. Provide all devices and equipment which are UL listed and labeled.

2. UL 1 - Standards for Flexible Metal Conduit.

3. UL 5, 5A, 5B, 5C - Standard for Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings.

4. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel.

5. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel.

6. UL 50, 50E - Standard for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

7. UL 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

8. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

9. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes.

10. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings.

11. UL 514C - Standard for Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers.

12. UL 651 - Standard for Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings.

13. UL 651A - Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit.

14. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing – Steel.

15. UL 797A - Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing – Aluminum and Stainless Steel.

16. UL 870 - Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings.

17. UL 1203 - Standard for Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for

Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

18. UL 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit – Steel.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:



B. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Product Data:

a. Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including specifications and

installation instructions, for each type of product required. Include data

substantiating that materials comply with requirements.


26 05 33 -3





b. Submit layout drawings of electrical floor, junction and pull boxes showing

accurately scaled box layouts and their spatial relationship to associated

equipment.

2. Samples: For wireways and surface raceways and for each color and texture specified,

12 inches long.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RIGID STEEL CONDUIT:

A. SALIENT CHARACTERISTICS: The following are salient characteristics of the product:

1. The following are salient characteristics of the product:

a. Minimum size ¾”

b. Must conform to UL 6A

B. Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide each type from one of the

following:

(1) Allied Tube & Conduit; Atkore International.

(2) Republic Conduit, Inc.

(3) Wheatland Tube Co.

(4) Or approved equal meeting the salient characteristics of this specification.

2.02 EMT:




b. Must conform to UL 797


following:

(1) Allied Tube and Conduit; Atkore International.

(2) Republic Conduit, Inc.

(3) Wheatland Tube Co.; JMC Steel Group.

(4) Hoffman Engineering Company.

(5) O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group.


2.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:




b. Must conform to UL 1


following:

(1) AFC Cable Systems; Atkore International.

(2) Anaconda Sealtite; Division of ANAMET Electrical, Inc.

(3) Electri-Flex Co.

(4) Southwire Company.


26 05 33 -4






2.04 LIQUID-TIGHT, FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:



a. construct of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped

steel; galvanized inside and outside; coat with (oil-resistant,) liquid-tight

thermoplastic jacket.


following:

(1) AFC Cable Systems; Atkore International.

(2) Anaconda Sealtite; Division of ANAMET Electrical, Inc.


(4) Southwire Company.


2.05 RIGID METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS:



a. Must conform to UL 514B


following:

(1) Appleton; EGS Electrical Group.

(2) Raco; Hubbell Company.

(3) Thomas & Betts Corp.


2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS:



a. Threadless hinged clamp type. Provide conduit fittings for use with flexible steel

conduit. Fittings shall be approved for grounding per NFPA 70 Article 348.60.


following:





2.07 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS:



a. Provide cadmium plated, malleable-iron fittings with compression type steel

ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated or noninsulated throat.


26 05 33 -5





Fittings shall be approved for grounding in conduit sizes 1-1/4 inch and smaller per

NFPA 70 Article 350.60.


following:





2.08 EMT FITTINGS:



a. Must be steel compression type.


following:


(2) Raco; Hubbell Company.

(3) Thomas & Betts Corp.


2.09 CONDUIT BODIES:



a. Provide conduit and tubing accessories of types, sizes, and materials, complying

with manufacturer's published product information which mate and match

conduit and tubing.


following:


(2) Arrow-Hart Div; Cooper Industries.

(3) Killark; Hubbell Inc.



2.10 INTERIOR BOXES:



a. Galvanized, coated, flat rolled, sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic

inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as required, indicated, and

specified, suitable for installation at respective locations.


following:


(2) Bell; Hubbell, Inc.



26 05 33 -6





(4) Pass and Seymour; Legrand.

(5) Raco; Hubbell, Inc.

(6) Steel City; Thomas & Betts Corp.


2.11 WEATHERPROOF BOXES:



a. Corrosion-resistant, cast-metal, weatherproof, outlet wiring boxes


following:


(2) Arrow Hart; Eaton.

(3) Hubbell, Inc.


(5) Pass and Seymour; Legrand.


2.12 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:



a. Galvanized, code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers

2. Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, provide each type from one

of the following:



(3) Bell Electric, Square D Company.

(4) Hoffman Engineering Company.



2.13 BUSHINGS, GROUNDING BUSHINGS AND LOCKNUTS:



a. Galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types, shapes, and sizes as required to

fulfill job requirements and NFPA-70 requirements. Construct conduit bodies with

threaded conduit entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized

steel, and corrosion-resistant screws.


following:




(4) Raco; Hubbell, Inc.

(5) Steel City; Thomas & Betts Corp.


26 05 33 -7






2.14 ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES:



a. Must conform with NEMA 250 Type 1 or 3R.


following:

(1) Hoffman; Pentair Equipment Protection.

(2) Wiegmann; Hubbell, Inc.


2.15 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS:



a. Must be constructed from EPDM rubber.

b. Connectors must be made of stainless steel.


following:

(1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

(2) CALPICO, Inc.

(3) Metraflex Company (The).

(4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

(5) Proco Products, Inc.


2.16 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS:



a. Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall


following:

(1) Link-Seal.

(2) Presealed Systems.


2.17 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:

A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing, and fittings of types, grades, sizes, and weights (wall

thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not specified or

indicated, provide proper selection to fulfill specified requirements, and comply with

applicable portions of NEC for raceways. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch, unless indicated or

specified otherwise.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid steel, zinc coated, threaded type conforming to UL 6A.

1. Zinc coating fused to inside and outside walls.


26 05 33 -8





C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): UL 797.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1. Formed from continuous length of spirally-wound, interlocked

zinc-coated strip steel. Minimum size shall be 1/2 inch unless indicated or specified

otherwise. Approved as a grounding path for circuits rated 20 amperes or less and in lengths

of 6 feet and less.

E. Liquid-Tight, Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; construct of single

strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and

outside; coat with (oil-resistant,) liquid-tight thermoplastic jacket. Approved as a grounding

path in conduit sizes 1-1/4 inch and smaller and in lengths 6 feet or less when protected as

follows:

1. 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch protected at 20 amperes or less.

2. 3/4 inch, 1 inch and 1-1/4 inch protected at 60 amperes or less.

F. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: Threaded cast-malleable iron, galvanized or cadmium plated,

conforming to UL 514B.

1. Provide steel fittings for steel conduit.

2. Provide aluminum fittings for aluminum conduit.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Threadless hinged clamp type. Provide conduit fittings for

use with flexible steel conduit. Fittings shall be approved for grounding per NFPA 70 Article

348.60.

1. Straight Terminal Connectors: One-piece body, female end with clamp and deep slotted

machine screw for securing conduit, and male threaded end provide with locknut.

2. 45 degree or 90 degree Terminal Angle Connectors: Two piece body construction with

removable upper section, female end with clamp and deep slotted machine screw for

securing conduit, and male threaded end provided with locknut.

H. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Provide cadmium plated, malleable-iron fittings

with compression type steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated or

noninsulated throat. Fittings shall be approved for grounding in conduit sizes 1-1/4 inch and

smaller per NFPA 70 Article 350.60.

I. EMT Fittings: Steel compression type.

J. Conduit Bodies: Galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types, shapes, and sizes as required

to fulfill job requirements and NFPA-70 requirements. Construct conduit bodies with

threaded conduit entrance ends, removable covers, either cast or of galvanized steel, and

corrosion-resistant screws.

K. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit and tubing accessories of types, sizes, and

materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information which mate and

match conduit and tubing.

L. Conduit Bushings: Provide insulated throat for all bushings. Grounding bushings shall have an

integral copper set-screw type cable grounding lug.

2.18 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:

A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts, and fittings of types, sizes, and weights for each

service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection

determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements which comply with provisions of NFPA 70

for raceways. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Electrical Plastic Conduit:


26 05 33 -9





1. Heavy-Wall Conduit: Schedule 40, 90ºC, UL rated, constructed of polyvinyl chloride and

conforming to NEMA TC-2, for direct burial or normal aboveground use, UL listed, and in

conformity with NFPA 70 Article 352.

2. Extra-Heavy-Wall Conduit: Schedule 80, 90ºC, UL rated, constructed of polyvinyl

chloride compound C 200 PVC, and UL listed in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 352 for

direct burial or aboveground use.

C. PVC Conduit Fittings: NEMA TC-3, mate and match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC-6 and -8, Type EB-20 for encased burial in

concrete, Type DB-60 for direct burial, Type EB-35 for encased burial in concrete, Type DB-120

for direct buried.

E. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: NEMA TC-9, mate and match to duct type and

material.

F. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing, and duct accessories of types, sizes,

and materials, complying with manufacturer's published information which mate and match

conduit and tubing.

2.19 FABRICATED MATERIALS:

A. Outlet Boxes: Galvanized, coated, flat rolled, sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic

inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as required, indicated, and specified, suitable

for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with

conduit knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes for

grounding screws, fastening devices, box covers, and for equipment grounding. Minimum

box size shall be 4-inch by 4-inch by 1.5 inches, provide larger box if required, specified or

indicated otherwise.

B. Device Boxes: Galvanized, coated, flat rolled, sheet-steel device boxes, of shapes, cubic inch

capacities, and sizes, including box depths as required, indicated, and specified, suitable for

installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting

holes, with conduit knockout openings in bottom and sides, and with threaded screw holes

for fastening devices and box covers. Provide corrosion-resistant screws for equipment

grounding. Minimum box size shall be 4-inch by 4-inch by 1.5 inches, provide larger box if

required, specified or indicated otherwise.

1. Device Box Accessories: Provide as required for each installation, including mounting

brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board

expandable grip fasteners (use only in existing walls) which are compatible with device

boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.

Choice of accessories is Contractor's code-compliance option.

C. Weatherproof Boxes: Corrosion-resistant, cast-metal, weatherproof, outlet wiring boxes, of

types, shapes, and sizes, including depth of boxes as required with threaded conduit hubs for

fastening electrical conduit. Provide cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged, watertight

caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-

resistant fasteners.

D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Galvanized, code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with

screw-on covers; of types, shapes, and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation;

with welded seams and equipped with manufacturer's standard corrosion resistant steel nuts,

bolts, screws and washers.


26 05 33 -10





E. Floor Boxes: Cast-iron, raintight, adjustable floor boxes as indicated, with threaded-conduit-

entrance ends and vertical adjusting rings, gaskets, brass floor plates with flush screw-on

covers with ground flange and stainless steel cover screws.

1. Floor Boxes Accessories: Flush type, duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire, grounding, 125V, 20

ampere, floor-type receptacles with flanges.

F. Bushings: Provide threaded, nylon insulated metallic bushings. Provide steel bushings for

conduit sizes 1.5 inches and smaller. Provide malleable iron bushings for conduit sizes 2

inches and larger.

G. Grounding Bushings: Provided where indicated, specified and required by NEC. Provide

threaded, insulated, malleable iron bushing with lay-in screw clamp lug.

H. Locknuts: Provide steel locknuts for conduit sizes 2 inches and smaller. Provide malleable

iron for conduit sizes 2.5 inches and larger.

I. Sealing Hub: Provide watertight, threaded, insulated sealing hub connectors for all outdoor

and indoor wet locations where conduit enters enclosures. Sealing hub threaded lengths shall

be adequate to allow installation of bushing.

J. Knockout Closures: Provide steel press-in knockout seals for all unused punched out

knockouts 2 inches and smaller. Provide steel two-piece bolt on knockout seals for all unused

punched out knockouts 2.5 inches and larger.

K. Fittings: Provide all threaded nipples, insulated short elbows, offset nipples, offset

connectors, enlargers and reducers as required. Provide EMT compression type connectors

with insulated throat. Provide EMT compression type insulated short elbows as required.

Provide EMT set-screw type offset connectors as required.

L. Hinged-Cover Enclosures:

1. Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, TYPE 1, 3R (or other as appropriate for the service

location) with continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

a. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

b. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic or Fiberglass.

c. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

M. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R (appropriate for the service area) galvanized-steel box with

removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with

manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.20 SLEEVES:

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53/A53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain

ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron

pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.


26 05 33 -11





B. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40.

C. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3

mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and

one or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch

(3.5 mm).

2.21 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS:

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space

between sleeve and raceway or cable.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel.

3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates

to sealing elements.

2.22 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS:

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening

to match piping OD.

2.23 GROUT:

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C1107/C1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.24 SILICONE SEALANTS:

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

2. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."


26 05 33 -12





B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS:

A. General:

1. Install raceways as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and in compliance with NEC. Install raceways plumb and level, and

maintain NEC recommended clearances. Provide raceway supports in accordance with

the NEC and Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

B. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, boxes, and panel work as necessary to

interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF CONDUITS:

A. General: Install concealed conduits in new construction work - in walls, in slabs, or above

suspended ceilings. Run conduits concealed in existing work where practicable. Where

conduits cannot be concealed in finished areas, use surface metal raceways only where

indicated. Provide holes for conduit in all boxes, panels and enclosures as required.

1. All conduit installed above grade that contains emergency power and emergency

lighting conductors shall be identified in accordance with Section 26 05 53 – Electrical

Identification.

2. Mechanically fasten together metal conduits, enclosures, and raceways to form

continuous electrical conductor. Connect to electrical boxes, fittings, and cabinets to

provide electrical continuity and firm mechanical assembly.

3. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of galvanic

corrosion. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat surfaces with corrosion

inhibiting compound before assembling.

4. Install miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, close nipples, 3 piece unions, split

couplings, and plugs that have been specifically designed and manufactured for their

particular application. Install telescoping type linear expansion fittings in raceways

every 200 foot linear run and wherever structural expansion joints are crossed.

5. Use roughing-in dimensions of electrically powered units furnished by unit

manufacturer. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only after receiving

dimensions and after checking location with other trades.

6. Test conduits required to be installed but left empty with ball mandrel. Clear any

conduit which rejects ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and

surrounding surfaces to original condition. Provide 200-pound tensile strength nylon

conduit fish line throughout the entire length of all empty conduits. Leave 12 inches of

slack at each end.

7. Do not install conduit in front of covers of new and existing electrical equipment, pull

boxes, and junction boxes.

8. Provide a weatherproof duct seal compound between the conductors and the inner

walls of all conduit that are routed to NEMA 3, 3R, 3S, 4 and 4X enclosures to prohibit

moisture and/or humid air from entering the raceway and condensing.


26 05 33 -13





9. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with a zinc-rich paint recommended by the

manufacturer.

10. Repair damage to PVC finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by the

manufacturer.

11. Where metallic conduit leaves cast-in-place concrete (to air, to earth or to compacted

fill) coat the conduit 2 inches on either side of the line formed by the finished concrete

surface with a bitumastic asphalt coating.

B. Conduit Installation: Provide rigid steel zinc-coated conduit where embedded in cast-in-place

concrete, in hazardous locations, routed below floor slabs, when containing circuits over

600Vac, routed through cast-in-place masonry, or installed outdoors. Follow minimum

requirements in other areas as follows:

1. Use rigid steel zinc-coated conduit in mechanical equipment rooms, electrical

equipment rooms, penthouses where exposed to physical damage, crawl spaces,

tunnels, service splines, kitchens and cafeterias, and in warehouse spaces below 18 feet-

0 inches height, and for 208 and 480V feeder circuits to switchboards, panelboards,

switchgear and motor control centers.

2. Use steel zinc-coated EMT for interior 208V branch circuits, interior concealed 120V

power, lighting, alarms, controls, and communications in offices, corridors, toilets,

lunchroom areas, lab areas, ceiling plenum areas, and in warehouse spaces above 18

feet-0 inches height.

3. Use flexible steel conduit only in movable partitions and from outlet boxes to interior

recessed lighting fixtures, and final 24 inches of connection to motors, transformers,

and control items. Provide where subject to movement and vibration where

connections are in dry, nonhazardous, interior locations. Provide in cells of precast

concrete panels. Provide a "green" insulated equipment ground wire suitably sized per

NEC 250.122 unless indicated otherwise in all flexible steel conduit.

4. Use liquid-tight flexible conduit in nonhazardous locations (length shall not exceed 6

feet, unless indicated otherwise) where subjected to movement and vibration where

connections are subjected to one or more of the following conditions:

a. Exterior location.

b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensation can be expected to accumulate.

c. Corrosive atmosphere.

d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease.

e. Connected to a motor driving a nonsubmerged pump.

5. Provide a "green" insulated equipment ground wire suitably sized per NEC 250.122

unless indicated otherwise in all liquid-tight flexible conduit.

6. Cut conduits straight, properly ream, and cut threads for threaded conduit deep and

clean.

7. Field-bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort nor vary

internal diameter.

8. Size conduits as indicated, unless no size is indicated then size per NEC, except no

conduit smaller than 3/4 inch shall be embedded in concrete or masonry.

9. Fasten indoor, dry location threaded conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by

2 locknuts, and terminate with bushing. Install locknuts inside and outside enclosure.

10. Conduits shall not cross pipe shafts, access openings or ductwork openings.

11. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers.


26 05 33 -14





12. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. Where

required, use 3-piece union or split coupling.

13. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/wires

within raceways.

C. Conduits in Concrete Slabs:

1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing steel.

2. Place conduits either parallel or at 90 degrees to main reinforcing steel.

3. Separate conduits by not less than the outside diameter of the largest conduit to ensure

proper concrete bond.

4. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by the Owner's

Representative.

5. Embedded conduit outside diameter shall not exceed 1/3 of slab thickness.

D. Install conduits so as not to damage or run through solid structural members. Avoid

horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls.

E. Exposed Conduits:

1. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit systems neatly and

parallel with or at right angles to walls of building or structure.

2. Install exposed conduit work so as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, windows, doors,

lights, ventilation ducts or outlets.

3. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps, or clips. Support conduits on each

side of bends and on spacing not to exceed NEC requirements.

4. Run conduit for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors for supporting

conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.

5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space

above suspended ceilings and in crawl spaces.

F. Nonmetallic Conduits:

1. Provide only where indicated. Do not install in hazardous locations.

2. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.

3. Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance with local utility

practices.

4. All duct banks shall be a minimum of 3 feet below grade. Conduit in duct banks shall

have a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover in all directions. There shall be a

minimum of 2 inches of concrete separation between all conduit.

5. All conduit risers from buried conduit or duct banks shall be made with internally

urethane coated and externally PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit elbows.

G. Conduit Fittings:

1. Provide locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosures with a sharp edge for digging

into metal and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. Standard locknuts

are not acceptable.

2. Provide threaded, nylon insulated bushings for terminating conduits which have flared

bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent injury to cable insulation.

3. Provide threaded, grounding bushings of insulated type with copper set screw clamp

type lay-in grounding terminal where required by NEC, where indicated or specified.

4. Provide miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, close nipples, 3 piece unions, split

couplings, and plugs as required which are specifically designed for their particular

application.


26 05 33 -15





5. Provide grounding in accordance with Section 26 05 26 - Grounding.

6. Provide raintight hubs on all outdoor conduit that are terminated in a nonthreaded

enclosure hole.

7. Provide identification of all raceways as specified in Section 26 05 53 - Electrical

Identification.

8. EMT shall have galvanized compression type box connectors at all boxes.

9. Provide raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them

with UL listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush

steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to adjacent wall plate or

surfaces. Provide sealing fittings where:

a. Conduit enters or leaves hazardous locations.

b. Where conduit passes from warm locations to cold locations, such as boundaries

of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:

A. General: Install electrical boxes, bushings, locknuts, nipples, connectors, sealing hubs, and

fittings as required, indicated, in accordance with applicable requirements of NEC and in

accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices, and

raceway installation work.

C. Provide weatherproof boxes for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or

moisture.

D. All boxes containing emergency power and lighting circuits shall be identified as specified in

Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

E. Provide (oil-tight) knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been

removed.

F. Install electrical boxes in only those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed

electrical wiring.

G. Maximum box size in a fire-rated wall shall be 4 inches by 4 inches square. Do not install

boxes back-to-back in walls. In nonfire-rated and nonacoustic- rated walls, provide not less

than 6 inches (150 mm) horizontal separation between boxes installed in opposite sides of

wall. Provide not less than 24 inches (610 mm) horizontal separation between boxes installed

in opposite sides of fire-rated and acoustic- rated walls.

H. Do not install aluminum products in concrete.

I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.

K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to the surfaces to which attached, structural surfaces

to which attached, or solidly embed them in concrete or masonry.

L. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.

M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.

3.04 GROUNDING:

A. Properly ground electrical boxes and demonstrate compliance with NEC requirements. Bond

all non-isolated equipment grounding conductors to all electrical boxes.


26 05 33 -16





3.05 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS:

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NECA VE-2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

b. b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches (50 mm)

above finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for

installing sleeve-seal system.

3.06 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION:

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.07 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION:

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.


26 05 33 -17





C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




SECTION 26 05 43

DUCT BANKS AND MANHOLES

26 05 43 - 1




PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Underground electrical duct systems consisting of banks of nonmetallic or metallic ducts

encased in concrete. Reinforcement shall be used as indicted unless otherwise noted.

2. Reinforced concrete manholes including concrete inserts and miscellaneous hardware.

3. All necessary earth and rock excavation and backfill.

4. Removal and disposal of all excess excavation material.


A. Section 26 05 33 – Raceways, Boxes, Sleeves, Seal and Fittings for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:



1. Catalog cuts.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 DUCT SPACERS:


1. Synthetic spacers – sizes and quantities as required.


following:

1. Carlon, Div. of Thomas & Betts.

2. Cantex, Inc.

3. Formex Manufacturing, Inc.


2.02 DUCTS:

A. Salient characteristics are listed as follows in this section.

B. Provide as specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Sleeves, Seals, and Fittings for

Electrical Systems.

C. Provide with all necessary end bells, couplings, offset couplings, elbows, plugs, caps, and

other fittings.

D. All ducts shall be 4-inch or 5-inch unless otherwise indicated.

E. Provide prefabricated, horizontal and vertical interlocking type plastic duct spacers and


26 05 43 - 2




accessories as needed for duct spacing as indicated.

F. Provide large radius elbows for all duct termination risers, except where impractical or where

indicated otherwise. Minimum radius elbows for these risers shall be 24 inches.

2.03 REINFORCING STEEL AND CONCRETE:

A. Provide as indicated in drawing details.

2.04 HARDWARE:

A. All manhole frames and covers shall be Neenah Foundry Catalog No. R-6663-OH unless

otherwise indicated.

B. All pulling-in irons shall be Hubbell Power Systems, Inc., Chance Pole Line Hardware, Item No.

8119.

C. All manhole cast-in steps shall be Neenah Foundry Catalog No. R-1982-J unless otherwise

indicated.

D. All concrete inserts shall be hot-dipped galvanized finish, and as manufactured by one of the

following:

1. Cooper B-Line, B52-I series

2. Power-Strut, PS 449 series

3. Unistrut, P3300 series


E. Grounding shall be as indicated or as specified in Section 26 05 26 Grounding.

2.05 MANHOLE CONDUIT STUB OUTS:

A. Use rigid steel conduit and fittings as specified in Section 26 05 33 Raceways, Boxes, Sleeves,

Seals, and Fittings for Electrical Systems.

B. Install as indicated.

2.06 "PULLING-IN" ROPE:


B. Nylon or polypropylene.

C. Minimum breaking strength: 2,000 pounds.

2.07 PRECAST MANHOLES:


B. Design as required for site conditions.

C. Design for H-20 highway rated loading.

D. Set precast sections on a cast-in-place base.

E. Conform to ASTM C478. Provide with cast iron cover specified.

F. Provide seals at joints as follows:

1. Rubber O-ring gaskets in keyed joints.

2. Adhesive butyl compound. Apply to each side of joint.

3. Waterstop at joint between base and bottom precast section and at duct bank

penetrations.

G. Design for duct bank openings or knock-outs.


26 05 43 - 3




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION:

A. Perform excavations necessary for duct bank and manhole installations.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Cast anchors into concrete seal coat, as indicated, at maximum 5-foot intervals.

B. Duct Banks:

1. Ducts:

a. Assemble as follows:

(1) Use spacers to maintain horizontal and vertical separation as indicated.

Maximum longitudinal distance between spacers for PVC duct shall be 6 feet.

Maximum longitudinal distance between spacers for rigid steel conduit shall

not be greater than 3 feet.

(2) Stagger joints in each adjacent duct for single row duct banks and stagger

joints in adjacent rows of ducts for multiple row duct banks.

(3) Make all joints watertight by application of joint sealer compound furnished

by duct manufacturer.

(4) Do not put reinforcing steel or other ferrous material between individual

ducts.

b. Securely tie overall and anchor to seal coat at 5-foot intervals in order to prevent

flotation.

c. After assembly, align ducts so that they do not vary from the drawings more than

4 inches in the horizontal or vertical plane.

d. Where duct banks end in vertical stub-up risers properly size the radius of the riser

elbows so that the top termination of the duct bank is in a vertical position and

terminate each duct with grounding bushings unless indicated otherwise.

e. Where duct banks end in the walls of underground structures provide end bell

terminations on each duct installed flush with the inside face of the concrete wall

unless indicated otherwise.

f. Cap ducts installed and not terminated, for future extension by others, and leave

ready for said extension.

2. Concrete:

a. Prior to assembling and pouring duct banks place a 2-inch concrete seal coat at the

base of the duct bank trench.

b. Cast anchors into concrete seal coat, as indicated, at maximum 5-foot intervals.

c. Do not pour duct bank concrete prior to Engineer’s inspection and approval of

duct and reinforcing installation.

3. Minimum non-factory unformed radius for horizontal bends, unless indicated otherwise,

is 50 ft.

C. Manholes:

1. Construction:

a. Construct with formed roof and walls to the dimensions and at locations indicated.

b. Install the following as indicated:

(1) Concrete inserts.

(2) Pulling-in irons.

(3) Steps.


26 05 43 - 4




(4) Conduit and conduit stub-outs.

(5) Openings.

(6) Grounding conductors and rods.

(7) Waterstops on all duct bank penetrations.

c. Place forming, reinforcing and concrete as indicated.

d. Provide ground rods and ground connections to all metal items as indicated, or

specified in Section 26 05 26 Grounding.

2. Dampproofing: Apply two coats, at 12 mils per coat. Apply in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions on all outside manhole surfaces that are below grade,

except manhole floor.

3.03 CLEANING:

A. Rod and clean all ducts with swabs and mandrels after installation of the duct bank and install

pulling ropes in all spare ducts. After ducts are cleaned and pulling ropes are installed, plug

each end of all ducts.

3.04 BACKFILLING:

A. Do not backfill until concrete has reached 70% of design strength.




SECTION 26 05 53

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

26 05 53 - 1


Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies electrical identification work including the following:

1. Buried cable and duct bank warnings.

2. Electrical power, control, and communication conductors (and raceways).

3. Operational instructions and warnings.

4. Danger, caution and warning signs.

5. Equipment/system identification nameplates.


A. Section 26 05 73 – Power System Studies.




B. Applicable Standards: Comply with the applicable requirements of the following standards.

1. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

a. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

2. ASTM International (ASTM):

a. ASTM D709 - Standard Specification for Laminated Thermosetting Materials.


Requirements; 2018.

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

a. Z535.1 – Safety Colors.

b. Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels.


a. 70E – Standard For Electrical Safety In The Workplace.

b. 72 – National Electric Safety Code (NESC) – IEEE C2.

6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):

a. 29 CFR 1910.144 – Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

b. 29 CFR 1910.145 - Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs and Tags.

7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), pertaining to electrical identification systems:

a. 969-1995 – Standards for Marking and Labeling Systems.- Fourth Edition; Reprint

with Revisions Through and Including September 19, 2014.

1.05 SUBMITTALS:




26 05 53 - 2




1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical identification materials and

products.

2. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style, and other graphic

representation required for each identification material or system.


A. Comply with ASME A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with NEMA Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.07 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements

in other sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those

required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout

Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ORANGE "EMERGENCY" AND "( )-VOLT" CONDUIT, EQUIPMENT, BOX, AND CABLE TRAY

MARKERS:


1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape marker not less than 3 mils thick.


following:

1. Brady Worldwide, Inc.

2. Panduit Corp.

3. Seton Identification Products.

4. Thomas & Betts Corp.


C. General:

1. Provide 1-1/8 inch wide by 4-1/2 inch long marker for 2 inch and smaller conduit.

Provide 2-1/4 inch wide by 9 inch long marker for 2-1/2 inch and larger conduit and all

cable tray. Except as otherwise indicated, provide black lettering which indicates

highest voltage of cables(s) in conduit or cable tray. Provide black lettering that

indicates "Emergency" power circuit is in conduit or cable tray.

2. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide orange

background tape marker.


26 05 53 - 3



2.02 UNDERGROUND TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKER:


1. Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape marker intended for direct-

burial service; not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




C. General:

1. Provide tape marker with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of

buried cable or duct bank. (Provide embedded continuous metallic strip or core.)

2.03 WIRE/CABLE IDENTIFICATION BANDS:


1. Vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type, either

prenumbered plastic coated type or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover

flap


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




C. General:

1. Number to show circuit identification number indicated on Drawings or Shop Drawings.

2.04 PLASTICIZED TAGS:


1. Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention and operational tags, on

plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4 inches by

5-5/8 inches, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate preprinted

wording, including large-size primary wording, e.g., "DANGER, DO NOT OPERATE."

2. Tags shall comply with OSHA requirements.


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




2.05 SELF-ADHESIVE PLASTIC SIGNS:



26 05 53 - 4



1. Self-adhesive or pressure-sensitive, preprinted, flexible vinyl signs for operational

instructions or warnings; of sizes suitable for application areas and adequate for

visibility, with proper wording for each application, e.g., "EXHAUST FAN."


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




C. General:

1. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white

signs with black lettering.

2. Electric Fire Pumps Signs:

a. Sign at fire pump disconnect shall read: "Fire Pump Disconnecting Means."

b. Sign at fire pump controller shall read: "Fire Pump Disconnect is located at

___________.")

2.06 BAKED ENAMEL "DANGER" SIGNS:


1. "DANGER" signs of baked enamel finish on 20-gauge steel (unless specified otherwise);

of standard safety red, safety black, and safety white; 14 inches by 10 inches size, except

where 10 inches by 7 inches is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and

except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard

explanation wording, e.g., "_____VOLTS, KEEP AWAY."

2. Sign shall conform to OSHA and NEMA Z535.4.


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




2.07 BAKED ENAMEL "CAUTION" SIGNS:


1. "CAUTION" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 gauge steel (unless specified otherwise);

of standard safety yellow with safety black letters; 14 inches by 10 inches size, except

where 10 inches by 7 inches is the largest size which can be applied where needed, and

except where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard

explanation wording, e.g., "Caution for Ear Protection Required in this Area."



following:


2. Panduit Corp.



26 05 53 - 5





2.08 BAKED ENAMEL "WARNING" SIGNS:


1. "WARNING" signs of baked enamel finish on 20 gauge steel (unless specified otherwise);

of standard safety orange with safety black letters; 14 inches by 10 inches size, except

where 10 inches by 7 inches is largest size that can be applied where needed and except

where larger size is needed for adequate vision; with recognized standard explanation

wording.



following:


2. Panduit Corp.




2.09 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE NAMEPLATES:


1. Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate nameplates, in sizes (minimum height of

characters shall be 1/8 inch) and thicknesses specified or indicated, engraved with

engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, white face and black core

plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, specified or required.

2. Sign shall comply with OSHA and NEMA Z535.1.

3. Nameplate shall be punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting

is necessary because of surface it is mounted to.


following:


2. Panduit Corp.




C. General:

a. Thickness: 1/16-inch, for units up to 20 square inches or 8 inch length; 1/8-inch

for larger units.

b. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate surface it is mounted to.

D. Lettering and Graphics:

a. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in electric

identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified, or

scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or, if not

otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer or as required for proper

identification and operation/maintenance of electrical systems and equipment.

Comply with ASME A13.1 pertaining to minimum sizes for letters and numbers.


26 05 53 - 6



Comply with OSHA and NEMA Z535.4 requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:

A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and requirements of NEC.

2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish

painting, install identification after completion of painting.

3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities

for identification of electrical work.

B. Conduit and Cable Tray Identification Markers:

1. General: Where electrical conduit is exposed, apply identification markers on electrical

conduit at 20 foot intervals (visible from the floor) and within 3 feet of all panelboards,

switchboards, switchgear, automatic transfer switches, emergency generators,

substations, switches, devices, and circuit breakers (readily visible when standing in

front of equipment). Identification on cable tray shall be on outside of both sidewalls at

20 foot intervals.

C. Underground Cable, Conduit, and Duct Bank Identification Marker:

1. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground direct buried

electrical, signal or communication cable, conduit and duct bank, install continuous

underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over the direct buried cable,

conduit or duct bank at 12 inches below finished grade. Where multiple small direct

buried cables are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16

inches, install a single line marker.

2. Install line marker for every cable below grade, regardless of whether direct-buried,

protected in conduit, or conduit in duct bank.

D. Wire/Cable Identification Bands:

1. General: Apply cable/conductor identification bands, including circuit number, on each

wire/cable in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or

communication/signal system are present. Match identification with marking system

used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents, and similar previously

established identification for project's electrical work.

E. Operational Identification and Warning Plasticized Tags and Metal Signs and Plastic Signs:

1. General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and

maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and

general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by

unauthorized personnel, install signs with instruction or warnings. When signs are

installed on switches, outlets, controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures they

may be self-adhesive vinyl or plastic. Where detailed instructions or explanations are

needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended

purposes.

F. Danger Signs:

1. General: In addition to installation of danger signs specified, indicated, and required by

governing regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations

indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as


26 05 53 - 7



constituting similar dangers for persons in or about Project.

2. XXXX Volts: Install danger signs (with actual circuit voltage) on all building doors,

substations, switchgear, switchboards, panelboards switches, circuit breakers, etc.,

wherever it is possible (under any circumstances) for persons to come into contact with

electrical voltages to ground greater than 277V.

3. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls,

regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation

(by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons or damage to or loss of

property.

4. Provide the following danger sign on the equipment indicated:

a. "Danger This Machine Starts Automatically" on all fire pumps, air compressors and

emergency generators.

5. Provide the following danger signs on the doors leading to the equipment indicated:

a. "Danger Hearing Protection Required" on all emergency generator room doors.

b. "Danger: No Smoking, Matches or Open Flames" on all emergency generator

room doors (, personnel doors opening into aircraft hangar,) and battery room

doors.

G. Warning Signs:

1. Provide an orange background sign with black letters reading "WARNING: LOAD SIDE

OF SWITCH MAY BE ENERGIZED BY BACKFEED" on all tie switches and tie circuit

breakers.

2. Provide cable tray warning signs with 1-1/2-inch high black letters on an orange

background that reads: "Warning! Not to be used as a walkway, ladder or support for

ladders for personnel." Provide on each side of cable tray at 10-foot intervals, visible

from the floor below.

3. Provide Arc Flash Warning signs on electrical equipment such as switchboards,

switchgear, panelboards, transfer switches, industrial control panels, motor control

centers and meter socket enclosures that are likely to require examination, adjustment,

servicing, or maintenance while energized. Marking shall be permanently affixed and of

a durable nature to withstand the environment within which it is installed.

4. Provide Available Fault Current Warning signs on electrical equipment as specified in

Section 26 05 73 Power System Studies. Label shall include possible incident energy

exposure within arc flash boundary in front of equipment as well as meet NFPA 70E for

additional content.

H. Caution Signs:

1. Provide yellow background caution signs with black letters on the doors leading to the

equipment indicated:

a. "Caution Ear Protection Required in this Area" on all emergency generator room

doors.

2. Provide the following yellow background caution sign with black letters on all

panelboards, substations, switches, circuit breakers, and switchboards where turning off

a circuit will automatically start an emergency generator:

a. "Caution Turning Off this Circuit will Automatically Start Emergency Generator XX"

3. Provide the following yellow background caution sign with black letters on all automatic

transfer switches, switches, circuit breakers, equipment, and emergency panelboards

that are


26 05 53 - 8



energized by the emergency power system:

a. "Caution Automatically Energized by the Emergency Power System."

I. Equipment/System Identification Nameplates:

1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminated nameplates on each major unit of electrical

equipment in the building; including central or master unit of each electrical system

including communication/control/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its

own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated,

provide single line of text, 1/2-inch high lettering on 1-1/2-inch high sign (2 inches high

were two lines are required), black lettering on white field. Provide text matching

terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Nameplate

shall include unit designation, normal source circuit number ("Fed from..."), circuit

voltage, and other data specifically indicated. Nameplate shall indicate normal source

circuit number ("Fed from..."), and emergency source circuit number ("Fed from..."),

when the equipment is a transfer switch or fed directly from a transfer switch. Provide

nameplates for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:

a. Switchboards, panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. (Include main bus

ampacity on the nameplate.)

b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities.

c. Major electrical switchgear (Include main bus ampacity on the nameplate.)

d. Electrical substations (Include main bus ampacity on the nameplate.)

e. Motor control centers (Include main bus ampacity on the nameplate.), and

individual motor starters.

f. Disconnect switch.

g. Push buttons, selector switches, indicating lights. (Circuit number and voltage not

required on nameplate).

h. Power transfer equipment: Contactors and transfer switches.

i. Lighting control equipment and contactors.

j. Remote controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

k. Transformers (Include primary voltage, secondary voltage, number of phases,

feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.)

l. Inverters. (Include input voltage, output voltage, number of input phases.)

m. Rectifiers. (Include input voltage, output voltage, and number of phases.)

n. Frequency converters. (Include input and output frequency.)

o. Battery racks.

p. Power generating units.

q. Telephone cabinets and switching equipment. (Circuit number and voltage not

required on nameplate.)

r. Clock/program master equipment.

s. TV/audio monitoring master station.

t. Fire alarm and mass notification systems master station.

u. Security monitoring master station.

v. Public address system.

w. Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS).

x. Wireway used as auxiliary gutter tap locations with circuit number of circuit being

tapped. Provide on outside of wireway.

y. Provide ("12,470V") ("______"-volt) conduit markers on all conduit and pullboxes

that contain


26 05 53 - 9



medium voltage conductors.

z. Provide "EMERGENCY" conduit markers on all conduit and pullboxes that contain

emergency power conductors.

aa. Switchboard main switches and circuit breakers.

2. Install markers, tags, nameplates, and signs at locations indicated or, where not

otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference

with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure the identification with

fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate surface.



Metra / Rock Island District 26 05 73-1 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES



SECTION 26 05 73

POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Short-circuit study, coordination study, and device evaluation.

B. Arc flash hazard assessment.

1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.

C. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices not

specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.

1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Provide short-circuit study, coordination study, and device evaluation to recommend

protective device settings and precise fuse types and sizes to adequately protect the new

distribution system installed.

B. The scope of the study shall include:

1. New 15 kV switchgear shown on E601.

2. All new (bold) distribution shown on E602, including 15 kV, 480 V, and 240 V levels. The

entirety of new TUSS-2 down to the wayside boxes (example: TK 4) shall be modeled.

3. Existing (grey) distribution shown on E602 downstream of the transformer down to the

load side of the main overcurrent protective device shall be modeled. For example, TCS-

2 shall be modeled down to the 2500 A bus on the load side of the 2500 A 480 V main

breaker, but feeder breakers below this such as TK 4S do not need to be modeled.

C. Provide arc flash hazard warning labels for all modeled equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.

B. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

C. IEEE 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants;

1993 (Reaffirmed 1999).

D. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems; 2001, with Errata (2003).




E. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems Analysis;

1997.

F. IEEE 551 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems; 2006.

G. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations - Includes 1584, 1584A and

1584B; 2002 (Amended 2011).

H. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2017.

I. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2018.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices complying

with criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be performed.

2. Notify METRA of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain

direction before proceeding with work.

B. Pre-Study Meeting: Conduct meeting with Owner to discuss system operating modes and

conditions to be considered in studies.

C. Sequencing:

1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.

2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have both

been evaluated by Architect/Engineer of Record.

3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final

drawings, reports, and arc flash hazard warning labels (where applicable).

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Study preparer's qualifications.

1. For arc flash hazard analysis specialist, submit name and references for at least five

actual Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis performed in the past year.

B. Field testing agency's qualifications.

C. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.

D. Product Data:

1. Provide product data and information for software program to be used for studies.

E. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Label Samples: One of each type and legend specified.

F. Project Record Documents: Revise studies as required to reflect as-built conditions.

1. Include hard copies with operation and maintenance data submittals.




2. Include computer software files used to prepare studies with file name(s) cross-

referenced to specific pieces of equipment and systems, including but not limited to:

a. Arc Flash Study Report.

1.06 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

A. Scope of Studies:

1. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions, analyze system at each bus

from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of equipment

involved, including parts of system affecting calculations being performed (e.g. fault

current contribution from motors).

2. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known future

configurations) to determine worst case conditions.

a. Known Operating Modes:

1) Utility as source.

B. General Study Requirements:

1. Comply with the Chicago Electrical Code.

2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements;

manual calculations are not permitted.

3. The studies shall be performed for As-Built condition reflecting all changes that occurred

during construction and actual installed length of all the feeders.

4. The studies shall be based on actual equipment submitted and reviewed by EOR.

5. Include all power sources rated 50 V and greater.

C. Data Collection:

1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment,

protective devices, feeders, etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of electrical

distribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling.

a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage, maximum and minimum three-

phase and line-to-ground fault currents, impedance, X/R ratio, and primary

protective device information.

1) Obtain up-to-date information from Owner.

b. Generators: Include manufacturer/model, kW and voltage ratings, and

impedance.

c. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous),

horsepower rating, voltage rating, full load amps, and locked rotor current or

NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

d. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating, winding

configuration, percent impedance, and X/R ratio.

e. Protective Devices:

1) Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. thermal

magnetic, electronic trip), frame size, trip rating, voltage rating,

interrupting rating, available field-adjustable trip response settings, and

features (e.g. zone selective interlocking).

2) Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J), size/rating,

and speed (e.g. time delay, fast acting).




f. Protective Relays: Include manufacturer/model, type, settings, current/potential

transformer ratio, and associated protective device.

g. Conductors: Include feeder size, material (e.g. copper, aluminum), insulation

type, voltage rating, number per phase, raceway type, and actual length.

D. Short-Circuit Study, coordination, and device evaluation:

1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.

2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider conditions

that may result in maximum available fault current, including but not limited to:

a. Maximum utility fault currents.

b. Maximum motor contribution.

c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source,

utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted symmetrical

and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate the maximum

available line-to-ground bolted fault currents.

E. Arc Flash Hazard Assessment:

1. Comply with NFPA 70E.

2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE

1584 (as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D), where applicable.

a. To clarify IEEE 1584 statement that "equipment below 240 V need not be

considered unless it involves at least one 125 kVA or larger low-impedance

transformer in its immediate power supply" for purposes of studies, study

preparer to include equipment rated less than 240 V fed by transformers less

than 125 kVA in calculations.

b. Where reasonable, study preparer may assume a maximum clearing time of two

seconds in accordance with IEEE 1584, provided that the conditions are such that

a worker's egress from an arc flash event would not be inhibited.

c. For single-phase systems, study preparer to perform calculations assuming three-

phase system in accordance with IEEE 1584, yielding conservative results.

3. For equipment with main devices mounted in separate compartmentalized sections,

perform calculations on both the line and load side of the main device.

4. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that may result in maximum incident

energy, including but not limited to:

a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.

b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.

c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source,

utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).

F. Study Reports:

1. General Requirements:

a. Identify date of study and study preparer.

b. Identify study methodology and software product(s) used.

c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate

scenarios, and any exclusions from studies.

d. Identify base used for per unit values.




e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify

buses on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage.

f. Include conclusions and recommendations.

2. Short-Circuit Study:

a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:

1) Calculated maximum available symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents

(both three-phase and line-to-ground where applicable).

2) Fault point X/R ratio.

3) Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.

b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short

circuit current rating, along with recommendations. Provide TCC curves

demonstrating existing conditions and proposed TCC curves for each coordination

recommendation. Include a oneline segment on each TCC.

3. Arc Flash Hazard Assessment:

a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:

1) Calculated incident energy and associated working distance.

2) Calculated arc flash boundary.

3) Bolted fault current.

4) Arcing fault current.

5) Clearing time.

6) Arc gap distance.

b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels, summarize the

maximum incident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition

of all scenarios at each bus location.

c. Identify locations where the calculated maximum incident energy exceeds 40

calories per sq. cm.

d. Include recommendations for reducing the incident energy at locations where the

calculated maximum incident energy exceeds 8 calories per sq. cm.

e. Include arc flash hazard labels color images printed on regular 8.5x11 in paper.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in Illinois and with

minimum five years' experience in the preparation of studies of similar type and complexity

using specified computer software.

1. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified

in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

2. Study preparer may not be employed by the manufacturer of the electrical distribution

equipment.

3. Study preparer may be employed by field testing agency.

B. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available

software utilizing specified methodologies.

1. Acceptable Software Products:

a. EasyPower LLC.

b. ETAP/Operation Technology, Inc.

c. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.




d. Or approved equal in accordance with the following salient characteristics:

1) Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E 2015.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS

A. Provide warning labels complying with NFPA 70E to identify arc flash hazards for each work

location analyzed by the arc flash risk assessment.

1. Materials: Comply with Section 26 05 53 – Electrical Identification.

2. Minimum Size: 4 by 6 inches.

3. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment-

specific data as determined by arc flash risk assessment.

a. Include the following information:

1) Nominal System Voltage

2) Arc flash boundary.

3) Available incident energy

4) Working distance.

5) Minimum arc rating of clothing

6) Equipment identification.

7) Date calculations were performed.

B. Comply with ANSI Z535.4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install arc flash hazard warning labels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.




SECTION 26 08 10

ELECTRICAL TESTING

26 08 10 - 1



ELECTRICAL TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section covers the field testing of the electrical equipment and systems. It is the intent

of this Specification that field testing be extensive and complete as specified to provide

positive assurance of totally correct installation and operation of equipment.

B. Includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Test all wire, cable, electrical equipment, and systems to assure proper installation,

adjustment, setting, connection, and functioning in accordance with the Drawings, these

Specifications, and the Manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Furnish all qualified personnel and labor required for, and incidental to, testing.

3. Furnish all test equipment required, qualified personnel, and labor, including special

equipment for testing of all overcurrent protective devices.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, all electrical equipment, protective relays, meters, and

transducers shown on the Electrical Drawings shall be tested.

D. All other tests listed in this Section shall be performed by this Contract.

E. Contractor performing work under this Specification Section shall coordinate his or her work

with the overall construction schedule to ensure that equipment is fully tested prior to

energization.


A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C37.20.1 - Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear.

2. C37.20.2 - Metal-Clad Switchgear.

3. C37.20.3 - Metal Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear.

4. C2 - National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).

B. American Society For Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. D1816 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Oils of

Petroleum Origin Using VDE Electrodes.

C. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. 101 - Life Safety Code.

2. 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. C37.58 - Conformance Test Procedures for Indoor AC Medium-Voltage Switches for Use

in Metal-Enclosed Switchgear.

2. WC71 - Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2,001-5,000V for Use in the Distribution

of Electric Energy.


26 08 10 - 2



ELECTRICAL TESTING

3. WC74 - 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of

Electric Energy.

F. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

1. No. 43 - Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating

Machinery.

2. No. 62 - Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus - Part 1: Oil Filled

Power Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors.

3. No. 62.2 - Guide for Diagnostic Field Testing of Electric Power Apparatus Electrical

Machinery.

4. No. 450 - Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented

Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.

G. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA):

1. ATS - Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and

Systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Test Reports:

1. Submit as specified in DIVISION 01.

2. Maintain a written record of all tests showing date, testing equipment used, personnel

making test, equipment or material tested, tests performed, and results, including

deficiencies found and corrective actions taken. Test reports shall include nameplate

data of equipment being tested.

3. Contractor may use his or her standard forms to record all data required by these

Specifications.

4. All Contract Drawings used by Contractor shall be returned to Owner as a prerequisite

for final payment. As each schematic diagram is tested, Contractor shall mark it with

the initials of the person testing and the date testing was completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TESTING EQUIPMENT:

A. Provide all necessary testing equipment which includes but not limited to, the following:

1. All apparatus and material as required by referenced Standards.

2. Wet and dry bulb thermometers.

3. 500-, 1,000- and 2,000V insulation test sets (e.g., meggers).

4. Battery-powered portable telephone sets.

5. Battery-powered ringing set.

6. DC high potential test set, adjustable up to 90 kV.

7. 125/250/500Vac voltmeters, and three 0-5-amp, ac ammeters 0.5% accuracy.

8. Three Simpson Model 260 volt-ohm-milliammeters (or Owner-approved equivalent).

9. Phase rotation meters (Amprobe PRM-4 or equivalent).

10. Phase angle meter, 60 cycle.

11. Two sets of portable synchronizing lights.

12. One transformer ratio tester "TTR."

13. Digital low resistance ohmmeter capable of 100A minimum.

14. Miscellaneous test leads, jumpers, cable, switches, receptacles, plugs, and other

equipment as necessary.

15. Provide dual-frequency FM radio communication for each test crew with two additional


26 08 10 - 3



ELECTRICAL TESTING

radios for Owner. Motorola or approved equivalent.

16. Signal source for control loops (4-20 mA, 1-5Vdc, etc.).

17. Thermocouple measuring equipment.

18. A portable test set for testing the overcurrent trip devices provided on the 480V load

center.

19. Cable required for communication to relays and meters including optical test ports.

20. Laptop computer capable of loading relay software.

21. Fiber optic test source and power meter.

22. 125Vdc power supply capable of powering equipment to be tested.

23. Infrared thermography equipment.

B. See Section 26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables for test equipment that must be purchased

and turned over to Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Conform to requirements as specified in DIVISION 01.

B. Furnish labor, test equipment, and materials as follows:

1. For specified inspections and tests.

2. For assisting each manufacturer's field service representative specified.

C. Unless indicated otherwise, inspect and test all equipment.

D. Perform specified inspections and tests and report all deficiencies in equipment and materials

to Owner. Where applicable, perform Work under the direction of the equipment

manufacturer's field service representative. Minor, easily correctable deficiencies shall be

corrected and reported to Owner.

E. Follow manufacturers' recommendations regarding test voltages to be used for insulation-

resistance and overpotential tests.

F. Measured test values shall be in accordance with NETA.

G. Be responsible for any damage to equipment or material due to improper test procedures or

test apparatus handling, and replace or restore to original condition, at Owner's option, any

damaged equipment or material.

H. Furnish and use safety devices such as protective screens and barriers, yellow tape, danger

signs, and related items to adequately protect and warn all personnel in the vicinity of the

tests.

I. Furnish service personnel meeting the requirements as identified in each specification’s Field

Quality Control section.

J. Certain inspections and tests specified to be performed by this Contract may also be

performed by others. This overlapping and duplication is necessary and intentional.

K. Owner will approve the testing schedule of all electrical testing and inspections. Cooperate

and work closely with Owner during all phases of construction, especially with respect to the

following:

1. Sequence and priorities of construction and start-up.

2. Testing and testing methods.

3. Control scheme checkout and procedures.

4. Equipment start-up.

5. Testing and control scheme checkout records.

6. Tagging procedures for personnel and equipment safety.

7. Releasing tested equipment to Owner for operation.


26 08 10 - 4



ELECTRICAL TESTING

L. Owner reserves the option to assign his personnel to assist Contractor in checking out certain

control schemes where Owner concludes such assistance is necessary to meet the Project

schedule. If Owner should exercise this option, Contractor will be furnished a notice, in

writing, specifying the extent of Owner's involvement.

M. After completing testing and checkout of equipment, wiring, control schemes, and other

items associated with individual systems, and believing a system to be ready for operation,

notify Owner who may choose to witness a final operational test of each individual system to

be conducted by this Contract.

N. Accompany Owner's electrical engineer for a thorough review of completed testing prior to

energization of tested equipment.

O. Contractor shall comply with the lock-out/tag-out procedure provided by Owner.

P. Once testing activity begins, Contractor shall establish a permanent testing crew of

experienced electricians. Contractor supervisor shall attend jobsite meetings as requested by

Owner.

Q. Contractor shall cooperate fully with Owner in performing all testing activities and shall add

personnel to the testing crew as required to have all testing completed in accordance with

the dates listed in the construction and systems operations schedule requirements of

DIVISION 01.

R. It is anticipated there will be frequent occasions when testing will have to be performed

outside regular working hours. The following tasks shall be assumed by the Contractor to be

performed outside of normal working hours, and any premium time associated with them

shall be included in the Contractor's bid.

1. Initial energization of each medium voltage switchgear bus.

2. Initial energization of any transformer over 300 kVA.

3. Initial energization of any 480V equipment over 1,200A.

4. Initial switching under load of all transfer switches.

S. The electrical testing will be performed in stages following construction. Contractor may be

released for periods of several weeks. The same Contractor personnel shall be made

available for the complete Project unless a change is requested by Owner.

T. Submit "As Constructed" documentation for all changes made by this Contract.

3.02 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL:

A. Contractor personnel shall have the following qualifications:

1. Shall be thoroughly familiar with control scheme checkout and test equipment and be

expert in setting, calibrating, and testing protective relays.

2. Shall have proven ability in the above mentioned areas of work with a minimum of five

years' experience. For each person furnished by Contractor with the above experience,

a testing assistant may be furnished with a minimum of two years of similar experience.

3. Shall be able to supply references and proof of experience and ability to keep good test

records on recent projects.

4. Shall be cooperative and willing to work with Owner in developing testing and start-up

priorities and schedules. It is essential that Contractor and Owner maintain a good,

communicative working relationship at all times.

B. Responsibilities:

1. Perform inspections and tests as specified.

2. Prepare reports of all testing performed.

3. Furnish personnel as required to maintain Project schedule.

C. Weekly service time reports, as described in DIVISION 01,


26 08 10 - 5



ELECTRICAL TESTING

will be required to maintain accurate records of time used.

3.03 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT INSPECTIONS AND TESTS:

A. Low-Voltage Drawout or Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:

1. Perform an insulation-resistance test at 1,000Vdc from pole to pole and from each pole

to ground with the breaker closed and across open contacts of each phase.

2. Adjust and set trip units to values furnished by Owner, including the following as

applicable:

a. Instantaneous overcurrent trip.

b. Long time and short time pickup.

c. Long time delay and short time delay.

d. Ground pickup and delay.

3. Verify trip unit nameplate and sensor rating.

4. Test trip units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify against TC curves

on at least two points. Utilize secondary current injection for all tests.

5. Activate auxiliary protective devices, such as ground fault or undervoltage relays, to

ensure operation of shunt trip devices. Check the operation of electrical operated

breakers in their cubicles.

6. Verify correct operation of auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators, electrical

close and trip operations, trip-free, and anti-pump function, and verify trip unit battery

condition.

7. Test and record contact resistance on each phase from bus to load terminal through a

closed breaker.

8. Perform other tests recommended by the manufacturer to assure correctness of

operation.

B. 600V Molded-Case Breakers:

1. Set adjustable magnetic trips to values furnished by study provided as part of

Specification 26 05 73 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES.

2. Megger each pole for freedom from grounds.

3. Check for proper current rating for circuit to which connected.

4. Open and close each breaker manually.

5. A sample no greater than 10 molded-case breakers shall be checked for proper

operation. Owner will make selection of breakers to be tested.

C. Medium- and Low-Voltage Power Distribution Equipment:

1. Check and measure equipment ground; notify Owner if more than one ohm.

2. Remove, or drawout, all potential transformers. Put all breakers into the closed

position.

a. For low voltage switchgear, perform a 1-minute insulation-resistance test phase-

to-phase and phase-to-ground. Use test voltages per NETA ATS.

b. For medium voltage switchgear, perform a 1-minute overpotential test for each

phase-to-ground.

3. Test and record contact resistance on each phase of each bus section.

4. Perform other tests recommended by the manufacturer to assure correctness of

operation.

D. Dry Type Transformers:

1. Verify nameplate data.

2. Winding tests:

a. TTR at all taps.


26 08 10 - 6



ELECTRICAL TESTING

b. Megger winding to winding.

c. Megger each winding to ground.

3. Check equipment ground to assure continuity of connections. Notify Owner if ground is

more than one ohm.

4. Check electrical neutral of the transformer. This connection shall be a copper wire

connection to the facility's grounding system.

5. Check for proper operation of the winding temperature gauge and cooling fans.

6. Set high voltage taps at positions determined by Owner.

7. Check connections for tightness; clean out dust, and other foreign material.

E. Low Voltage Busway:

1. Megger completed busway in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Measure resistance of enclosure for full length of busway.

F. Instruments:

1. Ammeters:

a. Check connections to ammeters from current transformers for AC and from shunts

for DC.

b. Check ammeter scale with current transformer ratio for AC, and with shunt

millivolt rating for DC.

c. Set pointer on zero scale with no load.

2. Voltmeters:

a. Check voltmeter with potential transformer ratio.

b. Set pointer on zero scale with no voltage.

3. Wattmeters, Varmeters, and Watt-Hour Meters:

a. Check with current transformer and potential transformer ratio.

b. Set wattmeter and varmeter pointer on zero scale with no load.

c. Verify that watt-hour meters correctly indicate import/export for the direction of

power flow.

d. Check accuracy of watt-hour meters as directed by equipment manufacturer's field

service representative.

e. Simulate full load current and voltage and check the full load reading. Adjust span

adjustment for 100% indication.

f. Check accuracy of watt-hour meters as directed by the manufacturer.

g. Check and record output at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 100% of indicator.

4. Transducer Tests:

a. Test transducers, including analog outputs on relays and meters, in accordance

with manufacturer's instructions and instructions furnished later by Owner.

b. Verify connection of transducer circuits to the PLC.

c. Check and verify all primary values with secondary digital and analog readings of

transducer.

d. Calibrate transducer outputs for the correct response at the PLC.

G. Instrument Transformers:

1. Physically check polarity mark orientation on all CTs and VTs with three-line diagrams

and with manufacturer's drawings.

2. For each CT and VT, physically verify that each phase is wired to the proper terminal for

field connections.

3. Verify CT secondary wiring has only one ground point by disconnecting the known

ground and verifying the resistance to ground exceeds 1 megohm with a 500V megger.

4. Verify CT ratios at all taps.


26 08 10 - 7



ELECTRICAL TESTING

5. For high- and medium-voltage CTs used for relaying, perform demagnetization and

excitation tests on CTs in accordance with ANSI C57.13.x as the final test on CTs.

6. All CTs are to remain shorted until it is determined in the course of the testing

procedure the CT is properly loaded.

7. Ensure that shorting screws are removed from used CTs.

8. Inject enough current in CT primary to induce 1/4 to 1/2 ampere in secondary. If not

possible, disconnect the secondary wire at each current transformer and insert

approximately 2 amperes AC into the circuit. Check to see that current is present in

each instrument, relay, switch, auxiliary equipment, and related items that should be

connected to the CT being tested. Repeat for every CT.

9. Verify VTs are grounded at only one point.

10. Check all VT polarity markings.

11. For each set of CTs and VTs, verify the wiring is in accordance with the manufacturer's

instruction manuals for each relay, meter, and other device the CT or VT is wired to.

Physically verify proper phasing, polarity and ratios by checking both ends of the CT and

VT primary connections, and both ends of all secondary connections from each CT and

VT to the proper terminals on each relay, meter, and any other connected device.

12. TTR test all VTs.

13. Megger Tests - All VTs:

a. Winding to winding.

b. Winding to ground.

14. Disconnect secondary wires from each VT and apply 115Vac. With voltmeter, check for

voltage at relays, instruments, switches, auxiliary transformers, and related items that

should be connected to the VT being tested. Repeat for every VT.

15. Provide a loading resistor across the secondary of VTs that have no load on them to

prevent ferroresonance.

H. Protective Relays:

1. Make "in case" and "out of case" tests on all protective relays in accordance with

manufacturer's relay instruction books.

2. Out-of-Case Bench Tests:

a. Perform all relay testing and setting.

b. Bench testing will involve complete testing of each relay timing, restraint,

calibration, contact operation, and similar measures with load boxes, cycle timers,

test rectifiers, and any special test equipment required by manufacturer' in

accordance with instructions in relay manufacturer's manuals for field testing.

c. All relays shall be set and adjusted to values provided by Owner.

3. In-Case Tests:

a. After completion of bench testing and connection of all external wiring, conduct in-

case test by commanding each relay contact through software and verify that

contact initiates the proper action.

b. In-case testing of relays shall include the tests specified under Instrument

Transformers.

4. Place seals on relay covers as soon as testing is complete. Seals shall be replaced as

many times as required to complete total system testing.

I. Relay, Metering, and Synchronizing Panels: In addition to testing individual devices in relay,

metering, and synchronizing panels, perform the following tests:

1. With a test set, apply a three phase voltage at the relay panel field terminals for each

set of VT inputs. Verify that the correct voltage and


26 08 10 - 8



ELECTRICAL TESTING

phase is received at the appropriate terminal of each device. Avoid backfeeding

voltages through synchronizing lights.

2. Inject current through the relay panel and verify that the correct current appears at the

appropriate inputs of each device.

3. Perform the above tests for each set of CT and VT inputs to the relay panel.

4. Verify the field wiring for each CT and VT input to the relay panel. Ensure that each wire

is connected to provide the correct ratio, phase and polarity. Verify that the CT neutral

is grounded at only one end of the circuit.

J. Lockout Relays and Tripping Relays:

1. Functionally verify the operation of every lockout and tripping relay input, output and

associated test switch.

K. Low Voltage Starters and Contactors:

1. Check equipment ground to assure continuity of connections.

2. Remove all blocking used for shipment.

3. Check magnetic coil for proper rating.

4. Clean all contacts and magnetic surfaces (as required).

5. Check all auxiliary contacts for correct arrangement with coil de-energized; i.e., normally

open or normally closed.

6. Check all fuses or air circuit breakers for proper rating.

7. Check field connections for tightness.

8. Check secondary fuses on motor starter control power transformer supply.

9. Set MCP instantaneous setting and set overload device to proper setting based on

motor nameplate full load amps in accordance with NEC.

L. Power Switches (disconnects, safety, and other):

1. Inspect contacts and clean if necessary.

2. Inspect arc chutes.

3. Inspect fuses for proper rating.

M. Wire and Cable:

1. All Cable: Verify that all conductors of every cable are terminated at the proper

terminals as indicated by the Contract Drawings and manufacturer's drawings, and

properly tagged.

2. 5-kV and 15-kV Cable: Field high potential test in accordance with NEMA WC 74 and per

the cable manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Do not test cables with an AC test set. Disconnect from all equipment during

testing. Testing cable on the reel will not be acceptable. Perform tests after

termination of ends, but before final connection to equipment. Make high potential

tests between each conductor and shield.

4. 600V Power Cable: With cable disconnected at both ends, megger each cable with a

500V megger for one minute. Values must be approximately as follows:

Conductor Size (AWG OR MCM) Resistance (Megohms-1,000 ft)

14-8 200

6-2/0 100

3/0-1,000 50

If cable is meggered with one end connected to a motor or transformer, megger values

must meet acceptable limits for that equipment, as described previously.

5. 600V Control Cable:


26 08 10 - 9



ELECTRICAL TESTING

a. All control cables shall have a continuity check performed on each conductor to

ensure the conductance of each wire before the wires are terminated. Cables with

conductors failing this test shall be removed and replaced.

6. 300V Instrument Cable:

a. All instrument cables shall have a continuity check performed on each conductor

and shield to ensure the conductance of each wire and shield before the wires are

terminated. Cables with conductors or shields failing this test shall be removed

and replaced.

N. Panelboards:

1. Check frame and neutral grounds for continuity.

2. Megger each phase bus for freedom from grounds.

3. With all loads running, check load balance between phases and relocate single

phaseload cables if highest phase is more than 115% of lowest phase.

4. With all non-redundant loads running, record voltages of each phase of the panel.

Record voltages of each phase of the panel with all loads off.

O. Miscellaneous Equipment Tests: For all equipment supplied as part of this project but which

are not specifically identified within this Specification Section, test in accordance with the

equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

P. Fiber Optics:

1. Measure attenuation of fiber, cable, and connectors.

2. Perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 START-UP AND SYSTEM TESTS:

A. The following is a list of system tests to be performed by this Contract. Some of the system

tests will be performed after normal working hours as defined in Section 01 10 00 Summary

of Scope.

B. Infrared Temperature Survey:

1. Provide equipment, supervision, and labor as required to perform infrared inspections

of the following equipment for each unit after they have been started up and are in

operation:

a. All transformers larger than 15 kVA.

b. All busway

c. Medium-voltage switchgear and MCCs.

d. 480V switchgear, unit substations, switchboards, and MCCs.

e. Power and lighting panelboards larger than 250A

f. 125Vdc switchboards and panelboards.

g. Inverters, battery chargers, and batteries.

2. Furnish all labor to remove all covers, panel fronts, and other accessways to gain access

to equipment or connections to be inspected. After tests are satisfactorily completed

reinstall all covers, panel fronts, and other items.

3. Infrared tests will include scanning all electrical connection points including terminal

points and electrical contactors. In addition, transformers will be inspected for blocked

radiators or any other localized heating.

4. Tests shall not be performed until after the unit is on-line and running at 70% full load.

5. A test report shall be submitted on all tests including pictures of any problem or

questionable areas. A questionable area will be defined as an area where temperature

is 10ºC greater than its surrounding area.

6. This Contract will correct any deficiencies in


26 08 10 - 10



ELECTRICAL TESTING

equipment or connections that resulted from improper installation.

C. Instrument Loop Check: These checks will consist of functional tests of complete control

loops. The completion of these tests will require cooperation with the controls installer.

1. Check all wiring for connection to correct device and proper polarity. Correct wiring if

required.

2. Simulate operation of transmitter and verify that control signal is being received at

control cabinet and HMI CRT screen.

3. Verify operation of controlled device (valve, damper, or other device).

4. Verify the controlled device performs correctly when operated from the HMI.

5. If possible, operate transmitter to verify operation of controlled device.

D. Start-up Support: In addition to testing required in other paragraphs of this Specification,

complete the following to support initial energization of transformers, motors, and

switchgear and initial synchronization of generators.

1. Review and provide comments to energization procedures provided by Owner.

2. Verify DC power is turned on at all relays, breakers, and transformers as required.

3. When only portions of the power distribution system are to be energized, verify that

appropriate breakers are racked out, disconnects are opened, and test switches are

opened or closed as required.

4. Ensure all safety grounds are removed and covers are installed prior to energization.

5. Ensure all temporary jumpers are removed.

6. Ensure all test switches required to trip circuit breakers or lockout relays are in the

proper position.

7. Ensure that all unused CTs are shorted.

8. Ensure all VTs are connected to loads.

9. If required, place a loading resistor across VT secondaries for ferroresonance

suppression.

10. Disable trips required to close breakers as part of the initial synchronization procedure.

11. Re-enable all trips after testing is complete.

12. When required for generator ground protection, monitor third harmonic neutral voltage

during various loading conditions to determine the correct relay setting.

13. Be available to assist in operating breakers or other equipment.

14. Visually inspect transformers and other equipment after energization.




SECTION 26 12 00

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

26 12 00 - 1



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:

1. Dry-type distribution and power transformers.

a. TUSS-2 will be dry-type padmounted cast-coil AA/FA.

b. Welfare, Coach Service, and North Substation #1 will be dry-type padmounted

cast-coil AA. Provide deduct alternate pricing to provide these as pad-mounted,

liquid-filled.

B. Specific information regarding sizes, voltage, phase, and included switch configurations can

be found on drawing E101 and E602.

1.03 DEFINITIONS:

A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions, minimum

clearances, installed devices and features, location of each field connection, and performance

for each type and size of transformer indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Site and floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are

shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location, or bussed secondary

where applicable.

2. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of transformer, and required clearances.

3. Ground rod and grounding cable locations.

4. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

5. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Follow-up service reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.


26 12 00 - 2



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and

capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the National

Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined

by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the National Electrical

Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

transformers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to DIVISION 01, Section

"Product Requirements."

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2.

E. Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions.

1.07 COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in DIVISION 03.

B. Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate

installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage

transformers except those directly associated with transformers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SALIENT CHARACTERISTICS:

A. The following are the salient characteristics of the equipment:

1. NEMA ST 20, IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.12.50, ANSI C57.12.51, UL 1562 listed and

labeled, dry-type, 2-winding transformers.

a. Outdoor, ventilated, cast coil/encapsulated coil, with primary and secondary

windings individually cast in epoxy; with insulation system rated at 185ºC with an

80ºC average winding temperature rise above a maximum ambient temperature of

40ºC.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the

following:


following:

1. Acme Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.

2. Cooper Industries; Cooper Power Systems Division.

3. Cutler-Hammer.


26 12 00 - 3

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS



4. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.

5. GE Electrical Distribution & Control.

6. Hammond Manufacturing; Transformer Group.

7. Kuhlman Electric Corporation.

8. Olsun Electric

9. Pauwels Transformers.

10. Pioneer Transformers.

11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

12. Square D; Schneider Electric.

13. Uptegraff, R. E. Mfg. Co.

14. Virginia Transformer Corp.


2.03 DRY-TYPE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS:

A. Description: NEMA ST 20, IEEE C57.12.01, ANSI C57.12.50, ANSI C57.12.51, UL 1562 listed

and labeled, dry-type, 2-winding transformers.

1. Outdoor, ventilated, cast coil/encapsulated coil, with primary and secondary windings

individually cast in epoxy; with insulation system rated at 185ºC with an 80ºC average

winding temperature rise above a maximum ambient temperature of 40ºC.

B. Primary Connection: Air terminal compartment with removable door. Tin-plated copper bar

for incoming line termination, predrilled to accept terminals for indicated conductors.

C. Primary Connection: Transition terminal compartment with connection pattern to match

switchgear.

D. Secondary Connection: For all dry type transformers that do not serve TUSS-2, air terminal

compartment with removable door. Tin-plated copper bar for incoming line termination,

predrilled to accept terminals for indicated conductors.

E. Secondary Connection: For TUSS-2, transition terminal compartment with connection pattern

to match bus duct.

F. Insulation Materials: IEEE C57.12.01, rated at 220ºC.

G. Insulation Temperature Rise: 80ºC, maximum rise above 40ºC.

H. Basic Impulse Level: 110 kV.

I. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5% taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary

voltage.

J. Cooling System: Class AA, self-cooled for Welfare, Coach Service, and North Subsation #1;

and for TUSS-2 AA/FA, self-cooled, and with forced-air-cooled rating , complying with

IEEE C57.12.01.

1. Automatic forced-air cooling system controls, including thermal sensors, fans, control

wiring, temperature controller with test switch, power panel with current-limiting fuses,

indicating lights, alarm, and alarm silencing relay. Coordinate with switchboard

manufacturer of TUSS-2 to provide control power for fan package.

K. High-Temperature Alarm: Sensor at transformer with local audible and visual alarm and

contacts for remote alarm.

2.04 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES:

A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted

with corrosion-resistant screws. Provide nameplate both external nameplate as well as one

internal to the termination compartment.


26 12 00 - 4



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS


A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for

components. Conduct transformer tests according to ANSI C57.12.50, ANSI C57.12.51,

IEEE C57.12.90, and IEEE C57.12.91.

B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each transformer:

1. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap

extreme connections.

2. Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.

3. Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection.

4. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.

5. Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.

6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap

extreme connections.

7. Applied potential.

8. Induced potential.

9. Temperature Test: If transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to

provide more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or Class AA rating

and highest kilovolt-ampere Class OA/FA or Class AA/FA rating.

a. Temperature test is not required if record of temperature test on an essentially

duplicate unit is available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for medium-voltage

transformers.

B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.

2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer and no feeders

will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where

transformers will be installed.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in DIVISION 26, Section

"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance

shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION:

A. Install transformers on concrete bases.

1. Anchor transformers to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written

instructions, seismic codes at Project, and requirements in Section 26 05 26

GROUNDING.

2. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm)

larger in both directions than supported unit and 4 inches (100 mm) high.

3. Use concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 02 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.


26 12 00 - 5

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS



5. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts, for supported equipment, that extend through

concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

6. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.

7. Tack-weld or bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install

sills level and grout flush with floor or base.

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's

written instructions and NFPA 70.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in

Section 26 05 53 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION.

3.04 CONNECTIONS:

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 GROUNDING.

B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER

CONDUCTOR AND CABLES


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. After installing transformers but before primary is energized, verify that grounding

system at substation is tested at specified value or less.

2. After installing transformers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.

3. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS. Certify

compliance with test parameters.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Test Reports: Prepare written reports to record the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective actions taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

3.06 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE:

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: Perform the following voltage monitoring after

Substantial Completion but not more than six months after Final Acceptance:

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of

three-phase voltage recording at secondary terminals of each transformer. Use

voltmeters with calibration traceable to National Institute of Science and Technology

standards and with a chart speed of not less than 1 inch (25 mm) per hour. Voltage

unbalance greater than 1% between phases, or deviation of any phase voltage from

nominal value by more than ±5% during test period, is unacceptable.


26 12 00 - 6



MEDIUM-VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS

2. Corrective Actions: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective

actions, as appropriate:

a. Adjust transformer taps.

b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.

3. Retests: After corrective actions have been performed, repeat monitoring until

satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Report: Prepare written report covering monitoring and corrective actions performed.

B. Infrared Scanning: Perform as specified in Section 26 13 23 MEDIUM VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS




SECTION 26 13 23

MEDIUM-VOLTAGE METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR

METRA / ROCK ISLAND DISTRICT 26 13 23-1 MV METAL-ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR

MEDIUM VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION REPLACEMENT

PART 1 - FGENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Section includes indoor 15kV front-access metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear.


A. Section 13 32 23 Power Distribution Center.




1. ANSI C37.20.3 Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear

2. ANSI C37.20.4 Standard for Indoor AC Switches (1 kV to 38 kV) for Use in Metal-Enclosed

Switchgear

B. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. BIL: Basic Impulse Insulation Level.

B. PDC: Power Distribution Center (control house).

1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices.

B. Shop Drawings: For medium-voltage, metal-enclosed switchgear.

1. Include a tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.

2. Include dimensioned plans and elevations, showing dimensions, shipping sections, and

weights of each assembled section. Elevations shall show major components, features,

and mimic bus diagram.

3. Include a plan view and cross section of equipment base showing clearances,

manufacturer's recommended work space, and locations of penetrations for grounding

and conduits. Show location of anchor bolts.

4. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, and location and size of each field connection.

5. Locate accessory and spare equipment storage.

6. Include single-line diagram.

7. Include control power wiring diagrams.

8. Include equipment base and room layout.




9. Include copy of nameplate.

10. Ratings of the assembled switchgear:

a. Voltage.

b. Continuous current.

c. Short-circuit rating.

d. BIL.

11. Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility company.

12. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate

requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

13. Wiring Diagrams: For each switchgear assembly include the following:

a. Power, signal, and control wiring.

b. Three-line diagrams of current and future secondary circuits showing device

terminal numbers and internal diagrams.

c. Schematic control diagrams.

d. Diagrams showing connections of component devices and equipment.

e. Schematic diagrams showing connections to remote devices.

1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings:

1. Outdoor Installations:

a. Utilities site plan, drawn to scale, showing heavy equipment or truck access paths

for maintenance and replacement.

b. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of the switchgear, conduit entries, and

grounding equipment locations.

2. Indoor Installations:

a. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of the switchgear, conduit entries, and

grounding equipment locations.

b. Support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Locate structural

supports for structure-supported raceways, and cable trays.

3. Location of lighting fixtures, ducts, and diffusers.

B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for switchgear and control power, accessories, and

components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.

D. Product Certificates: For switchgear, signed by product manufacturer.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

1.08 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01

78 10 Project Record Documents, include the following:




1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective

devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device.

1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels

describing contents.

B. Spare Fuses: Three of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used. Include spares for

the following:

1. Primary disconnect fuses.

2. Potential transformer fuses.

3. Control power fuses.

4. Fuses and fusible devices for medium voltage fused switches.

C. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.

D. Touchup Paint: Three half-pint containers of paint matching enclosure's exterior finish.

E. Primary Switch Contact Lubricant: One.

F. Field quality-control reports.


A. All equipment shall be listed by a NRTL.

B. The switchgear manufacturer shall provide enclosures that have been proven by a NRTL to be

in compliance with the Category A enclosure test requirements in accordance with

conformance standard ANSI 37.57. Category A enclosures are intended to provide a degree of

protection against contact with enclosed equipment in ground level installations subject to

deliberate unauthorized acts by members of the unsupervised general public. Category A

enclosures require the addition of padlockable covers for windows and accessories such as

ammeters, voltmeters, kilowatt-hour meters, etc.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Accredited by NETA.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by the National Electrical Testing Association

or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-

site testing specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.


A. Tests, inspections: At the shop, factory, plant, or place of manufacture.

B. Verification of performance: Compliance with specified criteria.


A. Switchgear manufacturer is responsible for coordinating and providing delivery to PDC

manufacturer.

B. Switchgear manufacturer is responsible for ensuring switchgear is properly installed inside

PDC.

1.13 WARRANTY:

A. Provide a comprehensive 1-year warranty on switchgear and all parts and components.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. The following are the salient characteristics of the equipment:

a. 15kV, front-access metal-enclosed, indoor fused switchgear with components

detailed on the drawing single lines and this specification, installed in and

integrated with a PDC (control house).

b. BIL 95kV

c. Bus: 600A

d. Short circuit: 25kAIC RMS sym, 40kAIC RMS asym

e. Momentary and duty-cycle fault-closing ratings of switches, momentary rating of

bus, and interrupting ratings of fuses shall equal or exceed the short-circuit ratings

of the metal-enclosed switchgear.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS:

A. S&C

B. Eaton

C. Square D

D. GE

E. Or approved equal meeting the salient characteristics of this specification.

2.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Metal-enclosed switchgear assembly consisting of self-supporting bays containing interrupter

switches and power fuses, with the necessary accessory components, all factory-assembled

and operationally checked. The switchgear shall be installed in a prefabricated building

supplied by the switchgear manufacturer and arrive on the site as a complete solution. The

switchgear manufacturer shall be responsible for providing the PDC specified in 13 34 23 –

Power Distribution Centers.

2.04 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE

A. To ensure a completely coordinated design, the metal-enclosed switchgear shall be

constructed in accordance with the minimum construction specifications of the fuse and/or

switch manufacturer to provide adequate electrical clearances and adequate space for fuse

handling.

B. In establishing the requirements for the enclosure design, consideration shall be given to all

relevant factors, such as controlled access; tamper-resistance; corrosion-resistance;

protection from ingress of rodents, insects, weeds, and airborne contaminants; and the

possibility of arcing faults within the enclosure.

C. The enclosure of each bay shall be of unitized monocoque construction to maximize strength,

minimize weight, and inhibit corrosion.

D. The material for all external sides of the enclosure and the roof shall be 11-gauge hot-rolled,

pickled and oiled steel sheet.

E. Each bay containing medium-voltage components shall be a complete unit in itself, with full

side sheets, resulting in double-wall construction between bays. To guard against

unauthorized or inadvertent entry, side and rear sheets and the top shall not be externally

bolted.




F. The base shall a continuous steel channel of a thicker gauge material than used for the

enclosure and shall extend completely around all four sides of each bay.

G. Access to the interior of the enclosure shall be from the front only, allowing placement of the

metal-enclosed switchgear assembly tightly against a wall, to minimize floor-space

requirements.

H. To guard against unauthorized or inadvertent entry, there shall be no access to high voltage

through side or rear sheets of the metal-enclosed switchgear assembly, no access to high

voltage by means of externally removable panels.

I. To guard against corrosion, all hardware (including door fittings, fasteners, etc.), all operating-

mechanism parts, and other parts subject to abrasive action from mechanical motion shall be

of either nonferrous materials, or galvanized or zinc-nickel-plated ferrous materials.

Cadmium-plated ferrous parts shall not be used.

J. Externally accessible hardware shall not be used for support of high-voltage components or

switch-operating mechanisms within the switchgear.

K. Door Construction

1. Doors shall be constructed of 11-gauge hot-rolled, pickled and oiled steel sheet.

2. Doors shall have 90-degree flanges and shall overlap with the door openings. For

strength and rigidity, and to minimize exposure, the door flanges shall be welded at the

corners and shall be formed (at the top and both sides as a minimum) with a double

bend so that the sheared-edge flanges at the top and both sides fold back parallel to the

inside of the door. The double bend shall not be required on arc-resistant switchgear.

3. Doors over 40 inches in height shall have a minimum of three concealed galvanized steel

or non-ferrous hinges with stainless-steel hinge pins. Doors 40 inches in height or less

shall have a minimum of two such hinges.

4. Each door shall be equipped with a door handle. The door handle shall be padlockable

and, on outdoor gear, shall incorporate a hood to protect the padlock shackle from

tampering.

5. In consideration of controlled access, tamper-resistance, and arcing faults, each door

over 40 inches in height shall have a minimum of three concealed, interlocking, high-

strength latches. Doors 40 inches in height or less shall have a minimum of two such

latches.

6. Doors providing access to interrupter switches or interrupter switches with power fuses

shall be provided with a wide-view window, constructed of an impact-resistant material,

to facilitate checking of switch position without opening the door.

7. Doors providing access to solid-material power fuses or fused voltage transformers shall

have provisions to store spare fuse units or refill units. Doors providing access to

electronic power fuses shall have provisions to store spare interrupting modules if

possible.

8. All doors providing access to high-voltage components shall be provided with a sturdy,

self-latching door holder, which shall be zinc-nickel plated and chromate dipped.

L. Access Control

1. Doors providing access to interrupter switches with fuses shall be mechanically or key

interlocked to guard against:

a. Opening the door if the interrupter switch on the source side of the fuse is closed,

and

b. Closing the interrupter switch if the door is open.




2. Doors providing access to interrupter switches only, which are operated by stored-

energy type switch operators, shall be mechanically or key interlocked to guard against

operating the interrupter switch if the door is open.

3. Doors and hinged-bolted panels providing access to high-voltage components shall be

provided with flush-mounted key-operated snaplocks and shall have provisions for

padlocking.

M. Internal Protective Screens

1. In addition to the enclosure door, each bay or compartment thereof containing high-

voltage components shall be provided with an internal protective screen, bolted closed,

to guard against inadvertent entry to these components when the enclosure door is

open.

2. Each bay containing a control-power transformer capable of 5 kVA or greater output

shall be provided with an internal protective screen, bolted closed, to guard against

inadvertent contact with the primary fuse when the enclosure door is open. In such

cases, the screen shall also be interlocked to ensure that the secondary load has been

disconnected prior to removal of these fuses.

2.05 INSULATORS

A. The interrupter-switch and fuse-mounting insulators, main-bus support insulators, insulated

operating shafts, and (if applicable) push rods shall be of a cycloaliphatic epoxy resin system

with characteristics and restrictions as follows:

B. Operating experience of at least 25 years under similar conditions.

C. Adequate leakage distance established by test per IEC Publication 507, “Artificial Pollution

Test on High Voltage Insulators to be Used on AC Systems,” First Edition, 1975.

D. Adequate strength for short-circuit stress established by test.

E. Conformance with applicable ANSI standards.

F. Homogeneity of the cycloaliphatic epoxy resin throughout each insulator to provide

maximum resistance to power arcs. Ablation due to high temperatures from power arcs shall

continuously expose more material of the same composition and properties so that no

change in mechanical or electrical characteristics takes place because of arc-induced ablation.

Furthermore, any surface damage to insulators during installation or maintenance of

switchgear shall expose material of the same composition and properties so that insulators

with minor surface damage need not be replaced.

2.06 BUS

A. Main Bus

1. Bus and interconnections shall consist of aluminum bar of a minimum 56% IACS

conductivity.

2. Bus supports, bus, and interconnections shall withstand the stresses associated with

short-circuit currents up through the maximum rating of the switchgear.

3. Before installation of the bus, all electrical contact surfaces shall first be prepared by

machine-abrading to remove any aluminum-oxide film. Immediately after this

operation, the electrical contact surfaces shall be coated with a uniform coating of an

oxide inhibitor and sealant.

4. Bolted aluminum-to-aluminum connections shall be made with 1/2—13 galvanized steel

bolts, with two Belleville spring washers per bolt, one under the bolt head and one

under the nut. These bolts shall be tightened to 50 foot-pounds torque.




5. Bus to which cable will be terminated shall be equipped with grounding provisions.

Grounding provisions shall also be provided on the ground bus in such bays.

B. Ground Bus

1. Ground bus with short-circuit rating equal to that of the integrated assembly shall be

provided, maintaining electrical continuity throughout the metal-enclosed switchgear.

2. Ground bus shall consist of aluminum bar of a minimum 56% IACS conductivity.

3. In each bay, the ground bus (or connector) shall be bolted to a nickel-plated steel

bracket, which shall be welded in place.

4. Nickel-plated steel brackets (at least one per bay) shall have a short-time current-

carrying capability consistent with the short-circuit rating of the metal-enclosed

switchgear.

5. Bolted connections shall be as specified for the main bus, except that only one Belleville

spring washer shall be required per bolt for attachment of ground bus to the nickel-

plated steel bracket.

6. For multi-bay metal-enclosed switchgear assemblies, two ground cable connectors

accommodating No. 2 through 500 kcmil conductors shall be provided for connection of

ground bus to station ground.

2.07 LOW-VOLTAGE COMPONENTS

A. All low-voltage components, meters, instruments, and relays shall be located in grounded,

metal-enclosed compartments separate from high voltage to provide isolation and shall be

arranged to allow complete accessibility for operation without exposure to high voltage.

B. To provide isolation from high voltage, low-voltage wiring, except for short lengths such as at

terminal blocks or at secondaries of sensing devices, shall be in grounded conduit, cable trays,

or raceways.

2.08 CABLE-TERMINATION SPACE

A. To facilitate cable pulling and installation of cable terminators, provisions shall be made for:

1. Full front access for positioning and removal of cable-pulling sheaves.

2. Free access without interference from nonremovable structural members or from

mechanical linkages between the interrupter-switch blades and operating mechanism.

2.09 FINISH AND FEATURES

A. Indoor Switchgear

1. Indoor Finish

a. The enclosure finish shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of

ANSI C57.12.28.

b. During fabrication, the areas of structural parts which may later become

inaccessible, such as folded edges and overlapping members, shall be given an

iron-oxide zinc-chromate anticorrosion primer to ensure that all surfaces are

protected.

c. Full coverage at joints and blind areas shall be achieved by processing enclosures

independently of components such as doors and roofs before assembly into the

unitized structures.

d. To remove oils and dirt, to form a chemically and anodically neutral conversion

coating to improve the finish-to-metal bond, and to retard underfilm propagation

of corrosion, all surfaces shall undergo a thorough pretreatment process




comprised of a fully automated system of cleaning, rinsing, phosphatizing, sealing,

drying, and cooling before any protective coatings are applied. By utilizing an

automated pretreatment process, the enclosure shall receive a highly consistent

thorough treatment, eliminating fluctuations in reaction time, reaction

temperature, and chemical concentrations.

e. After pretreatment, protective coatings shall be applied that shall help resist

corrosion and protect the steel enclosure. To establish the capability to resist

corrosion and protect the enclosure, representative test specimens coated by the

enclosure manufacturer’s finishing system shall satisfactorily pass the following

tests:

(1) 4000 hours of exposure to salt-spray testing per ASTM B 117 with:

(a) Underfilm corrosion not to extend more than 1/32 in. from the scribe,

as evaluated per ASTM D 1654, Procedure A, Method 2 (scraping); and

(b) Loss of adhesion from bare metal not to extend more than 1/8 in. from

the scribe.

(2) 1000 hours of humidity testing per ASTM D 4585, with no blistering as

evaluated per ASTM D 714.

(3) 500 hours of ultraviolet-accelerated weathering testing per ASTM G 53 using

lamp UVB-313, with no chalking as evaluated per ASTM D 659, and no more

than a 10% reduction of gloss as evaluated per ASTM D 523.

(4) Crosshatch-adhesion testing per ASTM D 3359 Method B, with no loss of

paint.

(5) 160-inch-pound impact, followed by adhesion testing per ASTM D 2794, with

no paint chipping or cracking.

(6) 3000 cycles of abrasion testing per ASTM 4060, with no penetration to the

substrate. Certified test abstracts substantiating the above capabilities shall

be furnished upon request.

f. A heavy coat of insulating “no-drip” compound shall be applied to the inside

surface of the roof structure to prevent condensation of moisture thereon.

g. After the enclosures are completely assembled and the components (switches,

fuses, bus, etc.) are installed, the finish shall be inspected for scuffs and scratches.

Blemishes shall be touched up to restore the protective integrity of the finish.

h. Touch-up materials—with complete instructions—shall be included with each

shipment of metal-enclosed switchgear, for touch-up in the field.

i. The finish shall be light gray, satisfying the requirements of ANSI Standard Z55.1

for No. 61 or No. 70.

B. Indoor Features

1. Ventilation openings shall be provided at the top and bottom on the front and rear of

each bay and shall include an inside baffle with louvered openings.

2. Lifting eyes shall be removable.

2.10 INTERRUPTER SWITCHES

A. Interrupter switches shall have a one-time or two-time duty-cycle fault-closing rating equal to

or exceeding the short-circuit rating of the switchgear. These ratings define the ability to close

the interrupter switch either alone (unfused) or in combination with the appropriate fuse,

once or twice (as applicable) against a three-phase fault with asymmetrical current in at least

one phase equal to the rated value, with the switch remaining operable and able to carry and




interrupt rated current. Tests substantiating these ratings shall be performed at maximum

voltage. Certified test abstracts establishing such ratings shall be furnished upon request.

B. Interrupter switches intended for manual operation shall be operated by means of an

externally operable, non-removable handle. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking in

both the open and closed positions. Interrupter switches intended for power operation shall

be operated by means of a switch operator expressly designed to be compatible with the

interrupter switch.

C. Interrupter switches shall utilize a quick-make quick-break mechanism installed by the switch

manufacturer. The mechanism shall swiftly and positively open and close the interrupter

switch independent of the switch-handle or switch-operator-operating speed.

1. For manually operated interrupter switches, the quick-make quick-break mechanism

shall be integrally mounted to the switch frame.

2. For interrupter switches operated by stored-energy switch operators, the quick-make

quick-break mechanism shall be an integral part of the switch operator.

D. Interrupter switches shall be completely assembled and adjusted by the switch manufacturer

on a single rigid mounting frame. The frame shall be of welded steel construction such that

the frame intercepts the leakage path which parallels the open gap of the interrupter switch,

to positively isolate the load circuit when the interrupter switch is in the open position.

E. Interrupter switches shall be provided with a single blade per phase for circuit closing,

including fault closing, continuous current carrying, and circuit interrupting. Spring-loaded

auxiliary blades shall not be permitted.

F. Circuit interruption shall be accomplished by use of an interrupter, which is positively and

inherently sequenced with the blade position. It shall not be possible for the blade and

interrupter to get out of sequence. Circuit interruption shall take place completely within the

interrupter, with no external arc or flame. Any exhaust shall be vented in a controlled manner

through a labyrinthine muffler or a deionizing vent.

G. Interrupter switches shall have a readily visible open gap when in the open position to allow

positive verification of switch position.

H. Terminals on interrupter switches to which cable will be terminated shall be equipped with

grounding provisions. Grounding provisions shall also be provided on the ground bus in such

modules.

I. Terminals on interrupter switches for entrance-bay applications only, terminals on interrupter

switches used in conjunction with fuses rated 600 amperes or greater, shall be equipped with

provisions for two cables per phase.

J. Key interlocks shall be provided where noted on the drawings.

K. Distribution-class surge arresters, metal oxide type rated appropriately for the system voltage

shall be provided at all source switch terminals.

2.11 SOLID-MATERIAL POWER FUSES

A. Solid-material power fuses shall utilize refill-unit-and-holder or fuse-unit-and-end-fitting

construction. The refill unit or fuse unit shall be readily replaceable.

B. For switchgear rated up through 600 MVA at 13.8 kV, mountings for solid-material power

fuses shall be disconnect style.

C. Fusible elements shall be nonaging and nondamageable, so it is unnecessary to replace

unblown companion fuses following a fuse operation.

D. Fusible elements for refill units or fuse units, rated 10 amperes or larger, shall be helically

coiled to avoid mechanical damage due to stresses from current surges.




E. Fusible elements that carry continuous current shall be supported in air to help prevent

damage from current surges.

F. Refill units and fuse units shall have a single fusible element to eliminate the possibility of

unequal current sharing in parallel current paths.

G. Solid-material power fuses shall have melting time-current characteristics that are

permanently accurate with a maximum total tolerance of 10% in terms of current. Time-

current characteristics shall be available which permit coordination with protective relays,

automatic circuit reclosers, and other fuses.

H. Solid-material power fuses shall be capable of detecting and interrupting all faults, whether

large, medium, or small (down to minimum melting current); under all realistic conditions of

circuitry; and with line-to-line or line-to-ground volt-age across the power fuses. And they

shall be capable of handling the full range of transient recovery voltage severity associated

with these faults.

I. All arcing accompanying solid-material power fuse operation shall be contained within the

fuse, and any arc products and gases evolved during fuse operation shall be vented through

exhaust control devices that shall effectively control fuse exhaust.

J. Solid-material power fuses shall be equipped with a blown-fuse indicator that shall provide

visible evidence of fuse operation while installed in the fuse mounting.

K. Solid-material power fuses in feeder bays shall be equipped with grounding provisions on the

load side of each fuse and on the enclosure ground bus.

2.12 METERING

A. All interrupter switches shall be monitored by equipment manufacturers standard multi-

function power meter. Minimum requirements shall include:

1. LCD Display

2. Voltage and Phase Configuration

3. Max kW, Instantaneous kW

4. Max kWH, Instantaneous kWH

5. Max Amperage, Instantaneous Amperage

6. Frequency

B. Source interrupter switches shall be monitored on the source terminals of the switches.

C. Load interrupter switches shall be monitored on the load side of the fuse terminals.

D. Each meter shall have three current transformers, one per phase, dedicated to monitoring the

respective interrupter switch.

E. Three voltage sensors or transformers shall be installed phase to ground to supply voltage

inputs for the meters.

F. Current transformers and voltage transformers shall be installed per one-line diagram.

2.13 CONTROL POWER

A. Control power transformers shall be integral to the switchgear assembly and sized adequately

for connected load.

B. Low voltage panels shall be provided to allow connection of loads external to the switchgear

assembly.

2.14 LABELING

A. Hazard-Alerting Signs




1. All external doors and hinged bolted panels providing access to high voltage shall be

provided with “Caution—High Voltage—Keep Out” signs.

2. All internal protective screens providing access to high voltage shall be provided with

“Danger—High Voltage—Keep Out—Qualified Persons Only” signs.

3. All internal protective screens providing access to interrupter switches shall be provided

with warning signs indicating that “Switch Blades May Be Energized in Any Position.”

4. All internal protective screens providing access to fuses shall be provided with warning

signs indicating that “Fuses May Be Energized in Any Position.”

B. Ratings Nameplates

1. The integrated switchgear assembly shall be provided with an external nameplate

indicating the manufacturer’s drawing number and the following: voltage ratings (kV,

nominal; kV, maximum; kV, BIL); main bus continuous current rating (amperes); short-

circuit ratings (amperes, RMS, symmetrical and MVA, three-phase symmetrical, at rated

nominal voltage); and the momentary and fault-closing ratings (amperes, RMS,

asymmetrical). The external nameplate shall include the NRTL classification markings.

2. Each individual bay shall bear a nameplate indicating the ratings of the interrupter

switch (amperes, continuous and interrupting); the maximum rating of the fuse

(amperes); and the catalog number of the fuse units, refill units, or interrupting modules

and control modules. This nameplate shall include the NRTL classification markings. In

addition, the enclosure category shall be specified.

2.15 ACCESSORIES

A. Fuse units, refill units, voltage-transformer fuses, interrupting modules, and control modules

shall be provided, as required, for original installation and for spares.

B. Surge arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type,

connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of disconnecting device.

C. Provide tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test, inspection,

maintenance, and operation.

D. Provide fuse-handling tool recommended by switchgear manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Upon delivery of switchgear and prior to unloading, inspect equipment for damage.

1. Examine tie rods and chains to verify they are undamaged and tight and that blocking

and bracing are tight.

2. Verify that there is no evidence of load shifting in transit and that readings from

transportation shock recorders, if equipped, are within manufacturer's

recommendations.

3. Examine switchgear for external damage, including dents or scratches in doors and sill,

and termination provisions.

4. Compare switchgear and accessories received with the bill of materials to verify that the

shipment is complete. Verify that switchgear and accessories conform to the

manufacturer's quotation and shop drawings. If the shipment is not complete or does

not comply with project requirements, notify the manufacturer in writing immediately.

5. Unload switchgear, observing packing label warnings and handling instructions.




6. Open compartment doors and inspect components for damage or displaced parts, loose

or broken connections, cracked or chipped insulators, bent mounting flanges, dirt or

foreign material, and water or moisture.

B. Handling:

1. Handle switchgear according to manufacturer's recommendations; avoid damage to the

enclosure, termination compartments, base, frame, tank, and internal components. Do

not subject switchgear to impact, jolting, jarring, or rough handling.

2. Protect switchgear compartments against the entrance of dust, rain, and snow.

3. Transport switchgear upright to avoid internal stresses on equipment mounting

assemblies. Do not tilt or tip switchgear.

4. Use spreaders or a lifting beam to obtain a vertical lift and to protect switchgear from

straps bearing against the enclosure. Lifting cable pull angles may not be greater than 15

degrees from vertical.

5. Do not damage structure when handling switchgear.

C. Storage:

1. Store switchgear in a location that is clean and protected from weather. Protect

switchgear from dirt, water, contamination, and physical damage. Do not store

switchgear in the presence of corrosive or explosive gases.

2. Store switchgear with compartment doors closed.

3. Regularly inspect switchgear while in storage and maintain documentation of storage

conditions, noting any discrepancies or adverse conditions.

D. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.

2. Entries are within conduit-entry tolerances specified by manufacturer, and no feeders

will have to cross section barriers to reach load or line lugs.

E. Pre-Installation Checks:

1. Verify removal of any shipping bracing after placement.

F. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 26 05 26

Grounding have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at switchgear

location.

G. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SWITCHGEAR INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install switchgear in PDC on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-

in-Place Concrete.

2. Bolt switchgear to PDC per manufacturers requirements.

B. Switchgear shall be installed level and plumb. Switchgear shall tilt less than 1.5 degrees while

energized.

C. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's

written instructions and NFPA 70.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

E. Comply with NECA 430.

3.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 05 26 Grounding.




B. Grounding Connections at Interior Locations:

1. Install bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG for grounding to grounding

electrodes.

2. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to the switchgear enclosure and then to the

grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors.

3. Keep leads as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends.

4. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression

connector.

C. Grounding Connections at Exterior Locations:

1. Install tinned bare copper cable not smaller than No. 4/0 AWG, for counterpoise buried

not less than 30 inches (765 mm) below grade interconnecting the grounding

electrodes.

2. Bond surge arrester and neutrals directly to the switchgear enclosure and then to the

grounding electrode system with bare copper conductors, sized as shown.

3. Keep lead lengths as short as practicable with no kinks or sharp bends.

4. Fence and equipment connections shall not be smaller than No. 4 AWG.

5. Ground fence at each gate post and corner post and at intervals not exceeding 10 ft.

(3050 mm).

6. Bond each gate section to the fence post using 1/8 by 1 inch (3 by 25 mm) flexible

braided copper strap and clamps.

7. Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression

connector.

D. Terminate all grounding and bonding conductors on a common equipment grounding

terminal on the switchgear enclosure. Install supplemental terminal bars, lugs, and bonding

jumpers as required to accommodate the number of conductors for termination.

E. Complete switchgear grounding and lightning arrester connections prior to making any other

electrical connections.

F. Terminate medium-voltage cables according to Section 26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables.

3.04 SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with the installation requirements for labels and signs specified in Section 26 05 53

Electrical Identification.

B. Install warning signs as required to comply with OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.269.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative.

D. General Field Testing Requirements:

1. Comply with the provisions of NFPA 70B, "Testing and Test Methods."

2. After installing switchgear and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.

3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test. Certify compliance

with test parameters.

E. Medium-Voltage Switchgear Assembly Field Tests:




1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:

a. Verify that fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to Drawings and

coordination study.

b. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to Drawings.

c. Inspect bolted electrical connections using calibrated torque-wrench method

according to manufacturer's published data or NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Bolt-

torque levels shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence

of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12. Investigate values

that deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of

the lowest value.

d. Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock

systems.

(1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices. Attempt to open locked-closed

devices.

(2) Make key exchange with devices operated in off-normal positions.

e. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and

sliding surfaces.

f. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.

g. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.

h. Exercise active components.

i. Inspect mechanical indicating devices for correct operation.

j. Verify that filters are in place and vents are clear.

k. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers according to

Article "Instrument Transformer Field Tests."

l. Inspect control power transformers.

(1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of

connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition.

(2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit breaker ratings match

drawings.

(3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding contacts

and interlocks.

2. Electrical Tests:

a. Inspect bolted electrical connections using a low resistance ohmmeter to compare

bolted resistance values to values of similar connections. Investigate values that

deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the

lowest value.

b. Perform dc voltage insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase to phase

and phase to ground, for one minute. If the temperature of the bus is other than

plus or minus 20 deg C, adjust the resulting resistance as provided in NETA ATS,

Table 100.11.

(1) Insulation-resistance values of bus insulation shall be according to

manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's published

data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Investigate and correct values of

insulation resistance less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA

ATS, Table 100.1.

(2) Do not proceed to the dielectric withstand voltage tests until insulation-

resistance levels are raised above minimum values.




c. Perform a dielectric withstand voltage test on each bus section, each phase to

ground with phases not under test grounded, according to manufacturer's

published data. If manufacturer has no recommendation for this test, it shall be

conducted according to NETA ATS, Table 100.2. Apply the test voltage for one

minute.

(1) If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the

total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test

specimen is considered to have passed the test.

d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground.

Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300-volt rated cable and 1000 V dc for

600-V rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For units with solid-state

components or control devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the

manufacturer's recommendation.

(1) Minimum insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than

two megohms.

e. Control Power Transformers:

(1) Perform insulation-resistance tests. Perform measurements from winding to

winding and each winding to ground. Insulation-resistance values of winding

insulation shall be according to manufacturer's published data. In the

absence of manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table

100.1. Investigate and correct values of insulation resistance less than

manufacturer's recommendations or NETA ATS, Table 100.1.

(2) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Disconnect transformer at

secondary terminals and connect secondary wiring to a rated secondary

voltage source. Verify correct potential at all devices.

(3) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing the primary winding with

system voltage. Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring

disconnected.

(4) Verify correct function of control transfer relays located in the switchgear

with multiple control power sources.

f. Voltage Transformers:

(1) Perform secondary wiring integrity test. Verify correct potential at all

devices.

(2) Verify secondary voltages by energizing the primary winding with system

voltage.

g. Perform current-injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of

switchgear.

(1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such that a

minimum current of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct

magnitude of current at each device in the circuit.

(2) Perform current tests by primary injection with magnitudes such that a

minimum of 1.0 A flows in the secondary circuit. Verify correct magnitude of

current at each device in the circuit.

h. Perform system function tests according to "System Function Tests" Article.

i. Verify operation of space heaters.

j. Perform phasing checks on double-ended or dual-source switchgear to ensure

correct bus phasing from each source.




F. Instrument Transformer Field Tests:


a. Verify that equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements.

d. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit

wiring.

e. Verify the unit is clean.

f. Inspect bolted electrical connections using calibrated torque-wrench method





the lowest value.

g. Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide contact.

h. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding

operation.

i. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers.

j. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and

sliding surfaces.

2. Electrical Tests of Current Transformers:




lowest value.

b. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and its secondary

wiring with respect to ground at 1000 V dc for one minute. For units with solid-

state components that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow manufacturer's

written recommendations. Investigate and correct values of insulation resistance

less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

c. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer according to IEEE C57.13.1.

Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.

d. Perform a ratio-verification test using the voltage or current method according to

IEEE C57.13.1. Ratio errors shall be according to IEEE C57.13.

e. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications

according to IEEE C57.13.1. Excitation results shall match the curve supplied by the

manufacturer or be according to IEEE C57.13.1.

f. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals according to IEEE

C57.13.1. Measured burdens shall be compared with and shall match instrument

transformer ratings.

g. Perform insulation-resistance tests on the primary winding with the secondary

grounded. Test voltages shall be according to Table 100.5.

h. Perform dielectric withstand tests on the primary winding with the secondary

grounded. Test voltages shall be according to Table 100.9.

i. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests according to test equipment

manufacturer's published data.




j. Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only one

grounding point according to IEEE C57.13.3. That grounding point should be

located as specified by the engineer in the project drawings.

3. Electrical Tests of Voltage Transformers:




lowest value.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding to

ground. Test voltages shall be applied for one minute according to Table 100.5. For

units with solid-state components that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow

manufacturer's recommendations. Investigate and correct values of insulation

resistance less than manufacturer's recommendations or NETA ATS, Table 100.5.

c. Perform a polarity test on each transformer to verify the polarity marks or H1- X1

relationship as applicable. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings.

d. Perform a turns-ratio test on all tap positions. Ratio errors shall be according to

IEEE C57.13.

e. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals. Measured burdens shall

be compared with and shall match instrument transformer ratings.

f. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary

windings connected to ground. The dielectric voltage shall be according to Table

100.9. The test voltage shall be applied for one minute. If no evidence of distress

or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application

during the dielectric withstand test, the primary windings are considered to have

passed the test.

g. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests according to test equipment

manufacturer's published data. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be

according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of manufacturer's

published data, use test equipment manufacturer's published data.

h. Verify that voltage transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only one

grounding point according to IEEE C57.13.3. Test results shall indicate that the

circuits are grounded at only one point.

G. Ground Resistance Test:


a. Verify ground system complies with the Contract Documents and NFPA 70 Article

250, "Grounding and Bonding."

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Grounding system electrical and

mechanical connections shall be free of corrosion.

c. Inspect bolted electrical connections using a calibrated torque-wrench method





the lowest value.

d. Inspect anchorage.





a. Perform fall-of-potential or alternative test according to IEEE 81 on the main

grounding electrode or system. The resistance between the main grounding

electrode and ground shall be no more than 5 ohms.

b. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main

grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral, and

derived neutral points. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5

ohms. Compare equipment nameplate data with Contract Documents.

c. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

d. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using a low-resistance

ohmmeter to compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections. Investigate values that deviate from those of similar bolted

connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

H. Metering Devices Field Tests:


a. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

b. Inspect bolted electrical connections using calibrated torque-wrench method



of manufacturer's published data, use NETA ATS, Table 100.12.

c. Inspect cover gasket, cover glass, condition of spiral spring, disk clearance,

contacts, and case shorting contacts, as applicable.

d. Verify the unit is clean.

e. Verify freedom of movement, end play, and alignment of rotating disk(s).





lowest value.

b. Verify accuracy of meters at all cardinal points. Meter accuracy shall be according

to manufacturer's published data.

c. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's published data. Calibration results

shall be within manufacturer's published tolerances.

d. Verify all instrument multipliers. Instrument multipliers shall be according to

system design specifications.

e. Verify that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are

intact. Test results shall confirm the integrity of the secondary circuits of current

and voltage transformers.

I. Medium-Voltage Surge Arrester Field Tests:


a. Verify that equipment nameplate data complies with Contract Documents.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.

c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.

d. Verify the arresters are clean.

e. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus

or ground electrode.

f. Verify that the stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically connected if

applicable. Record the stroke counter reading.




2. Electrical Test:

a. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal to ground.

Apply voltage according to manufacturer's published data. In the absence of

manufacturer's published data, comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. Replace units

that fail to meet recommended minimum insulation resistance listed in the table.

b. Perform a watts-loss test. Evaluate watts-loss values by comparison with similar

units and test equipment manufacturer's published data.

c. Test grounding connections. Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and

the ground system shall be less than 0.5 ohm.

J. Switchgear will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

K. Remove and replace defective units and retest.

L. Prepare test and inspection reports. Record as-left set points of adjustable devices.

3.06 SYSTEM FUNCTION TESTS

A. System function tests shall prove the correct interaction of sensing, processing, and action

devices. Perform system function tests after field quality control tests have been completed

and all components have passed specified tests.

1. Develop test parameters and perform tests for the purpose of evaluating performance

of integral components and their functioning as a complete unit within design

requirements and manufacturer's published data.

2. Verify the correct operation of interlock safety devices for fail-safe functions in addition

to design function.

3. Verify the correct operation of sensing devices, alarms, and indicating devices.

3.07 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Substantial Completion, but not more than six

months after Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by Owner, perform seven days of

three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of each switchgear. Use

voltmeters with calibration traceable to NIST standards and with a chart speed of not

less than 1 inch (25 mm) per hour. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between

phases, or deviation of phase voltage from the nominal value by more than plus or

minus 5 percent during the test period, is unacceptable.

2. Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective

action, as appropriate:

a. Adjust switchgear taps.

b. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.

3. Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action has been performed, until specified

results are obtained.

4. Report: Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action

taken.

B. Infrared Inspection: Perform the survey during periods of maximum possible loading. Remove

covers prior to the inspection.

1. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,

perform infrared inspection of the electrical power connections of the switchgear.

2. Instrument: Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a

minimum temperature difference of 1deg C at 30 deg C.




3. Record of Infrared Inspection: Prepare a certified report that identifies the testing

technician and equipment used and lists the results as follows:

a. Description of equipment to be tested.

b. Discrepancies.

c. Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area.

d. Probable cause of temperature difference.

e. Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and unobservable areas and equipment.

f. Identify load conditions at time of inspection.

g. Provide photographs and thermograms of the deficient area.

4. Act on inspection results according to the recommendations of NETA ATS, Table 100.18.

Correct possible and probable deficiencies as soon as Owner's operations permit. Retest

until deficiencies are corrected.

3.08 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide overall system operation,

demonstration and training for the metal-enclosed switchgear. Training shall be provided for

8 hours. Training shall be for a maximum of 25 personnel at the Project Site.




SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

26 24 13 - 1

Metra/ Rock District

Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Section 13 32 23 Power Distribution Center.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section specifies switchboard work that is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of switchboards specified in this Section include the following:

1. Dead-Front Distribution:

a. Circuit-breaker switchboards (configured similar to motor control center) for

wayside power.

C. Switchboard manufacturer is responsible to provide a PDC (power distribution center –

enclosure or building) as specified in Section 13 34 23 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER and

provide all related coordination.




B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. C37.13 - Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.

2. C37.14 - Low-Voltage DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures.

3. C36.16 - Related Requirements and Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage

Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power Protectors, Preferred Ratings.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

1. 241 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings,

Pertaining to Switchboards.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA):

1. PB2 - Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards.

2. PB 2.1 - General Instruction for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards Rated 600V or Less.

3. SG 3 - Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.

E. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Comply with applicable local code requirements

of the authority having jurisdiction.

1. 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplaces.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Compliance: Provide switchboards and components which

are UL-listed and labeled.

1. 486A - Wire Connections and Soldering Lugs for Use in Copper Conductors.

2. 489 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures.

3. 891 - Dead Front Electrical Switchboards.


26 24 13 - 2



4. 977 - Fused Power Circuit Devices.

5. 1054 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment.

H. Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers:

1. SEI/ASCE 7-2002 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures.

1.04 SUBMITTALS:

A. Refer to Division 01 and Section 26 05 10 – BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS for

administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.


1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on switchboards including, but not limited

to, voltages, number of phases, frequency, short-circuit, and continuous current ratings.

Provide application data and time-current trip curves for main and branch circuit-

breakers and fuses. Provide time-current curves for fuse melting and clearing.

2. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of switchboards showing accurately

dimensioned equipment sections, including auxiliary compartments, section

components, and combination sections. Indicate weight of each section. Indicate all

required access points for all terminations.

3. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

4. Submit paint manufacturer's certification of VOC compliance and MSDS sheets. Submit

certification of paint VOC level compliance as required by local or regional governing

authorities.

5. Wiring Diagrams: Submit a wiring diagram for switchboards showing connections to

electrical power feeders and distribution branches. Differentiate between portions of

wiring that are manufacturer factory-installed and portions that are field-installed.

6. Coordination Study: Submit a coordination study per Section 26 05 73 – Power System

Studies.

7. Operation and Maintenance Manual.

8. All Field Test Data.


A. Coordinate and deliver switchboard to PDC manufacturer.

B. Deliver switchboards and components properly packaged and mounted on pallets or skids to

facilitate handling of heavy items. Utilize factory-fabricated type containers or wrappings for

switchboard and components which protect equipment from damage. Install impact

measuring meters in containers which will indicate whether the container has been bumped

or dropped. Return impact meters to the manufacturer for reuse upon delivery of

switchboards. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred during shipment.

C. Store switchboard equipment in original packaging and protect from weather and

construction traffic. Wherever possible, store indoors; where necessary to store outdoors,

store above grade and enclose with a watertight wrapping.

D. Handle switchboard equipment carefully to prevent physical damage to equipment and

components. Remove packaging, including the opening of crates and containers, avoiding the

use of excessive hammering and jarring which would damage the electrical equipment

contained therein. Do not install damaged equipment; remove damaged equipment from the

site and replace with new.


26 24 13 - 3



1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:

A. Schedule delivery of switchboard equipment which permits ready building ingress for large

equipment components to their designated installation spaces. Coordinate delivery of

equipment with the installation of other building components.

B. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into

concrete pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division

03.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. The following are the salient characteristics of the equipment:

a. AC Dead-Front Distribution Switchboard

b. Indoor, NEMA Type 1

2.02 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide switchboard units of one of the following

(for each type, and rating of switchboard):

1. Illinois Switchboard

2. Cutler-Hammer Products, Eaton Corp.

3. General Electric Co.

4. Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.

5. Square D Co.


2.03 EQUIPMENT SECTIONS AND COMPONENTS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide switchboards and ancillary components of

types, sizes, characteristics, and ratings indicated which comply with manufacturer's standard

design, materials, components, and construction, in accordance with published product

information, and as required for complete installation. Provide terminals UL rated for 75ºC

(minimum) conductors.

B. AC Dead-Front Distribution Switchboards: Factory-assembled, dead-front, metal-enclosed,

self-supporting secondary power switchboards, of types, sizes, electrical ratings, and

characteristics indicated; consisting of vertical panel units and containing circuit-breakers and

fusible switch assemblies of quantities, ratings, and types indicated. Provide tin-plated

copper main bus with connections to switching devices and circuit-breaker branches of

sufficient capacity to limit rated continuous current operating temperature rise to no greater

than 65ºC above average ambient temperature of 30ºC; with main bus and tap connections

silver-surfaced and bolted tightly according to manufacturer's torqueing requirements for

maximum conductivity. Copper bus current density shall not exceed 1,000 amperes per

square inch. Brace bus for short-circuit stresses greater than or equal to the minimum

interrupting capacity indicated. Provide accessibility of line and load terminations from rear

of switchboard. Prime and coat switchboard with manufacturer's standard finish and color.

Provide factory-painted white mimic bus on front of each switchboard. Provide equipment

with built-in lifting eyes and yokes. Provide vertical individual panel units, suitable for bolting

together at project site. Construct switchboard enclosures suitable for the following

environment:


26 24 13 - 4



1. Installation: Indoors, NEMA Type 1.

C. Enclosures: Construct dead-front switchboards suitable for floor mounting, with front

cabling/wiring accessibility and conduit accessibility as indicated. Provide welded steel

channel framework; hinge front wireway covers to permit ready access to branch circuit-

breaker load side terminals. Enclosure shall be suitable for being rolled or pushed into final

location. Coat enclosures with manufacturer's standard corrosive-resistant finish.

1. Factory Paint:

a. Equipment Manufacturers standard coating system may be applied, which is

suitable for the intended environment and service, but which does not contain any

lead (0.00%), zinc or strontium chromates, mercury or mercury compounds, or

asbestos. Coatings shall also be VOC compliant to meet the VOC level as required

by the local or regional governing authorities. Equipment Manufacturers shall

submit certification by coating manufacturers, including MSDS sheets, verifying

these requirements.

D. Circuit Breakers: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary

components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply

with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance

with published product information and as required for a complete installation.

1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of

frame sizes indicated; ampere rating indicated, 600V, 60 Hz, 3 poles with RMS

symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Provide breakers with permanent thermal

and instantaneous magnetic trips in each pole and ampere ratings as indicated.

Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-

make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Provide push-to-trip

button on enclosure cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers

for mounting and operating in a physical position and operating in an ambient

temperature of 40ºC. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable

connector lugs, AL/CU rated.

a. Breaker Accessories: Provide the following molded-case breaker accessories:

(1) Shunt trip Vac.

(2) Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with

adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-

fault indicator.

(3) Auxiliary contacts.

(4) Alarm switch.

(5) Undervoltage trip.

2. Solid-State Trip Circuit Breakers: Solid-state trip circuit breakers, ampere rating

indicated, 480V, 60 Hz, 3 poles, with RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting rating as

indicated. Construct breakers with ampere setting adjustment knobs for changing

current carrying capability of units and with ground-fault protection components with

external neutral current transformer (CT). Provide electronic components for timing

and monitoring internal currents and for initiating automatic tripping action. Construct

with trip-free mechanisms and with positive handle indication. Provide push-to-trip

button on cover for mechanical tripping circuit breakers. Construct breakers for

mounting in any physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40ºC.


26 24 13 - 5



Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connectors, AL/CU rated.

Solid-state trip circuit breakers shall have the following functions:

a. Adjustable current, long time delay.

b. Adjustable current, intermediate delay.

c. Ground-Fault current pickup and delay.

d. Adjustable current, instantaneous pickup.

e. Short time current pickup and delay.

3. Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Factory-assembled, electronically operated, insulated

case circuit breakers, 600Vac, 60 Hz, 3-phase, 3-pole, back connected, frame size

indicated, trip rating indicated, 100% continuous current rated, continuous current

rating indicated, RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity rating indicated.

Provide draw-out breaker elements with NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures.

Construct with ground-fault protection sensors as integral part of breakers. Equip

circuit breakers with solid-state controls and programming units possessing the

following operating features:

a. Adjustable current, long time delay.

b. Adjustable current, intermediate delay.

c. Ground-Fault current pickup and delay.

d. Adjustable current, instantaneous pickup.

e. Short time current pickup and delay.

f. Overload, short-circuit, and ground-fault target indicators.

g. Local target indication and provisions for remote target indication.

h. Circuit Breaker Accessories: Provide the following insulated case circuit circuit-

breaker accessories.

(1) Shunt trip Vac.

(2) Undervoltage release.

(3) Bell alarm with lockout.

(4) Auxiliary contacts.

(5) Enclosure-mounted interlock.

E. Switchboard Bus: Provide switchboard busing with sufficient cross-sectional area to fulfill UL

891 pertaining to temperature rise. Bus shall be continuous rated amperes as indicated on

drawings. Construct through-bus of copper with silver-plated connections, with ampacity

rating indicated, and with short-circuit current rating indicated. Provide fully rated main bus

(tapered bus is not acceptable). Provide full capacity neutral bus when neutral bus is

indicated. Provide ground bus full length of switchboard, firmly connected to each vertical

section of the switchboard.

F. Fusible Switches: Where indicated, provide fusible switch assemblies, 3-pole, quick-make,

quick-break types mounted in metal enclosures which are operated by externally located

handles which can be locked in the ON and OFF positions.

1. Fuses: In accordance with the following listed fuse types:

a. Class L time-delay, current limiting.

b. Class L fast-acting, current limiting.

c. Class RK1 time delay, current limiting.

d. Class RK1 fast-acting, current limiting.

e. Class RK5 time-delay, current limiting.

f. Class K5 one-time.


26 24 13 - 6



g. Class H.

G. Metering: Provide metering compartments, CTs, PTs, kWh meter, and instrument phase

selector switches. Mount meters semi-recessed in front doors and install meter wiring and

lacing with sufficient flexibility at hinged edge of meter front mounting plates to prevent

damage. Provide the following metering devices where indicated.

1. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

2. Potential Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 120 V, 60 Hz, tapped secondary; disconnecting

type with integral fuse mountings. Burden and accuracy shall be consistent with

connected metering and relay devices.

a. Current Transformers: IEEE C57.13; 5 A, 60 Hz, secondary; window type; single

secondary winding and secondary shorting device. Burden and accuracy shall be

consistent with connected metering and relay devices.

b. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for

units larger than 3 kVA.

c. Current Transformers for Neutral and Ground-Fault Current Sensing: Connect

secondary wiring to ground overcurrent relays, via shorting terminals, to provide

selective tripping of main and tie circuit breaker. Coordinate with feeder circuit-

breaker, ground-fault protection.

3. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for three-

or four-wire systems and with the following features:

4. Switch-selectable digital display of the following values with maximum accuracy

tolerances as indicated:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: ±1%.

(1) Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: ±1%.

(2) Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: ±1%.

(3) Megawatts: ±2%.

(4) Megavars: ±2%.

(5) Power Factor: ±2%.

(6) Frequency: ±0.5%.

(7) Accumulated Energy, Megawatt Hours: ±2%; accumulated values unaffected

by power outages up to 72 hours.

5. Voltmeter Transfer Switches: Knurled knot handle with a minimum of seven positions

(A-B, B-C, C-A, A-N, B-N, C-N, and OFF).

6. Ammeter Transfer Switches: Knurled knob handle with 4 positions (A, B, C, and OFF).

7. kWh Meters: With mechanical, resettable, pointer type, demand register. With kW

demand pulsed contact closures for remote demand indication.

H. Ground-Fault Protectors: Solid-state, ground-fault protection units of types and ratings

indicated: equip with static relays, sensors, pilot lights, and push-buttons for fault indication,

test, and reset; include fuse blocks, fuses, and control power transformers. Provide system

which operates at 120Vac.

I. Coordination: Provide settings for all adjustable trips such that the electrical system and

switchboard devices are all selectively coordinated.

J. Provide one of the manufacturer's standard solid-state trip programming and test devices to

the Owner.

K. Provide control power to dry-type transformer fan package.


26 24 13 - 7



L. Coordinate incoming power with dry-type transformer. Provide UL891 busway between

switchboard and transformer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine areas and conditions under which switchboards and components are to be installed.

Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF SWITCHBOARDS:

A. Install switchboards as indicated in PDC, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, and with recognized industry practices; comply with applicable requirements of

NEC, NEMA's Stds Pub/No. PB 2.1, and NECA's "Standard of Installation."

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where

manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to

comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and the National Electrical Code.

C. Install fuses, of sizes indicated, in switchboards. All fuses in each switchboard shall be from

the same manufacturer. All fuses in each switch shall be the same type of fuse.

D. Provide switchboard with nameplate indicating designation, incoming line circuit number,

voltage, and number of phases. Provide typed circuit directory indicating circuit number and

load served. Provide each overcurrent device with a corresponding adhesive number label.


A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's torque

tightening specifications.

B. Prior to energization, check switchboards for electrical continuity of circuits and for short-

circuits.

C. Prior to energization of switchboards, check with an insulation resistance tester: phase-to-

phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

Record and submit field test data.

D. Provide factory-authorized field service technician for final installation, adjustments, and

testing of the switchboard as installed in the PDC at the project site.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Set all adjustable trip settings to values provided by the Engineer.

B. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

C. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes.

3.05 GROUNDING:

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for switchboards as indicated. Tighten

connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and

effective grounds.

B. Test for ground continuity. Test neutral continuity to grounded point of derived system.

3.06 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Provide switchboard identification as specified in Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification.


26 24 13 - 8



3.07 DEMONSTRATIONS:

A. Subsequent to feeder and branch circuit wire and cable hook-ups, energize switchboards and

demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct

malfunctioning units and then retest to demonstrate compliance.




SECTION 26 27 33.10

HEAD END POWER CABINET

26 27 33.10 - 1




PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to

expand the requirements specified in DIVISION 01:

1. Submittals.

2. Coordination drawings.

3. Record documents.

4. Maintenance manuals.

5. Rough-ins.

6. Electrical installations.

7. Cutting and patching.

8. Electrical Demolition.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Contract includes, but is not limited to, the following work components:

1. Furnish and install (including supports) head end power cabinet(s) per the Drawings and

Specifications:


A. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.

B. Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout.


A. The American Public Transportation Association (APTA):

1. PR-E-RP-016-99 Recommended Practice for 480 VAC Head End Power System

B. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA).

C. National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS): Except where the NEIS requirements

specifically deviate from specific requirements of the NEC, the NEC shall take precedence.

D. Chicago Electrical Code - Municipal Code of the City of Chicago, Building/Electrical Code

Requirements; 2018.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

1.05 DEFINITIONS:

A. HEP: Head End Power.

1.06 SUBMITTALS:


B. Provide product data on electrical material and products. At a minimum:

1. Manufacturer qualifications, including fab shop location and list of (3) separate facilities

where manufacturer’s wayside power cabinets or similar equipment are currently in

use.

2. Manufacturer’s dimensioned general arrangement drawings, schematics, and wiring

diagrams.


26 27 33.10 - 2




3. Manufacturer’s data for all components.

4. Material callouts (type, thickness, plating, coating) for all fabricated items.

5. Mounting provisions and installation instructions.

6. Conduit entry locations.

C. Provide Conforming to Construction Records schematic diagrams and wiring diagrams.

D. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 77 00 - Project

Closeout.

E. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Project Closeout. In

addition to the requirements specified in DIVISION 01, include the following information for

equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data, tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers

of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine and

normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency

instructions; lockout/tagout procedures; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventive maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions, lubrication charts and schedules.

5. "Conforming to Construction Records" schematic and wiring diagrams.


A. Deliver cabinets to the Project Site properly identified with names, model numbers, types,

grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

1.08 WARRANTY:

A. Provide a minimum one-year warranty. Warranty period shall begin when equipment is

permanently energized or started unless specified otherwise. Contractor shall provide

written notification to Owner's Representative prior to this warranty start date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Stainless steel, NEMA 4X enclosure, padlockable, dual 480V head end power receptacles, 27-

pin comm receptacle, pilot device functions and dimensions as shown on the drawings.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Illinois Switchboard.

B. Chicago Switchboard.

C. ESL Power Systems.

D. Approved equal meeting the salient characteristics within this specification.

2.03 GENERAL:

A. Unless indicated otherwise, head end power cabinets and all equipment and material shall be

new, undamaged and meet the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). Where

UL requirements are not applicable, equipment and material shall be identified as such by

Contractor and approved by Owner before purchase and installation.


26 27 33.10 - 3




2.04 ENCLOSURE

A. Enclosure shall be CSA and/or UL Listed and labeled type 4X, constructed of continuous seam-

welded, 12 gauge stainless steel in thicknesses as shown on the drawings and conforming to

ASTM 167. Enclosure shall be designed for severe service in an outdoor rail yard

environment.

B. Enclosure size shall be as shown on the drawings. Coordinate with Engineer for any suggested

dimensional modifications, as available clearances to trains are very tight. Enclosure shall be

designed to accommodate the HEP receptacles as shown on the drawings, along with all

required power and control equipment as shown on the drawings. Enclosure shall have a

door with 3-point latch mechanism and heavy-duty SS padlockable handle, plus an integrated

hinged pilot device cover. Enclosure shall be designed for mounting horizontally and flush to

a concrete pad.

2.05 RECEPTACLES:

A. Dual HEP Receptacles at head end power cabinets shall be 480V 400A MRA series with

receptacle jumper assembly leads and breakaway provisions. Cadillac MRA series as

manufactured by Clements or equivalent.

B. 27-point 74V 30A receptacle assembly with spring cover.

C. 20A grey GFCI duplex tamper-resistant heavy duty receptacle with heavy duty weatherproof

in-use cover.

2.06 VOLTAGE MONITORING SYSTEM:

A. Voltage monitor system relay shall be capable of sensing 480 volts nominal, 3 phase, 3 wire.

The system shall trip the upstream contactor after an adjustable time delay sensing of voltage

imbalance, drop, or loss of phase.

B. CTs and shorting blocks shall be provided within the enclosure to ensure proper and accurate

operation of the Voltage Monitor System.

2.07 ACCESSORIES:

A. Provide pilot lights, push buttons, keyed switches, and other devices as required in the

Drawings.

1. Devices shall be Type 4X, 30mm in size.

2. Provide white plate with engraved black 2.25” letters indicating function for each

device.

3. All devices shall be heavy duty, rated for harsh environments, and NRTL-listed.

4. Pilot lights shall be color as indicated on Drawings, 120V LED bulb with ballast resistor,

push-to-test.

5. Manufacturers: Allen Bradley, Square D, or Cutler Hammer.

B. Provide 120V enclosure heater with fan and thermostat.

C. Provide 3”x5” white nameplate with engraved black letters for cabinet identification, affixed

with SS screws.

2.08 CABLE CONNECTIONS:

A. Provide 600V bus on insulated standoffs, with minimum 2 sets of 350kcmil 2-hole lugs per

phase to terminate incoming 480V power cables and ground.

B. Terminate HEP receptacles to bus using compression lugs.

C. Provide clear Lexan barriers with wing nuts for operator touch safety when cabinet is open.


26 27 33.10 - 4




D. Provide heavy duty terminal blocks as needed to terminate control cables and circuits

identified in Drawings. All terminal strip blocks shall be individually identified with computer-

printed labels as indicated on manufacturer’s drawings.

E. Power Wiring shall be flexible, stranded, rated for 600volts @ 90 degrees C, size as shown on

drawings.

F. Control wiring shall be stranded, 600 volt, UL type MTW, 14 gauge or larger as required.

G. All wiring and cabling in the cabinet shall be identified with heat-shrink computer-printed

white wire markers affixed on each end of each wiring conductor with wire number or

designation as indicated on manufacturer’s drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION:

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the

actual equipment to be connected.

B. Coordinate the installation of sleeves to be set in poured-in-place concrete and other

structural components as they are constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate

installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate

concrete pads and related items.

C. Coordinate connection of head end power cabinets with exterior underground utilities and

services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies,

and controlling agencies.

D. Prior to installation of Head End Power Cabinets, examine the areas and conditions under

which the head end power cabinets are to be installed and notify the Engineer in writing if

unsatisfactory conditions exist.

E. Head End Power Cabinets shall be installed as shown on the drawings and per the

manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Conduit entry into the wayside power cabinet shall be by Contractor. Furnish and install listed

watertight conduit hubs for each conduit entry on the Head End Power Cabinet. The hub size

shall match the conduit size for conductors and ground as shown on the drawings. Hubs shall

be properly installed and tightened to maintain Type 4X integrity of the Head End Power

Cabinet.

G. Terminate conductors and ground per the manufacturer’s instructions. All field wiring

terminations in the Head End Power Cabinet shall be torqued as required per the instructions

on the Head End Power Cabinet.

H. Once all wiring and field testing is complete, completely seal the interior of all conduits at the

hubs where the conduits enter the Head End Power Cabinet. Conduit sealant shall be Handi-

Foam polyurethane expanding sealant; Duct Seal is not acceptable.

3.02 FIELD TESTING:

A. Prior to energizing the Head End Power Cabinet, the Contractor shall perform the following

checks and tests as a minimum:

1. Verify mounting and connections are complete and secure.

2. Verify internal components and wiring are secure.

3. Perform continuity check of all circuits.

4. Perform 1,000 VDC megger test on phase and ground cables.

5. Perform phase rotation test.


26 27 33.10 - 5




6. Confirm operation of the Head End Power Cabinet by inserting a male HEP Test Plug into

the HEP receptacles, energizing the control and power, and then verifying that male

plug is properly energized with 3-phase 480VAC power.

3.03 CLEANING:

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and cabinets, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

3.04 PROTECTION:

A. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that cabinets are

without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.05 CLOSEOUT:

A. Instructions, training, and manufacturer’s service representative:

1. Provide on-site instructions and training of Owner's personnel in coordination with the

wayside power switchgear training. Training shall last no longer than one business day

and contain up to 20 Metra personnel.

2. Provide on-site services of a manufacturer's authorized service representative as

needed (to check wiring, set voltage relays, etc.).

3. Provide O&M manuals.

END OF SECTION 26 27 33.10


DIVISION 33: UTILITIES

SECTION 33 05 13

MANHOLES

33 05 13 - 1



MANHOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY:

A. Furnish all labor, equipment and materials to construct all precast concrete manholes and

accessories as indicated.

B. Manholes shall be manufactured and constructed complete with all appurtenances as

specified.

C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Concrete: DIVISION 3.


A. Design and construct all manholes conforming with the applicable provisions of the following

standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets.

b. C478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections.

2. Federal Specifications (FS):

a. SS-S-210 - Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe

Joints.

1.03 SUBMITTALS:


B. Submittals shall include all information necessary for design, manufacture, and construction

of the manholes, including the following:

1. General arrangement drawings showing manhole size, height, and location of access

cover, steps, and all pipe penetrations.

2. Joint construction details.

3. Product data on frame, cover, and steps, including materials of construction and


33 05 13 - 2


Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement MANHOLES

dimensions.

4. Certification of compliance with ASTM C478.

5. Details on reinforcement if requested.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Base and top shall be cast-in-place concrete as specified in Section 03 30 00 – CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE.

B. Precast Sections:

1. Concrete: ASTM C478.

2. Reinforcing: ASTM C478.

C. Steps: Shall be 1/2-inch diameter Grade 60 bar encapsulated in polypropylene plastic. Clay

and Bailey No. 5104 or Engineer-approved equal.

D. Frame and Cover: Shall be heavy-duty cast iron Clay and Bailey No. 2032.

E. Plastic Gaskets for Sealing Interior and Exterior Joint Space:

1. Comply with physical properties of FS SS-S-210 - Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic,

for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints.

2. Shall be butyl based rope with primer.

3. Rope size shall be per manufacturer's recommendation.

F. Coating for interior and exterior surface of manhole: Shop apply two coats of 15 mil dry film

thickness each of Carboline Bitumastic No. 50 or Engineer-approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:

A. Perform as detailed in drawings C301, C302, C304 and E502.

3.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE BASE AND INVERT:

A. Cast in place integral with bottom section of manhole as indicated. Form invert channels to

provide smooth grades from invert to invert without roughness, irregularities or pockets.

3.03 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS:

A. Install true to line and grade both vertically and horizontally and at the location indicated.


33 05 13 - 3


Medium Voltage Distribution Replacement MANHOLES

Use methods and equipment capable of fully homing or making up joints without damage.

B. Field clean and completely dry manhole joint surfaces with power brush and torch before

application of primer to both interior and exterior faces of bell and spigot. Place the rope

gasket in the center of the exterior and interior faces so as to form continuous gaskets. Join

precast manhole riser sections with sufficient force to slightly extrude the plastic gasket

material around the joint periphery both inside and out.

3.04 REINFORCED CONCRETE TOP:

A. Cast-in-place with frame and cover as indicated. Reinforce frame as indicated.

3.05 FIELD COATING:

A. Field clean and completely dry manhole base, invert and bottom of manhole top with power

brush and torch before applying coating. Apply two coats of Carboline Bitumastic No. 50 or

Engineer-approved equal. Apply each coat to 15 mil dry film thickness.



DIVISION 33 UTILITIES

SECTION 33 71 16.33

WOOD POLES

33 71 16.33- 1



WOOD POLES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.02 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of wood poles for transmission lines.


A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): M147 -

Materials for Aggregate and Soil Aggregate Subbase, Base and Surface Courses.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. C117 - Materials Finer than 75 μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.

2. C136 - Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 POLES

A. The poles will be treated with copper napthenate, creosote, or pentachlorophenol

preservative.

B. All poles furnished will be framed for the Tangent and Deadend structure.

2.02 CRUSHED ROCK BACKFILL.

A. Conform to AASHTO M147 Grading C or D with the following gradation limits:

Sieve Grading

C

Grading

D

1 inch 100 100

3/8-inch 50-85 60-100

No. 4 35-65 50-85

No. 10 25-50 40-70

No. 40 15-30 25-45

No. 200 5-15 5-20

B. Test by ASTM C136 and C117.

C. Preservative required for new gains or holes required in poles.

D. Mastic required to cap poles if pole tops require cutting.

E. Treated dowels for plugging unused pole holes.


SECTION 33 71 16.33 – WOOD POLES: CONTINUED

33 71 16.33- 2



WOOD POLES

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DESCRIPTION:

A. This part covers the handling and installation of all wood poles.

1. In distributing poles, extra heavy, choice, close grained poles shall be reserved for

angles, crossings, and dead ends.

2. Poles for multiple pole structures shall be matched so that their circumference, at the

cross-arm attachment, vary no more than 6 inches.

3. Poles shall be oriented with brands perpendicular to the angle bisector and facing

station 0+00.

4. Pole holes left unattended shall be barricaded.

5. Care shall be taken not to damage the ground conductors.

6. Earth shall be banked up around each pole. Upon completion of the job, installation

shall be inspected and any settlement refilled.

7. Centerlines of structures with running angles shall be offset to maintain alignment of

the phase wires at 60ºF no wind, except where otherwise indicated.

8. Where new gains or holes are required, the gains shall be made on the side of the pole

facing station 0+00 and shall be painted with preservative compound and the holes

pressure treated with preservative compound per AWPA M4.

9. All unused holes in poles shall be plugged prior to erection, using treated wood dowel

pins 3 inches in length. For holes in used poles where the hole has been enlarged, the

hole shall be pressure treated with preservative compound.

10. The tops of poles shall not be cut unless cutting is approved by the Engineer. Pole tops

that have been cut shall be treated with a preservative per AWPA M4 and covered with

a mastic cap. Butts of poles shall not be cut.

11. Wood structures shall be installed as indicated within the following tolerances:

a. Actual center of structure at ground line to indicated center.

(1) Transverse: ±4 inches.

(2) Longitudinal: ±6 inches.

b. Angle between transverse axis of structure and the angle bisector (a ray

perpendicular to the transmission line for tangent structures): ±5 degrees.

c. Variation from level of crossarms: 1/16 inch per foot.

d. Variation from plumb of poles:

(1) Transverse: 1/32 inch per foot of height.

(2) Longitudinal: 1/32 inch per foot of height.

e. Variation from specified depth: +1 foot, -0 foot, except where necessary to adjust

multiple pole structure impediment on sloping ground.

3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. When it is necessary to hold poles in storage, they shall be stacked on treated or other

nondecaying skids, stickers, etc., of such dimension and so arranged as to support the poles

without producing any noticeable distortion. The height of the piles shall be limited to avoid

damage to poles on the bottom layers. All wood skids, stickers, etc., shall be treated with

copper napthenate, creosote or pentachlorophenol.

B. Poles shall be piled and supported in such a manner that all poles are, at all points, at least 1

foot above the general ground level and any vegetation growing thereon. Stacks of poles



33 71 16.33- 3



WOOD POLES

shall not be allowed to settle at any point to less than 1 foot above the ground and adjacent

vegetation growing thereon. No decayed or decaying wood shall be permitted to remain

underneath stored poles or in the yard area adjacent to the stored poles. Poles shall not be

dead piled at any time.

C. Poles shall not be dragged or skidded.

D. Poles damaged by hooks, machinery, mishandling or other cause shall be repaired or

replaced, at the option of the Engineer, by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.

3.03 EMBEDMENT:

A. Poles shall be embedded as indicated.

B. On sloping ground embedment shall be measured from the lowest point on the ground

surface.

C. For multiple pole structures, pole embedment shall be adjusted to ensure that the completed

structure is plumb and level. Embedment may be increased, but in no case decreased, from

that specified.

3.04 BACKFILL:

A. Except where otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer, backfill shall be polyurethane

foam or crushed rock.

1. The bottoms of pole holes shall be within 2 inches of the required elevation before

setting of the structure. Overdrilled holes shall have the bottom filled and tamped to

attain the required elevation.

2. Crushed rock:

a. The pole hole diameter at least 8 inches larger than the butt diameter of the pole

plus butt plates if specified and with sufficient room for operation of tamps for the

entire embedded portion of the pole.

b. All water shall be removed from the holes prior to setting poles. (Where

dewatering is not feasible, crushed rock backfill shall be used.)

c. Cobbles in excess of 2 inches in diameter and organic materials shall not be used

for backfill.

d. The holes shall be backfilled and pneumatically tamped with no mechanical

loading allowed. A maximum of one manual shoveller per pneumatic tamper shall

be used at each hole. Backfill shall be added as follows:

(1) Crushed rock to within 18 inches of the top of the hole, the remainder to be

filled with native earth.

3. Polyurethane Foam:

a. Augered holes shall have as small a diameter as practicable. Spoil shall be

removed or dispersed over the right of way in a manner approved by the Engineer.

b. All accumulated water shall be removed from holes prior to setting poles.

c. When dispensing polyurethane foam, the entire embedded depth of the pole shall

be coated and a thin layer of foam shall be applied 4 to 6 inches above the ground

line to seal all cracks and voids in the wood.

d. Polyurethane foam shall rise to within 2 inches of ground line. Any excess above

ground shall be removed.

e. Pole shall be held in position at least 8 minutes after polyurethane foam has

become tack free.



33 71 16.33- 4



WOOD POLES

f. Mixing and installation of polyurethane foam shall be in strict accordance with

manufacturer's instructions.

3.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

A. Contractor will be paid as specified in Division 01.

END OF SECTION 33 71 16.33


REFERENCE DOCUMENTS


TEMPORARY SHORING GUIDELINES

(10/1/2010)

REV 0


Temporary Shoring Guidelines

Revision 0 | 10/1/2010 Page 1 of 10

TEMPORARY SHORING I. Overview Excavation in close proximity to railroad tracks is unavoidable. This guideline is designed to assist in the preparation of shoring documents so that review time is limited.

This document is only a guideline and the preparer is still required to follow any agency-specific requirements including: AREMA, Railroads, OSHA, IDOT, FRA, or other governing agency in the jurisdiction. Note this document is only applicable to Metra-owned tracks.

These guidelines are provided as reference and may not be taken as authority to construct without prior written approval of the Metra. The Contractor must not begin construction of any component of the shoring system affecting Metra right-of-way until written approval has been received from Metra.

II. Submittals To expedite shoring review the following items should be submitted with the review package.

• Design calculations stamped and signed by Illinois Licensed Structural Engineer

• Lateral pressure diagram

• Deflection calculations at top of wall and bracing locations including elastic deflection of the wall and the passive deflection of the resisting soil mass.

• Drawings or sketches of the proposed shoring consisting of:

1. Plan view showing wall limits and distances from centerline of track (see attached example)

2. Cross section (see attached example) showing excavation support system, top of rail elevation, distance from centerline of track to near face of excavation support, maximum excavation depth with elevations, elevation of bracing, tip elevation, etc.

3. Connection details.

• Soil report and boring logs

III. Design Excavation support shall be based on AREMA Manual for Railway Engineering, Chapter 8, Section 20 and Section 24.

Lateral Pressure from train loads shall be based on Cooper E 80 train load (Figure 1) and active earth pressure due to railroad surcharge shall be calculated using the Boussinesq Equation for strip load per AREMA 8-20.3.2.2 (Figure 2). Uniform surcharge (q) shall be based on an 8.5 foot long tie, 5 foot axle spacing and 80 kip axle load resulting in q=1.88ksf. See attached Table 1: Lateral Pressure from Train Load Example Calculation for additional variable designations

A simplified engineering analysis may be used, the railroad loading surcharge pressure may be assumed rectangular with width (P) equal to 0.8 of the maximum pressure as given by the appropriate railroad curve (Table 2: Lateral Pressure from Cooper E 80 train loads).

Temporary shoring on the Metra Electric Line may be designed for Cooper E 65 loading with approval from Metra.

All shoring systems must be analyzed for overturning, sliding and global stability.

Lateral live load deflection shall be limited to 3/8” for shoring located within 18’-0” of centerline of track and ½” for shoring located outside 18’-0”. The maximum allowable vertical of horizontal displacement of rail shall be ¼”.




Material allowable stresses based on AREMA shall be as follow:

• Structural Steel: 0.55Fy for compression in extreme fiber. (AREMA Table 15-1-11)

• Structural Steel: 0.35Fy for Shear. (AREMA Table 15-1-11)

• Sheet Pile Sections: 2/3 of yield strength of steel. (AREMA 8.20.5.7)

• Concrete: 1/3 of Compressive Strength. (AREMA 8.20.5.7)

• Anchor Rods: ½ of yield strength of steel. (AREMA 8.20.5.7)

No AISC allowable stress increase for temporary loading condition will be allowed.

IV. General Requirements All components of the temporary shoring system are to be removed when the shoring is no longer needed. Track cross section and drainage facilities must be restored.

All Temporary shoring systems within the clearance envelope (see attached AREMA Minimum Railway Clearance sketch) shall be terminated below the top of rail.

An OSHA acceptable handrail is required around all excavation.

No cantilever shoring will be allowed within 12 feet of active rails.

No MSE walls will be allowed within the limits of E80 surcharge.

Cold formed piling will not be accepted within the limits of E80 surcharge.

Track deflection monitoring shall be implemented. Elevations of top of rail shall be taken at 50 foot intervals for a distance to extend 100 feet beyond the limits of excavation. Elevations shall be recorded at the following intervals: prior to shoring construction, at completion of shoring construction, following first train through area, daily there after and once shoring has been removed or as directed by the Engineer.




Figure 1: Cooper E 80 Load (AREMA Figure 15-1-2)

Boussinesq Equation: PS = (2q / π) ( β+sinβ sin2α – sinβ cos2α) (per AREMA 8-20.3.2.2.a)

Figure 2: Pressure Distribution for Strip Load (AREMA Figure 8-20-2)


Limits.dgn 10/1/2010 1:51:43 PM


Limits.dgn 10/1/2010 1:52:17 PM


Limits.dgn 10/1/2010 1:52:03 PM


Limits.dgn 10/1/2010 1:51:24 PM


Axle load 80 kips Axle load 80 kipsTL 8.5 ft TL 8.5 ft

CLT 10 ft CLT 23 ftq 1.8824 ksf q 1.8824 ksf

HS β α PS β α PS PS total(ft) (rad) (rad) (ksf) (rad) (rad) (ksf) (ksf)1 0.1021 1.4497 0.2410 0.0166 1.5258 0.0397 0.28072 0.1953 1.3337 0.4409 0.0330 1.4810 0.0785 0.51943 0.2734 1.2266 0.5775 0.0490 1.4366 0.1153 0.69284 0.3341 1.1301 0.6504 0.0644 1.3928 0.1495 0.79995 0.3783 1.0442 0.6723 0.0791 1.3498 0.1805 0.85286 0.4081 0.9682 0.6591 0.0930 1.3076 0.2076 0.86687 0.4265 0.9009 0.6247 0.1059 1.2664 0.2307 0.85548 0.4360 0.8412 0.5789 0.1177 1.2264 0.2497 0.82879 0.4390 0.7880 0.5287 0.1285 1.1875 0.2647 0.793310 0.4371 0.7404 0.4781 0.1382 1.1500 0.2757 0.753811 0.4317 0.6975 0.4297 0.1469 1.1137 0.2831 0.712812 0.4241 0.6589 0.3847 0.1545 1.0787 0.2872 0.672013 0.4148 0.6238 0.3437 0.1611 1.0451 0.2885 0.632214 0.4045 0.5920 0.3068 0.1668 1.0128 0.2872 0.594115 0.3937 0.5629 0.2739 0.1715 0.9818 0.2839 0.557816 0.3826 0.5363 0.2447 0.1755 0.9521 0.2788 0.523517 0.3715 0.5119 0.2189 0.1787 0.9237 0.2723 0.491218 0.3604 0.4894 0.1961 0.1812 0.8964 0.2648 0.460919 0.3496 0.4687 0.1760 0.1831 0.8703 0.2564 0.432420 0.3391 0.4495 0.1583 0.1845 0.8454 0.2474 0.405721 0.3289 0.4317 0.1426 0.1854 0.8215 0.2381 0.380722 0.3191 0.4152 0.1288 0.1858 0.7987 0.2285 0.357323 0.3097 0.3998 0.1166 0.1858 0.7769 0.2189 0.335524 0.3007 0.3855 0.1058 0.1855 0.7560 0.2093 0.315125 0.2920 0.3721 0.0961 0.1849 0.7360 0.1999 0.296026 0.2837 0.3595 0.0876 0.1841 0.7168 0.1906 0.278227 0.2758 0.3477 0.0800 0.1830 0.6985 0.1816 0.261628 0.2682 0.3367 0.0731 0.1818 0.6809 0.1729 0.246029 0.2610 0.3262 0.0671 0.1803 0.6641 0.1645 0.231530 0.2541 0.3164 0.0616 0.1788 0.6480 0.1564 0.218031 0.2475 0.3071 0.0567 0.1771 0.6325 0.1487 0.205432 0.2412 0.2984 0.0523 0.1754 0.6177 0.1414 0.193633 0.2351 0.2901 0.0483 0.1736 0.6035 0.1343 0.1826

Variable designation

PS = (2q/π)(β+sinβsin2α-sinβcos2α) Active Pressure from surcharge loading AREMA 8-20.3.2.2.a

B = atan[(CLT+TL/2)/HS] - atan[(CLT-TL/2)/HS] in radiansA = β/2+atan[(CLT-TL/2)/HS] in radiansq = 80 kips / (5' x TL) uniform surcharge load from trains

CLT = Distance from near face of retaining wall to centerline of track (feet)TL = Tie length (8.5 feet)HS = Depth below applied surcharge loading (feet)

Track 1 Track 2

Table 1: Lateral Pressure from Train LoadExample Calculations



Figure 3: Lateral Pressure from Train LoadExample Calculations

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

350.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

PS , Active Pressure (ksf)

HS,

Dep

th (f

t)

TotalTrack 1Track 2



HS 8 9 10 11 12 14 16 18 20 23 26 29 32 35 39 43 47 51 551 0.416 0.310 0.241 0.193 0.159 0.113 0.085 0.066 0.053 0.040 0.031 0.025 0.020 0.017 0.014 0.011 0.009 0.008 0.0072 0.700 0.550 0.441 0.361 0.301 0.218 0.165 0.130 0.104 0.078 0.061 0.049 0.040 0.034 0.027 0.022 0.019 0.016 0.0143 0.828 0.691 0.577 0.486 0.413 0.307 0.237 0.188 0.152 0.115 0.090 0.073 0.060 0.050 0.040 0.033 0.028 0.023 0.0204 0.846 0.746 0.650 0.565 0.492 0.378 0.297 0.239 0.196 0.150 0.118 0.095 0.078 0.066 0.053 0.044 0.037 0.031 0.0275 0.803 0.742 0.672 0.603 0.538 0.429 0.345 0.282 0.233 0.180 0.143 0.116 0.096 0.081 0.066 0.054 0.045 0.039 0.0336 0.732 0.703 0.659 0.608 0.556 0.460 0.380 0.315 0.265 0.208 0.166 0.136 0.113 0.095 0.078 0.064 0.054 0.046 0.0407 0.653 0.647 0.625 0.592 0.554 0.474 0.402 0.340 0.290 0.231 0.187 0.154 0.129 0.109 0.089 0.074 0.062 0.053 0.0468 0.576 0.585 0.579 0.561 0.536 0.475 0.413 0.357 0.309 0.250 0.205 0.170 0.143 0.122 0.100 0.083 0.070 0.060 0.0529 0.504 0.523 0.529 0.523 0.509 0.466 0.416 0.366 0.322 0.265 0.219 0.184 0.156 0.133 0.110 0.092 0.078 0.067 0.05810 0.439 0.464 0.478 0.482 0.477 0.450 0.411 0.369 0.329 0.276 0.232 0.196 0.167 0.144 0.119 0.100 0.085 0.073 0.06311 0.382 0.411 0.430 0.440 0.442 0.428 0.401 0.367 0.332 0.283 0.241 0.206 0.177 0.153 0.127 0.108 0.092 0.079 0.06912 0.333 0.363 0.385 0.399 0.406 0.404 0.386 0.360 0.331 0.287 0.248 0.214 0.185 0.161 0.135 0.115 0.098 0.085 0.07413 0.290 0.320 0.344 0.361 0.372 0.378 0.369 0.350 0.327 0.288 0.252 0.220 0.192 0.168 0.142 0.121 0.104 0.090 0.07914 0.253 0.283 0.307 0.326 0.339 0.352 0.350 0.338 0.319 0.287 0.255 0.224 0.197 0.174 0.148 0.127 0.110 0.095 0.08415 0.222 0.250 0.274 0.294 0.309 0.327 0.331 0.324 0.310 0.284 0.255 0.227 0.202 0.179 0.153 0.132 0.115 0.100 0.08816 0.195 0.221 0.245 0.265 0.281 0.302 0.311 0.309 0.300 0.279 0.254 0.228 0.205 0.183 0.158 0.137 0.119 0.104 0.09217 0.172 0.196 0.219 0.239 0.255 0.279 0.291 0.293 0.288 0.272 0.251 0.228 0.206 0.186 0.161 0.141 0.123 0.108 0.09618 0.152 0.175 0.196 0.215 0.232 0.257 0.272 0.278 0.276 0.265 0.247 0.227 0.207 0.188 0.164 0.144 0.127 0.112 0.09919 0.135 0.156 0.176 0.194 0.211 0.237 0.254 0.262 0.264 0.256 0.242 0.225 0.207 0.189 0.167 0.147 0.130 0.115 0.10220 0.120 0.139 0.158 0.176 0.192 0.218 0.236 0.247 0.251 0.247 0.237 0.222 0.206 0.189 0.168 0.149 0.133 0.118 0.10521 0.107 0.125 0.143 0.159 0.175 0.201 0.220 0.232 0.238 0.238 0.230 0.218 0.204 0.189 0.169 0.151 0.135 0.121 0.10822 0.096 0.112 0.129 0.145 0.159 0.185 0.205 0.218 0.226 0.229 0.224 0.214 0.201 0.188 0.170 0.153 0.137 0.123 0.11023 0.086 0.101 0.117 0.131 0.145 0.170 0.190 0.205 0.214 0.219 0.216 0.209 0.198 0.186 0.170 0.153 0.138 0.125 0.11224 0.077 0.092 0.106 0.120 0.133 0.157 0.177 0.192 0.202 0.209 0.209 0.204 0.195 0.184 0.169 0.154 0.139 0.126 0.11425 0.070 0.083 0.096 0.109 0.122 0.145 0.165 0.180 0.191 0.200 0.202 0.198 0.191 0.182 0.168 0.154 0.140 0.128 0.11626 0.063 0.075 0.088 0.100 0.112 0.134 0.153 0.169 0.180 0.191 0.194 0.192 0.187 0.179 0.167 0.154 0.141 0.128 0.11727 0.057 0.069 0.080 0.091 0.103 0.124 0.143 0.158 0.170 0.182 0.187 0.186 0.182 0.176 0.165 0.153 0.141 0.129 0.11828 0.052 0.063 0.073 0.084 0.094 0.115 0.133 0.148 0.160 0.173 0.179 0.180 0.178 0.173 0.163 0.152 0.141 0.130 0.11929 0.048 0.057 0.067 0.077 0.087 0.106 0.124 0.139 0.151 0.164 0.172 0.174 0.173 0.169 0.161 0.151 0.140 0.130 0.12030 0.044 0.052 0.062 0.071 0.080 0.099 0.115 0.130 0.143 0.156 0.165 0.168 0.168 0.165 0.158 0.149 0.140 0.130 0.12031 0.040 0.048 0.057 0.065 0.074 0.092 0.108 0.122 0.135 0.149 0.158 0.162 0.163 0.161 0.156 0.148 0.139 0.129 0.12032 0.037 0.044 0.052 0.060 0.069 0.085 0.101 0.115 0.127 0.141 0.151 0.156 0.158 0.157 0.153 0.146 0.138 0.129 0.12033 0.034 0.041 0.048 0.056 0.064 0.079 0.094 0.108 0.120 0.134 0.145 0.151 0.153 0.153 0.150 0.144 0.136 0.128 0.120

note boxed value represents the maximum pressure for each value of CLT

Table 2: Lateral Pressure from Cooper E 80 Train Loads (ksf)

CLT, Distance from near face of retaining wall to centerline of track (ft)

Dep

th (f

t)

Revision 0 | 10/1/2010 Page 10 of 10


METRA

Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey METRA 47TH STREET YARD


PROJECT

147 W. 47TH STREET

CHICAGO, IL

CONTRACT K61464, TASK ORDER NO. 005

Project No.: 20493-241133

October 2018


Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey/ Metra 47th Street MVE i

Table of Contents

Executive Summary ............................................................................................................ 1

Section 1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.2 Report Organization ................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Section 2 Survey Methodology ........................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Asbestos-Containing Materials .............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2 Lead-Based Paint ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2

2.3 PCB- and Mercury-containing Equipment ........................................................................................ 2-2

2.4 Soils ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-2

Section 3 Summary of Findings ........................................................................................ 3-1


3.2 Lead-Based Paint ......................................................................................................................................... 3-1


3.4 Soils ................................................................................................................................................................... 3-2

Section 4 Conclusions and Recommendations .................................................................. 4-1


4.2 Lead-Based Paint ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1


4.4 Soils ................................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

Section 5 Certifications .................................................................................................... 5-1


Table of Contents

Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey/ Metra 47th Street MVE ii

List of Figures

Figure 1 – ACM Sample Locations

Figure 2 – Soil Sample Locations

List of Tables

Table 1. ACM Survey Results ....................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Table 2. Non-LBP Components/Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 3-1

Appendices

Appendix A - Asbestos Analytical Testing Results

Appendix B - XRF Field Data Sheets

Appendix C – Soil Analytical Testing Results

Appendix D - Asbestos and Lead Inspector Licenses and Certifications

Appendix E - Laboratory Licenses and Accreditations

Appendix F – Photographic Documentation


Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey/ Metra 47th Street MVE 1

Executive Summary

CDM Smith Inc. (CDM Smith) was retained by Metra to conduct a limited hazardous materials

investigation, including soil testing, an asbestos-containing materials (ACM) and lead-based paint

(LBP) survey, and an evaluation of potential PCB- and mercury-containing equipment, for the

medium voltage distribution system project within Metra’s 47th Street Yard located at 147 W. 47th

Street in Chicago, Illinois under Contract K61464, Task Order No. 005.

CDM Smith, along with GSG Consultants, Inc. (GSG), performed the field investigation on

September 17-21, 2019 in accordance with the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency (IEPA)

requirements and guidelines and standard industry practices. The ACM and LBP surveys were

conducted by asbestos and lead inspectors licensed by the Illinois Department of Public Health

(IDPH).

The scope of work for the medium voltage distribution system included a limited hazardous

materials survey of a series of exterior electrical boxes/panels that contain switchgear to control

the medium voltage distribution system for the facility. These components are scheduled for

demolition and replacement. The scope of work also included collection of a soil sample for

waste characterization in the planned trench area for new electrical conduit.

The ACM survey did not identify ACM within the medium voltage distribution project area as

summarized in Table 1. The ACM sample locations are provided on Figure 1.

LBP was not identified on painted surfaces/components tested within the medium voltage

distribution area. These materials are summarized in Table 2.

CDM Smith recommends that prior to any demolition activities in which LBP surfaces may be

impacted or disturbed, a lead mitigation/abatement project design shall be prepared. Refer to

Table 2 for components tested. For the surfaces/components that tested negative during this

survey, the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Lead in Construction Standard

states that “negative” readings, i.e. those below the HUD/EPA definition of what constitutes LBP

(1.0 mg/cm2), DO NOT relieve contractors from performing exposure assessments (personal air

monitoring) on the their employees per the OSHA Lead Standard, and should not be interpreted

as lead is not present. Although a reading may indicate “negative”, airborne lead concentrations

still may exceed the OSHA Action Level or the OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) depending

on the work activity. CDM Smith recommends that engineering control measures be implemented

prior to any demolition activities to minimize the generation of dust and site worker exposures to

lead.

Materials that are not listed in Tables 1 and 2 were not tested during this survey. Such

surfaces/components will be required to be assumed and treated as ACM or LBP until tested and

proven otherwise.

The subject property contains several transformers. However, Metra has indicated that all

transformers are dry-type and do not contain liquids and therefore, no PCBs. PCB-containing

equipment was not identified within the medium voltage distribution area.


Executive Summary

Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey/ Metra 47th Street MVE 2

Mercury-containing equipment was not observed during the site reconnaissance.

CDM Smith conducted a limited subsurface investigation within the planned medium voltage

distribution trench area for the new electrical conduit. As part of the subsurface investigation,

one (1) boring was advanced using track-mounted geoprobe, with soil samples continually

collected at depths ranging from 0.0 to 8.0 feet below ground surface (bgs). A single sample was

collected (47th-SB-MVE) at the location shown in Figure 2.

A composite sample was analyzed for waste characterization parameters. The soil analytical

results were compared to criteria established for acceptance of materials as special waste at a

Subtitle D landfill (paint filter, flashpoint, hazardous components, etc.). The results of the

investigation indicate acceptable parameters that would not prevent disposal at a Subtitle D

landfill.


Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey/ Metra 47th Street MVE 1-1

Section 1

Introduction

CDM Smith Inc. (CDM Smith) was retained by Metra to conduct a limited hazardous materials

investigation, including soil testing, an asbestos-containing materials (ACM) and lead-based paint

(LBP) survey, and an evaluation of potential PCB and mercury containing equipment, for the

medium voltage distribution system project within Metra’s 47th Street Yard located at 147 W. 47th

Street in Chicago, Illinois under Contract K61464, Task Order No. 005.

1.1 Objectives The objective of the hazardous materials investigation was to identify the location and quantity of

materials that will require abatement/removal/mitigation prior to any demolition activities as

well as to determine soil disposal options. The ACM and LBP surveys included inspections by

IDPH-licensed inspectors.

The scope of work for the medium voltage distribution system included a limited hazardous

materials survey of a series of exterior electrical boxes/panels that contain switchgear to control

the medium voltage distribution system for the facility. These components are scheduled for

demolition and replacement. The scope of work also included collection of a soil sample for

waste characterization in the planned trench area for new electrical conduit.

1.2 Report Organization The report is divided into the following sections

Section 1 – Introduction

This section presents a brief description of the project objectives and areas included in the

investigation.

Section 2 – Survey Methodology

This section describes methodologies used in performing the surveys.

Section 3 – Summary of Findings

This section describes the findings of the investigation.

Section 4 – Conclusions and Recommendations

This section presents a summary of the Site conditions and findings and presents

recommendations regarding the Site’s regulatory conditions and abatement work required

prior to the planned construction.

Section 5 – Certifications



Section 2

Survey Methodology

This section describes the survey approach and methodologies that were utilized during the field

investigation activities. The investigation included performing the following tasks:

ACM inspection

LBP inspection

PCB-containing equipment inspection

Mercury-containing equipment inspection

Soil investigation

The following sub-sections present an overview of the approach for each survey completed as

part of this project.

2.1 Asbestos-Containing Materials CDM Smith performed a limited asbestos survey for the Diesel Shop building. The asbestos

survey consisted of two phases. The first phase included a walk-through inspection of the

building to identify suspect ACM and homogenous areas. The second phase consisted of

collecting representative bulk samples from the suspected friable and non-friable ACM. The field

survey was conducted by an IDPH-licensed asbestos inspector. The ACM sample locations are

provided on Figure 1.

The inspector collected bulk samples in general accordance with the United Stated Environmental

Protection Agency (US EPA) National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

(NESHAPS) and IDPH regulations and guidelines. Any additional potential hazardous materials

encountered that will be disturbed during demolition activities and that differs from materials

sampled during this survey should be further sampled and analyzed. The inspector, however,

made every reasonable effort to locate or trace concealed mechanical systems or other

inconspicuous materials. The samples were collected and stored in pre-cleaned containers with

an assigned sample identification number prior to delivery to a laboratory.

The bulk samples were analyzed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) by STAT Analysis Corp., an

American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA) and National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory. The samples were analyzed and reported

by the layers present within each sample.

For the purpose of this survey, CDM Smith derived its definition of ACM from the Environmental

Protection Agency (EPA) which classifies ACM as "any product containing more than one percent

(1%) asbestos by weight, when analyzed by PLM”.

Laboratory reports include, among other information, field sample numbers, and analysis results

by layers, and analyst’s signature.


Section 2 • Survey Methodology


2.2 Lead-Based Paint LBP testing was performed with an X-ray fluorescence (XRF)-type analyzer, RMD Model LPA-1

(Serial Number 4044) manufactured by RMD, Inc., of Watertown, MA. GSG followed the standard

operating procedures for sample selection and measurement of lead in paint using the RMD LPA-

1 analyzer. The standard operating procedures conform to the U.S. Department of Housing and

Urban Development (HUD) “Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead-Based Paint

Hazards in Housing” (June 1997) and to the operational and reporting specifications for each

substrate tested, as referenced therein and included in the corresponding Performance

Characteristics Sheet for the RMD LPA-1 analyzer.

The "K"-shell emission reading reported on field data sheets reflects lead measured in all the

layers of paint films, including painted areas beneath surfaces renovated with new plaster, vinyl,

wallboard, or aluminum siding. Determination of lead-based paint was done by comparison of

"K"-shell XRF readings to the current HUD guidelines level of 1.0 mg/cm2.

2.3 PCB- and Mercury-containing Equipment CDM Smith performed a limited hazardous materials survey that also included potential PCB- and

mercury-containing equipment. CDM Smith conducted an inspection of the switchgear

components to identify the potential for PCBs or mercury.

2.4 Soils A soil boring was advanced using a geoprobe to a depth of 8.0 feet below ground surface (bgs).

One (1) composite sample (47th-SB-MVD) was collected from the boring advanced at the location

shown in Figure 2. Continuous soil cores were collected and examined for visual indications (i.e.,

staining, discoloration, oily sheens, etc.) and olfactory indications (i.e., solvent odors, petroleum

odors, etc.) of potential contamination.

Following collection, the soil sample was placed in a container and labeled at the time of sampling

with the following information using indelible ink:

• Project/Site name;

• Date and time of collection;

• Unique sample identification number;

• Sample media; and

• Initials of sample collector.

The sample containers were pre-cleaned according to USEPA standards and sealed with Teflon®

lined plastic screw-on lids. The samples were placed in an insulated portable cooler filled with ice

and cooled to a temperature of less than 4°C. A chain-of-custody form was prepared, signed, and

dated by a CDM Smith representative and the laboratory representative receiving the samples.

The samples were sent to STAT Analysis, an Illinois accredited laboratory, for chemical analysis

using standard chain-of-custody procedures. Upon arrival, the laboratory checked that the

samples were properly labeled, correctly stored, and sample containers were correctly preserved.


Section 2 • Survey Methodology


Sampling and analysis parameters were chosen based on the required sampling protocols

required by local disposal facilities. The composite sample was analyzed for waste

characterization analysis, which included: pH, paint filter, reactive cyanide, reactive sulfide, total

phenols, flashpoint, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), toxicity characteristic leaching procedure

(TCLP) herbicides/pesticides, TCLP metals, and TCLP organics. The analytical methods used are

listed within the analytical results. A complete laboratory analytical report and chain-of custody

forms are provided in Appendix C.



Section 3

Summary of Findings

3.1 Asbestos-Containing Materials Bulk samples were collected from suspect materials divided into homogeneous areas. A

homogeneous area is an area of surfacing material, thermal system insulation, or miscellaneous

material that is uniform in color and texture. See Table 1 for laboratory results of materials

sampled. Sample locations are provided on Figure 1. The results of the survey are as follows:

Table 1. ACM Survey Results

HSA Material Description Location Estimated Quantity Result

01 Electric arc shields (white) Switchgear NA NEGATIVE

02 Electric arc shields (red) Switchgear NA NEGATIVE

HSA=homogeneous sampling area; SF= square feet, LF=linear feet, NA=not applicable

Materials located in different areas of the same homogeneous area, even though not specifically

tested, will be considered positive or negative for asbestos depending on the laboratory sample

test results of that particular homogeneous area. Appendix A includes the asbestos analytical

laboratory results and chain-of-custody sheets for the asbestos. Appendix D presents the

asbestos and lead inspector licenses and certifications. Appendix E presents the laboratory

licenses and accreditations. Appendix F presents photographs taken during the site

reconnaissance.

3.2 Lead-Based Paint The Radiation Monitoring Device, LPA-1 XRF Spectrum Analyzer, in accordance with HUD/IDPH

Protocols, was used to identify components and surfaces that may contain LBP. LBP was not

identified on the painted surfaces/components tested during this survey as indicated in Table 2.

Appendix B includes XRF field data sheets. The results of the survey are as follows:

Table 2. NON-LBP Components/Surfaces

Room/Location Component Substrate Color XRF Readings

mg/cm2

Test Results

Switchgear cabinets

Door Panel Metal Gray 0.6 Negative



Base Metal Gray 0.1 Negative




Section 3 • Summary of Findings


3.3 PCB- and Mercury-containing Equipment The walk-through inspection did not identify PCB- and mercury-containing equipment within the

switchgear cabinets.

The 47th Street Yard contains several transformers. However, Metra has indicated that all

transformers are dry-type and do not contain liquids and therefore, no PCBs.

3.4 Soils The soil analytical results for the waste characterization sample were compared to criteria

established for acceptance of materials as special waste at a Subtitle D landfill (paint filter,

flashpoint, hazardous components, etc.) The results of the investigation indicate acceptable

concentrations that would not prevent disposal at a Subtitle D landfill.

Soil sample locations are provided on Figure 3. Appendix C presents the soil analytical

laboratory results and chain-of-custody sheets. Appendix E presents the laboratory licenses and

accreditations.



Section 4

Conclusions and Recommendations

4.1 Asbestos-Containing Materials The ACM survey did not identify the presence of ACM within the medium voltage distribution

area.

Note: Since the scope of work included only visible and accessible areas, it is possible that some

ACM were omitted from the survey because they were concealed behind panels or within

concrete. Only a destructive survey can reveal all potentially concealed ACM. Any additional

potential hazardous materials encountered that will be disturbed during demolition activities and

that differs from materials sampled during this survey should be further sampled and analyzed.

Materials that are not listed in Table 1 were not tested during this survey. Such materials are

required to be assumed and treated as ACM until tested and proven otherwise.

4.2 Lead-Based Paint The LBP survey did not identify the presence of lead within the painted surfaces of the medium

voltage distribution area. These materials are summarized in Table 2.

In addition, CDM Smith recommends that prior to any demolition activities in which LBP surfaces

may be impacted or disturbed, a lead mitigation/abatement project design shall be prepared. For

the surfaces/components that tested negative during this survey, the OSHA Lead in Construction

Standard states that “negative” readings, i.e. those below the HUD/EPA definition of what

constitutes LBP (1.0 mg/cm2), DO NOT relieve contractors from performing exposure

assessments (personal air monitoring) on the their employees per the OSHA Lead Standard, and

should not be interpreted as lead is not present. Although a reading may indicate “negative”,

airborne lead concentrations still may exceed the OSHA Action Level or the OSHA Permissible

Exposure Limit (PEL) depending on the work activity. CDM Smith recommends that prior to any

demolition activities, engineering control measures be implemented to minimize the generation

of dust and site worker exposures to lead.

Surfaces/components that are not listed as either LBP positives or negatives were not tested

during this survey. Such surfaces/components are required to be assumed and treated as LBP

until tested and proven otherwise.

4.3 PCB- and Mercury-containing Equipment Equipment containing mercury or PCBs was not identified within the medium voltage

distribution area.


Section 4 • Conclusions and Recommendations


4.4 Soils The results of the limited Subsurface Investigation indicate the soils are acceptable for disposal at

a Subtitle D landfill. A waste profile will be completed for the landfill chosen by Metra.



Section 5

Certifications

The undersigned hereby affirm that the conditions described herein are accurate to the best of

our knowledge and belief, and are subject to the limitations inherent in the investigative

techniques used and any expressed limitations of this survey. Applicable licensing to perform the

described survey activities were valid at the time of performance of services in accordance with

applicable federal, state and local laws, rules and regulations.

Inspection Performed By:

Roberto Rivera 100-06327 Roberto Rivera 003649

Asbestos Inspector's Name IDPH License #

Lead Inspector’s Name IDPH License #

10/15/2019

10/15/2019

Asbestos Inspector's

Signature

Date Lead Inspector's Signature Date


Hazardous Materials Investigation / Metra 47th Street Diesel Shop

Figures


M01-01M01-02M01-03

M02-01M02-02M02-03

FIGUE 1

MXX-XX ACM SAMPLE LOCATION


Coach Shop

Diesel Shop

Medium VoltageDistribution Switchgear

47th-SB-MVE

0 0.09 0.180.045 Miles

Figure 2Metra 47th Street YardMedium Voltage DistributionSoil Sample Location

Service Layer Credits: Source: Esri, DigitalGlobe, GeoEye, Earthstar Geographics, CNES/Airbus DS,USDA, USGS, AeroGRID, IGN, and the GIS User Community

51st Street

47th Street

90

94

LegendSample LocationProperty Boundary Line


Hazardous Materials Investigation / Metra 47th Street Diesel Shop A-1

Appendix A -

Asbestos Analytical Testing Results


Hazardous Materials Investigation / Metra 47th Street Diesel Shop B-1

Appendix B -

XRF Field Data Sheets



Appendix C -

Soil Analytical Testing Results


of 12


October 18, 2019Date:STAT Analysis Corporation

Project: 241133, Metra TO# 5, 47th Street ShopClient: CDM Smith Inc.

Work Order: 19090810Work Order Sample Summary

Lab Sample ID Client Sample ID Collection DateTag Number Date Received

Revision 1

19090810-001A 47th-SB-DSHOP 9/21/2019 9:10:00 AM 9/23/201919090810-002A 47th-SB-MVE 9/21/2019 10:00:00 AM 9/23/2019

Page 2 of 12


October 18, 2019Date:STAT Analysis Corporation

Project: 241133, Metra TO# 5, 47th Street ShopCLIENT: CDM Smith Inc.

Work Order: 19090810CASE NARRATIVE

Revision 1

The following parameters apply to sample 47th-SB-DSHOP (19090810-001):Reactivity with Water: Sample effervesced with no temperature change Reactivity with Base: Sample effervesced with no temperature change Reactivity with Acid: Sample effervesced with no temperature change Odor: SlightPhysical Description: Brown and black soil with rocks

The following parameters apply to sample 47th-SB-MVE (19090810-002):Reactivity with Water: NoneReactivity with Base: NoneReactivity with Acid: Sample effervesced with no temperature change Odor: SlightPhysical Description: Brown and black soil with rocks

The TCLP Herbicide and TCLP Pesticide hold time for the following samples was exceeded by 9 day:47th-SB-DSHOP (19090810-001)47th-SB-MVE (19090810-002)

Page 3 of 12


Project: 241133, Metra TO# 5, 47th Street Shop

Client Sample ID: 47th-SB-MVECollection Date: 9/21/2019 10:00:00 AM

Matrix: Soil

Analyses Result Qualifier Units Date AnalyzedRL

Client: CDM Smith Inc.Work Order: 19090810

DF

Lab ID: 19090810-002

Date Printed: October 18, 2019

STAT Analysis Corporation2242 West Harrison St., Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60612-3766Tel: (312) 733-0551 Fax: (312) 733-2386 [email protected]

Date Reported: October 18, 2019

Accreditations:IEPA ELAP 100445;ORELAP IL300001;AIHA-LAP, LLC 101160;NVLAP LabCode 101202-0

ANALYTICAL RESULTS

Revision 1

F-Listed Volatile Compounds SW8260B Analyst: ERPPrep Date: 9/24/20191,1,1-Trichloroethane 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1ND1,1,2-Trichloroethane 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1ND1,2-Dichlorobenzene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1ND1-Butanol 9/25/20190.34 mg/Kg 1ND2-Butanone 9/25/20190.063 mg/Kg 1ND2-Nitropropane 9/25/20190.042 mg/Kg 1ND4-Methyl-2-pentanone 9/25/20190.0084 mg/Kg 1NDAcetone 9/25/20190.063 mg/Kg 1NDBenzene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDCarbon disulfide 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDCarbon tetrachloride 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDChlorobenzene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDEthyl acetate 9/25/20190.042 mg/Kg 1NDEthyl Ether 9/25/20190.042 mg/Kg 1NDEthylbenzene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDFreon-113 * 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDIsobutyl Alcohol 9/25/20190.34 mg/Kg 1NDMethanol * 9/24/20190.84 mg/Kg 1NDMethylene chloride 9/25/20190.0084 mg/Kg 1NDTetrachloroethene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDToluene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDTrichloroethene 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDTrichlorofluoromethane 9/25/20190.0042 mg/Kg 1NDXylenes, Total 9/25/20190.013 mg/Kg 1ND

TCLP Volatile Organic Compounds by GC/MS SW1311/8260B (SW5030B) Analyst: MJKPrep Date: 9/24/2019Benzene 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10ND2-Butanone 9/25/20190.20 mg/L 10NDCarbon tetrachloride 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10NDChlorobenzene 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10NDChloroform 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10ND1,2-Dichloroethane 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10ND1,1-Dichloroethene 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10NDTetrachloroethene 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10NDTrichloroethene 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10NDVinyl chloride 9/25/20190.050 mg/L 10ND

F-Listed Semivolatile Compounds SW8270C (SW3550B) Analyst: DMPrep Date: 9/26/20192-Ethoxyethanol * 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1ND

Qualifiers: J - Analyte detected below quantitation limitsB - Analyte detected in the associated Method Blank

S - Spike Recovery outside accepted recovery limitsR - RPD outside accepted recovery limits

ND - Not Detected at the Reporting Limit

E - Value above quantitation range* - Non-accredited parameterHT - Sample received past holding time

H - Holding time exceeded

RL - Reporting / Quantitation Limit for the analysis

Page 7 of 12




Matrix: Soil



DF

Lab ID: 19090810-002





ANALYTICAL RESULTS

Revision 1

F-Listed Semivolatile Compounds SW8270C (SW3550B) Analyst: DMPrep Date: 9/26/20192-Methylphenol 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1ND3- & 4-Methylphenol 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1NDCyclohexanone * 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1NDNitrobenzene 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1NDPyridine 9/26/20190.32 mg/Kg 1ND

TCLP Semivolatile Organic Compounds SW1311/8270C (SW3510C) Analyst: DMPrep Date: 9/30/20191,4-Dichlorobenzene 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND2,4-Dinitrotoluene 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1NDHexachlorobenzene 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1NDHexachlorobutadiene 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1NDHexachloroethane 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1NDNitrobenzene 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND2-methylphenol 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND3- & 4-Methylphenol 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1NDPentachlorophenol 9/30/20190.050 mg/L 1NDPyridine 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND2,4,5-Trichlorophenol 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND2,4,6-Trichlorophenol 9/30/20190.010 mg/L 1ND

PCBs SW8082A (SW3550B) Analyst: GVCPrep Date: 9/26/2019Aroclor 1016 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1221 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1232 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1242 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1248 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1254 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1NDAroclor 1260 9/27/20190.079 mg/Kg 1ND

TCLP Pesticides SW1311/8081B (SW3510C) Analyst: GVCPrep Date: 10/15/2019Chlordane H 10/15/20190.0050 mg/L 1NDEndrin H 10/15/20190.00050 mg/L 1NDgamma-BHC H 10/15/20190.0025 mg/L 1NDHeptachlor H 10/15/20190.00025 mg/L 1NDHeptachlor epoxide H 10/15/20190.00025 mg/L 1NDMethoxychlor H 10/15/20190.00025 mg/L 1NDToxaphene H 10/15/20190.0050 mg/L 1ND

Herbicides, TCLP Leached SW1311/8321B (SW3510C) Analyst: MEPPrep Date: 10/15/20192,4,5-TP (Silvex) H 10/15/20190.0010 mg/L 1ND







Page 8 of 12




Matrix: Soil



DF

Lab ID: 19090810-002





ANALYTICAL RESULTS

Revision 1

Herbicides, TCLP Leached SW1311/8321B (SW3510C) Analyst: MEPPrep Date: 10/15/20192,4-D H 10/15/20190.0020 mg/L 1ND

TCLP Metals by ICP/MS SW1311/6020A (SW3005A) Analyst: MDTPrep Date: 9/27/2019Arsenic 9/27/20190.010 mg/L 5NDBarium 9/27/20190.050 mg/L 50.17Cadmium 9/27/20190.0050 mg/L 5NDChromium 9/27/20190.010 mg/L 5NDCopper 9/27/20190.10 mg/L 5NDLead 9/27/20190.0050 mg/L 5NDNickel 9/27/20190.020 mg/L 50.027Selenium 9/27/20190.010 mg/L 5NDSilver 9/27/20190.010 mg/L 5NDZinc 9/27/20190.050 mg/L 50.073

TCLP Mercury SW1311/7470A Analyst: LBPrep Date: 9/27/2019Mercury 9/27/20190.00020 mg/L 1ND

Cyanide, Total SW9012A Analyst: MDPrep Date: 9/27/2019Cyanide 9/27/20190.24 mg/Kg 1ND

Sulfide, Reactive SW7.3.4.2 Analyst: CABPrep Date: 9/25/2019Reactive Sulfide * 9/25/20199.3 mg/Kg 1ND

Phenolics SW9066 (SW9065) Analyst: MDPrep Date: 9/24/2019Phenolics, Total Recoverable 9/24/20190.25 mg/Kg 10.42

pH (1:10, 25 °C) SW9045C Analyst: FNPrep Date: 9/27/2019pH 9/27/2019pH Units 17.1

Flash Point (Open-Cup) SW1010(M) Analyst: RWPrep Date: 9/30/2019Flashpoint * 9/30/2019°F 1No flash up to 212

Ash Content E160.4 Analyst: FNPrep Date: 9/24/2019Ash Content * 9/25/20190.01 wt% 190.1

Solids, Total D2974 Analyst: FNPrep Date: 9/24/2019Total Solid * 9/25/20190.2 wt% 179.2

Paint Filter SW9095A Analyst: RWPrep Date: 9/25/2019Paint Filter 9/25/2019Pass/Fail 1Pass







Page 9 of 12


of 12



Appendix D -

Asbestos and Lead Inspector Licenses and

Certifications


This is to certify that

Roberto Rivera

GSG Consultants, Inc. on the 15th of April, 2016 successfully completed the factory training for

Protec Instrument Corporation XRF Lead Paint Inspection System Including, but not limited to, the topics of Radiation Safety, DOT Regulations, Haz-Mat Security Awareness and the Proper Use of the Instrument.

Verena Streber, President

Protec Instrument Corporation

38 Edge Hill Road, Waltham, MA 02451


Hazardous Materials Investigation / Metra 47th Street Diesel Shop E-1

Appendix E -

Laboratory Licenses and Accreditations


STATE OF ILLINOIS

ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORY ACCREDITATION

is hereby granted to

STAT ANALYSIS CORPORATION

2242 WEST HARRISON STREET

CHICAGO, IL 60612

Certificate No.: 004562

John South

Accreditation Officer

Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program

Expiration Date: 09/30/2019

Issued On: 03/26/2019

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCYNELAP - RECOGNIZED

ACCREDITATION NUMBER #100445

Celeste M. Crowley

Acting Manager

NELAP ACCREDITEDNELAP ACCREDITEDNELAP ACCREDITEDNELAP ACCREDITED

Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program

According to the Illinois Administrative Code, Title 35, Subtitle A, Chapter II, Part 186, ACCREDITATION OFLABORATORIES FOR DRINKING WATER, WASTEWATER AND HAZARDOUS WASTES ANALYSIS, the State ofIllinois formally recognizes that this laboratory is technically competent to perform the environmental analyses listed on the scope of accreditation detailed below.

The laboratory agrees to perform all analyses listed on this scope of accreditation according to the Part 186 requirements and acknowledges that continued accreditation is dependent on successful ongoing compliance with the applicable requirements of Part 186. Please contact the Illinois EPA Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program (IL ELAP) to verify the laboratory's scope of accreditation and accreditation status. Accreditation by the State of Illinois is not an endorsement or a guarantee of validity of the data generated by the laboratory.

Page 1 of 14


AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs, LLC 3141 Fairview Park Drive, Suite 777, Falls Church, VA 22042 USA

main +1 703-846-0736 fax +1 703-207-8558 Twitter: @AIHA_LAP_LLC

R4 01/24/2018

Page 1 of 1

April 30, 2018

Laboratory ID: 101160

Sean Hayes

STAT Analysis Corporation

2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200

Chicago, IL 60612-3501

Dear Mr. Hayes:

Congratulations! The AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs (AIHA-LAP), LLC’s Analytical Accreditation

Board (AAB) has approved STAT Analysis Corporation as an accredited Industrial Hygiene, Environmental Lead

and Environmental Microbiology laboratory.

Accreditation documentation includes the IHLAP, ELLAP and EMLAP accreditation certificate, scope of

accreditation document and a copy of the current AIHA-LAP, LLC license agreement (if your completed agreement

is not on file at AIHA-LAP, LLC). The accreditation symbol has been designed for use by all AIHA-LAP, LLC

accredited laboratories. If your laboratory chooses to use the symbol in its advertising the laboratory’s accreditation,

you must complete and return the AIHA-LAP, LLC license agreement to a Laboratory Accreditation Specialist.

Once submitted, an electronic copy of the accreditation symbol will be sent to you.

Laboratory accreditation shall be maintained by continued compliance with IHLAP, ELLAP and EMLAP

requirements (see Policy Modules 2B, 2C, 2D, and 6), which includes proficient participation in AIHA-LAP, LLC

approved proficiency testing, demonstration of competency, or round robin program as indicated on the AIHA-LAP

“Approved PT and Round Robin” webpage, its associated Scope/PT table, and as required in Policy Module 6, for

all Fields of Testing (FoTs) for which the laboratory is accredited. An accredited laboratory that wishes to expand

into a new FoT must submit an updated accreditation application to AIHA-LAP, LLC for review by the AAB.

Any changes in ownership, laboratory location, personnel, FoTs/Methods, or significant procedural changes shall be

reported to AIHA-LAP, LLC in writing within twenty (20) business days of the change.

The accreditation certificate is the property of AIHA-LAP, LLC and must be returned to us should your laboratory

withdraw or be removed from the IHLAP, ELLAP and EMLAP.

Again, congratulations. If you have any questions, please contact Lauren Schnack, Laboratory Accreditation

Specialist, at (703) 846-0716.

Sincerely,

Cheryl O. Morton

Managing Director


AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs, LLC 3141 Fairview Park Drive, Suite 777, Falls Church, VA 22042 USA

main +1 703-846-0736 fax +1 703-207-8558 Twitter: @AIHA_LAP_LLC

R1 04/26/2013

Page 1 of 1

September 30, 2019

Laboratory ID: 101160

Sean Hayes

STAT Analysis Corporation

2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200

Chicago, IL 60612-3501

Dear Mr. Hayes:

Congratulations! The AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs (AIHA-LAP), LLC’s Analytical Accreditation

Board (AAB) has approved the request of STAT Analysis Corporation to add the following Field of Testing (FoT)

within the IHLAP program: Infrared.

Attached, please find an updated IHLAP scope page including the new FoTs. Laboratory accreditation shall be

maintained by continued compliance with IHLAP requirements (see Policy Modules 2B and 6), which includes

proficient participation in AIHA-LAP, LLC approved proficiency testing, demonstration of competency, or round

robin program as indicated on the AIHA-LAP “Approved PT and Round Robin” webpage, its associated PT-Scope

table, and as required in Policy Module 6, for all Fields of Testing (FoTs) for which the laboratory is accredited. An

accredited laboratory that wishes to expand into a new FoT must submit an updated accreditation application to

AIHA-LAP, LLC for review by the AAB.

Any changes in ownership, laboratory location, personnel, FoTs, or significant procedural changes shall be reported

to AIHA-LAP, LLC in writing within twenty (20) business days of the change.

The accreditation certificate and scope page is the property of AIHA-LAP, LLC and must be returned to AIHA-

LAP, LLC should the laboratory withdraw or be removed from the IHLAP.

Again, congratulations. If you have any questions, please contact Drake McGregor, Laboratory Accreditation

Specialist, at (703) 846-0739.

Sincerely,

Cheryl O. Morton

Managing Director

AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs, LLC



acknowledges that

STAT Analysis Corporation 2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60612-3501

Laboratory ID: 101160 along with all premises from which key activities are performed, as listed above, has fulfilled the requirements of the AIHA Laboratory Accreditation

Programs (AIHA-LAP), LLC accreditation to the ISO/IEC 17025:2005 international standard, General Requirements for the Competence of Testing and

Calibration Laboratories in the following:

LABORATORY ACCREDITATION PROGRAMS

INDUSTRIAL HYGIENE Accreditation Expires: May 01, 2020

ENVIRONMENTAL LEAD Accreditation Expires: May 01, 2020

ENVIRONMENTAL MICROBIOLOGY Accreditation Expires: May 01, 2020

FOOD Accreditation Expires:

UNIQUE SCOPES Accreditation Expires:

Specific Field(s) of Testing (FoT)/Method(s) within each Accreditation Program for which the above named laboratory maintains accreditation is

outlined on the attached Scope of Accreditation. Continued accreditation is contingent upon successful on-going compliance with ISO/IEC 17025:2005

and AIHA-LAP, LLC requirements. This certificate is not valid without the attached Scope of Accreditation. Please review the AIHA-LAP, LLC

website (www.aihaaccreditedlabs.org) for the most current Scope.

Elizabeth Bair

Chairperson, Analytical Accreditation Board

Cheryl O. Morton

Managing Director, AIHA Laboratory Accreditation Programs, LLC

Revision 16: 03/21/2018 Date Issued: 04/30/2018


Effective: 04/10/2015

101160_Scope_IHLAP_2019_09_30

Page 1 of 1


SCOPE OF ACCREDITATION

STAT Analysis Corporation Laboratory ID: 101160

2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60612-3501 Issue Date: 09/30/2019

The laboratory is approved for those specific field(s) of testing/methods listed in the table below. Clients are urged to verify

the laboratory’s current accreditation status for the particular field(s) of testing/Methods, since these can change due to

proficiency status, suspension and/or withdrawal of accreditation.

Industrial Hygiene Laboratory Accreditation Program (IHLAP)

Initial Accreditation Date: 08/01/1992

A complete listing of currently accredited Industrial Hygiene laboratories is available on the AIHA-LAP, LLC website at:

http://www.aihaaccreditedlabs.org

IHLAP Scope

Category

Field of Testing (FoT)

(FoTs cover all

relevant IH matrices)

Technology

sub-type/

Detector

Published Reference

Method/Title of In-

house Method

Method Description

or Analyte (for internal methods

only)

Chromatography Core Gas Chromatography

GC/FID

NIOSH 1400

NIOSH 1500

NIOSH 1501

NIOSH 2000

SOP 4700 Organic Vapors

GC/ECD NIOSH 5503

GC/MS NIOSH 5515 Modified

Spectrometry Core

Atomic Absorption CVAA NIOSH 6009

Inductively-Coupled

Plasma

ICP/MS NIOSH 7300

NIOSH 7303

Infrared NIOSH 7602

Asbestos/Fiber

Microscopy Core

Phase Contrast

Microscopy (PCM) NIOSH 7400


Effective: 10/14/2016 Scope_ELLAP_R7 Page 1 of 1



STAT Analysis Corporation Laboratory ID: 101160 2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60612-3501 Issue Date: 04/30/2018 The laboratory is approved for those specific field(s) of testing/methods listed in the table below. Clients are urged to verify the laboratory’s current accreditation status for the particular field(s) of testing/Methods, since these can change due to proficiency status, suspension and/or withdrawal of accreditation. The EPA recognizes the AIHA-LAP, LLC ELLAP program as meeting the requirements of the National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP) established under Title X of the Residential Lead-Based Paint Hazard Reduction Act of 1992 and includes paint, soil and dust wipe analysis. Air and composited wipes analyses are not included as part of the NLLAP.

Environmental Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program (ELLAP)


A complete listing of currently accredited Environmental Lead laboratories is available on the AIHA-LAP, LLC website at: http://www.aihaaccreditedlabs.org

Field of Testing (FoT) Technology sub-type/

Detector Method Method Description

(for internal methods only)

Paint

EPA SW-846 3050BEPA SW-846 6020AEPA SW-846 7000B

NIOSH 7082

Soil EPA SW-846 3050BEPA SW-846 6020AEPA SW-846 7000B

Settled Dust by Wipe

EPA SW-846 3050BEPA SW-846 6020AEPA SW-846 7000B

NIOSH 7082

Airborne Dust NIOSH 7082NIOSH 7300NIOSH 7303


Effective: 03/12/2013 101160_Scope_EMLAP_2018_04_30 Page 1 of 1



STAT Analysis Corporation Laboratory ID: 101160 2242 West Harrison St. Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60612-3501 Issue Date: 04/30/2018 The laboratory is approved for those specific field(s) of testing/methods listed in the table below. Clients are urged to verify the laboratory’s current accreditation status for the particular field(s) of testing/Methods, since these can change due to proficiency status, suspension and/or withdrawal of accreditation.

Environmental Microbiology Laboratory Accreditation Program (EMLAP)


EMLAP Category Field of Testing

(FoT) Method Method Description

(for internal methods only)

Fungal

Air - Culturable SOP 6110

In-House: Analysis of Culturable Air Samples for Fungi

SOP 6120 In-House: Analysis of Culturable Air

Samples for Fungi

Bulk - Culturable SOP 6220 In-House: Analysis of Culturable

Microbiological Swab and Bulk Samples

Surface - Culturable SOP 6220 In-House: Analysis of Culturable

Microbiological Swab and Bulk Samples

Air - Direct Examination

SOP 6110 In-House: Analysis of Spore Trap

Bulk - Direct Examination

SOP 6210 In-House: Bulk Analysis

Surface - Direct Examination

SOP 6210 In-House: Bulk Analysis

A complete listing of currently accredited Environmental Microbiology laboratories is available on the AIHA-LAP, LLC website at: http://www.aihaaccreditedlabs.org


Hazardous Materials Investigation / Metra 47th Street Diesel Shop E-1

Appendix F-

Photographic Documentation


PHOTOGRAPHIC LOG

Site Location: Metra – 47th Street Yard Medium Voltage Distribution 147 W. 47th Street Chicago, Illinois

Project No.

20493-241133

Photo No.

1 Date: October 11, 2019

Direction: East

Description: View of the switchgear cabinets for the medium voltage distribution system.

Photo No. 2

Date: January 29, 2019

Direction: East

Description: View of the switchgear cabinet for the medium voltage distribution system.

Photo No.

3

Date: October 11, 2019

Direction: Interior

Description: View of the bottom portion of a switchgear cabinet.


PHOTOGRAPHIC LOG

Site Location: Metra – 47th Street Yard Medium Voltage Distribution 147 W. 47th Street Chicago, Illinois

Project No.

20493-241133

Photo No.

4 Date: October 11, 2019

Direction: Southeast

Description: View of the electric arc shield (white) within the switchgear cabinet. The material tested negative for asbestos.

Photo No.

5


Direction: East

Description: View of the electric arc shield (white) within the switchgear cabinet. The material tested negative for asbestos.

Photo No.

6


Direction: Ceiling

Description: View of the electric arc shield (red) within the switchgear cabinet. The material tested negative for asbestos.


APP APP DESCRIPTIONBYDATEREVDESCRIPTIONBYDATEREV

SUB CONSULTANT

SEAL/ SIGNATURE

PRIMARY CONSULTANT PRIMARY CONSULTANT

CHECKED:

DRAWN:

DATE:

DESIGNED:

METRA P.M.547 W. JACKSON BOULEVARD

CHICAGO, ILLINOIS 60661

ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT

CAD FILE NUMBER:LOCATION NAME:

TITLE:

PROJECT NO.

MILE POST NO.

SCALE: DISTRICT:

SHEET NO.

4.8

RID

ILLINOIS FIRM REGISTRATION NO. 184-001310312-223-0920

CHICAGO, IL 60606200 W. ADAMS ST., SUITE 1600 HE4894/HN4994

ROCK ISLAND DISTRICT 47TH STREET YARD

DELTA ENGINEERING GROUP,CONSULTING ENGINEERS, CONSTRUCTION MANAGERS, SURVEYORS

T 312.377.7700, F 312.427 6145

CHICAGO, IL 60604

111 W JACKSON BLVD, SUITE 910

LLC1 OF 4

M.A

L.M

M.A

09-04-2018

C301GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES

PROPOSED ELECTRICAL CONDUIT TRENCHING

1 M.A11-26-19 ISSUED FOR BID

S

TATE OF ILLINO

IS

LIC

ENS

ED

PROFESSIONAL

EN

GIN

EE

RARIF

MUHAMMAD

062-056451

ILLINOIS

LICENSE EXPIRES: 11-30-2021

SUB CONSULTANT

N.S/L.M

ASPHALT AREAS (BETWEEN RAIL TRACKS) BY METRA.

STORAGE AND REMOVAL OF ASPHALT AND OTHER EXCAVATED MATERIALS GENERATED FROM THE REMOVAL OF EXISTING

V. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE DUMPSTERS FOR THE PROPER ON SITE TEMPORARY

U. REFER TO DRAWING C304 FOR PROPOSED TYPICAL TRENCH AND BACKFILL MATERIALS.

III. ALL TEST PERFORMED AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.

II. POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL: ONE PER TWO HUNDRED (1 PER 200) FEET.

I. TRENCH SAND BEDDING: ONE PER TWO HUNDRED (1 PER 200) FEET.

TESTS WILL BE PERFORMED:

T. IN-PLACE MOISTURE DENSITY TESTS WILL BE PERFORMED TO ENSURE TRENCH BACKFILL COMPLIES WITH SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS. THE FOLLOWING MINIMUM

S. POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL MATERIAL TO BE CLASS D WITH GRADATION CA-6 OR CA-10.

R. POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL SHALL BE DONE ACCORDING TO SECTIONS 208 AND 1004.05 OF IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND AS SHOWN IN THESE DRAWINGS.

PROCTOR DENSITY AS PER ASTM D698 UP TO THE TOP OF THE TRENCH TO MATCH EXISTING GROUND GRADE.

Q. “POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL” CA-7 SHALL BE PLACED IN SIX INCHES LIFT (7 LIFTS FOR 3.5 FEET OF BACKFILL) AND COMPACTED TO 95% OF MAXIMUM

P. FOR SAND BACKFILL, COMPLY WITH SECTION 1003.04 OF IDOT'S SPECIFICATION.

BACKFILL TO BE DONE IN 6 INCHES LIFT ALL ACROSS TRENCH WIDTH AND COMPACTED TO SAID DENSITY.

IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM D4253. CARE SHALL BE EXERCISED TO ENSURE SUFFICIENT TAMPING UNDER THE CONDUIT TO ACHIEVE UNIFORM SUPPORT. SAND

O. SAND BEDDING SHALL BE COMPACTED BY VIBRATIONS, TAMPERING OR COMBINATIONS THEREOF TO SEVENTY FIVE PERCENT (75%) RELATIVE DENSITY

N. AFTER THE CONDUIT IS ADJUSTED FOR LINE AND GRADE , THE BEDDING MATERIAL SHALL BE CAREFULLY PLACED AND TAMPED UNDER THE CONDUIT.

M. ALL CONDUITS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN SUCH A MANNER AS TO ENSURE FULL SUPPORT OF THE CONDUIT OVER ITS ENTIRE LENGTH.

ON THE TRENCH BOTTOM FOR SUPPORT UNDER THE CONDUIT.

AFTER COMPLETION OF THE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND PROPER PREPERATION OF THE FOUNDATION, SIX (6) INCHES OF BEDDING MATERIAL SHALL BE PLACEDL.

TWO (2) FEET IN DEPTH SHALL BE COMPACTED AS PER SPECIFICATION SHOWN HERE AND REFERENCED.

TRENCHES WITH VERTICAL (6” BETWEEN BOTTOM OF TRENCH AND BOTTOM OF CONDUIT) AND HORIZONTAL SPACERS, “APPROVED SAND BACKFILL MATERIAL”

K. CONTRACTOR TO USE INDUSTRIAL CONDUIT SPACERS AND CHAIRS AND SHALL GET THEM PRE-APPROVED FROM METRA. ONCE THE CONDUITS ARE LAID OUT IN

J. MOVEMENT OF CONTRACTORS OR SUPPLIERS VEHICLES SHALL BE DONE ONLY FROM METRA’S AUTHORIZED CROSSING OVER RAILS.

I. NO EXCAVATED MATERIAL TO BE PLACED AT THE BANKS OF TRENCHES.

TO REMAIN ON SITE FOR MORE THAN 24 HOURS.

H. CONTRACTOR SHALL DEVELOP A MATERIAL HAULING AND STOCKPILING PROGRAM AND SUBMIT IT TO METRA FOR APPROVAL. NO STOCKPILED EXCAVATED MATERIAL

G. METRA TO PROVIDE CONTRACTOR SPACE FOR STOCKPILING EXCAVATED MATERIAL.

IDENTIFIED IN THE REFERENCE DOCUMENT SECTION OF THE SPECIFICATIONS.

F. EXCAVATED MATERIAL SHALL BE HAULED FROM THE SITE AND DISPOSED OFF BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. REFER TO ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

AND DENSIFICATION OF BEDDING MATERIAL.

E. THE TRENCH SHALL BE EXCAVATED TO ALLOW FOR A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF SIX (6) INCHES ON EACH SIDE OF PROPOSED CONDUIT FOR PROPER PLACEMENT

ANGULAR OR SHARP STONES OR STONES GREATER THAN 1” IN SIZE.

D. EXCAVATE TRENCHES AS SHOWN IN DRAWINGS C303 AND C304 WITH THE BASE OF THE TRENCH GRADED FLAT AND CLEAR OF ANY ORGANIC MATERIAL, OR

ACCEPTABLE SOILS AS BACKFILL, AND HENCE NO EXCAVATED MATERIAL FROM THE SITE SHALL BE USED FOR BACKFILLING OF PROPOSED TRENCHES.

C. THE GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT FOR THE PROJECT LOCATION SHOWS PRESENCE OF “CINDERS” IN THE SUBGRADE SOIL. “CINDERS” ARE NOT

B. EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES SHALL CONFORM TO THE LAYOUT AND CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING SHOWN IN THIS SECTION OF DRAWING NOS. C302 AND C303.

DOCUMENT BY OSHA AND IDOT'S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROADS AND BRIDGE DESIGN.

A. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PERFORM EXCAVATION ACCORDING TO THE AFOREMENTIONED REFERENCED DOCUMENTS IN PARTICULAR “TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION SAFETY"

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL:11.

D. MAINTAIN THE TRENCH FREE FROM WATER AT ALL TIMES.

C. DIVERT SURFACE RUNOFF AND USE SUMPS/DEWATERING, GRAVEL BLANKETS, WELL POINTS, DRAIN LINES, OR OTHER MEANS NECESSARY TO ACCOMPLISH THE ABOVE.

CONDUITS, AND BACKFILLING.

B. REMOVE WATER ENCOUNTERED IN TRENCHES TO PROVIDE A FIRM SUBGRADE NECESSARY INSTALLATION/LAYOUT OF PROPOSED ELECTRICAL

A. PROTECT TRENCHES FROM SURFACE WATER RUNOFF DURING CONSTRUCTION.

DRAINAGE AND GROUNDWATER:10.

E. REMOVE BRACING AND/OR SHEETING AS TRENCH BACKFILL PROGRESSES.

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION REPORT CONDUCTED FOR THE SITE.

PERFORMED AND STAMPED BY A STRUCTURAL ENGINEER REGISTERED IN THE STATE OF ILLINOIS. IN THIS REGARD THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE PROVIDED

TRENCHES AS PER METRA’S “TEMPORARY SHORING GUIDELINES”AND OTHER REFERENCES MENTIONED IN THESE GUIDELINES. CALCULATIONS TO BE

D. CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT STRUCTURAL CALCULATION SUBMITTAL PACKAGE FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL TO METRA WITH REGARD TO SHORING OF

SERVICE UTILITIES.

C. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR UNDERPINNING ADJACENT STRUCTURES WHICH MAY BE DAMAGED BY EXCAVATION WORK, INCLUDING ANY

B. THE LATEST REQUIREMENTS OF OSHA SHALL BE COMPLIED WITH AT ALL TIMES INCLUDING TRENCHING AND CONFINED SPACE ENTRY REQUIREMENTS.

II. ANY WIDENING OR SLOUGHING OF THE TRENCH THAT CAN BE DETRIMENTAL TO HUMAN SAFETY OR EXISTING UTILITIES.

THE CONTRACTOR TO SHOW EXTREME COGNIZANCE IN THIS REGARD WHEN WORKING ADJACENT TO LIVE TRACKS.

I. UNDERMINING OR SLIPPAGE OF ANY EXISTING MATERIAL FROM TRENCH BANK SHORES AND FROM UNDER THE EXISTING ADJACENT RAIL TRACKS;

A. PROTECT EXCAVATIONS BY SHORING, BRACING, AND IF REQUIRED SHEET PILLING OR OTHER METHODS REQUIRED TO PREVENT THE FOLLOWING:

SHEETING AND SHORING:9.

F. MANDREL PULLS SHALL BE WITNESSED BY THE METRA CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

RETEST TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE METRA CONSTRUCTION MANAGER.

E. IF TESTING REVEALS OBSTRUCTIONS OR OUT-OF-ROUND CONDITIONS, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE AFFECTED SECTION(S) OF CONDUIT AND

PARTICLES. THE DIAMETER OF THE BRUSH SHALL BE THE SAME AS, OR SLIGHTLY LARGER THAN, THE DIAMETER OF THE CONDUIT.

INSIDE DIAMETER OF THE CONDUIT. A BRUSH WITH STIFF BRISTLES SHALL THEN BE PULLED THROUGH EACH CONDUIT TO REMOVE THE LOOSENED

D. THE MANDREL SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 300 MM (12 INCHES) LONG, AND SHALL HAVE A DIAMETER NOT LESS THAN 13 MM (0.5 INCH) LESS THAN THE

PARTICLES OF EARTH, SAND, OR FOREIGN MATERIAL LEFT IN THE CONDUIT, AND TO TEST FOR OUT-OF-ROUND CONDITIONS.

C. UPON COMPLETION OF THE CONDUIT INSTALLATION, A STANDARD FLEXIBLE MANDREL SHALL BE PULLED THROUGH EACH CONDUIT TO LOOSEN

B. DO NOT KINK THE CONDUITS. COMPACTION MUST NOT DEFORM THE CONDUITS.

A. KEEP CONDUITS CLEAN OF EARTH, SAND, OR GRAVEL, AND SEAL WITH TAPERED PLUGS UPON COMPLETION OF EACH PORTION OF THE WORK.

CONDUIT INSTALLATION:8.

CONDITIONS WITH POSITIVE SURFACE DRAINAGE BY REMOVING ANY LOW SPOTS ALONG AND TOP OF BACKFILLED TRENCHES AND ANY DISTURBED AREA AROUND IT.

CONTRACTOR SHALL BACKFILL AND COMPACT TRENCHES (75% & 95% SAND BACKFILL & POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL RESPECTIVELY) GRADED TO PRE-EXISTING7.

C. EXISTING FENCE

B. ASPHALT WALKWAYS UP TO NATURAL GROUND GRADE

A. EXISTING RAIL SECTION WITH ITS ACCESSORIES INCLUDING BALLAST, SUB-BALLAST UP TO EXISTING NATURAL GRADE

BACKFILLING:

METRA TO REMOVE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE THE CONTRACTOR STARTS THE WORK AND REPLACE/ RECONSTRUCT THEM AFTER CONTRACTOR COMPLETES TRENCH6.

THIS ALSO INCLUDES DAMAGE TO ANY PROPOSED ELECTRICAL CONDUITS. CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE COMPENSATED FOR ANY SUCH REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT.

OF THE CONTRACTOR TO REPAIR AND OR REINSTALL ANY EXISTING UTILITIES DAMAGED DURING CONSTRUCTION TO METRA’S SATISFACTION.

WORK WITH EXTREME CARE TO DIG TRENCHES NEATLY AND UNIFORMLY SUCH THAT NO DAMAGE IS DONE TO ANY EXISTING UTILITIES. IT WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY5.

CONFIRMED BY PERTINENT UTILITY COMPANIES.

48 HOURS AHEAD OF ANY TRENCHING OR EXCAVATION WORK. THE CONTRACTOR TO PROCEED WITH EXCAVATION ONLY WHEN THE SUE MARKED EXISTING UTILITIES ARE

OF EXISTING UTILITIES ON SITE IN AREAS WHERE EXCAVATION WILL BE PERFORMED. AFTER PERFORMING SUE THE CONTRACTOR SHOULD CALL "DIGGER" AT 811 AT LEAST

CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM A "SUBSURFACE UTILITY ENGINEERING" (SUE) LEVEL A INVESTIGATION TO DETERMINE THE TYPE, AND LOCATION (HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL)4.

E. ASTM STANDARDS AS THEY RELATE TO “A” THROUGH “C” FOR ABOVE ITEMS

D. IDOT’S STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROADS AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION

C. AREMA MANUAL FOR RAILWAY ENGINEERING

B. METRA SPECIFICATIONS THROUGH VARIOUS DOCUMENTS

A. PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS

AND ALL OTHER MANUALS, STANDARDS, AND GUIDELINES. FOLLOW SPECIFICATIONS IN THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE OF PREFERENCE:

REGARD TO TRENCH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY. COMPLY WITH METRA’S DOCUMENT OF “TEMPORARY SHORING GUIDELINES” INCLUDED IN THE SPECIFICATIONS

DETAILS SHOWN IN THIS SECTION OF DRAWINGS PERTAIN TO EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, SHORING, BACKFILLING, COMPACTING, MATERIAL STORAGE, ETC., WITH3.

FOR THIS CONTRACT. IN THIS REGARD, OSHA’S “TRENCHING AND EXCAVATION SAFETY” SHALL BE COMPLIED WITH AT A MINIMUM.

PROJECT SITE MUST HAVE PERTINENT CERTIFICATION TO WORK AROUND LIVE RAIL TRACKS, UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED BY METRA’S PROJECT MANAGER

COMPLY WITH ALL METRA, STATE AND OSHA SAFETY REGULATIONS. ALL CONTRACTOR’S, SUBCONTRACTOR’S AND SUPPLIER’S REPRESENTATIVES ENTERING THE2.

FOR THIS CONTRACT.

DRAWINGS C301 THROUGH C304 SPECIFY DETAILS RELATED TO CONSTRUCTION OF TRENCHES FOR INSTALLATION OF PROPOSED ELECTRICAL CONDUITS DESIGNED1.

2 M.A7-10-20 N.S ISSUED FOR BID RFI

2

2

ADDENDUM NO. 1 - IFB 56358 - EXHIBIT S


SUB CONSULTANT

SEAL/ SIGNATURE


CHECKED:

DRAWN:

DATE:

DESIGNED:





TITLE:

PROJECT NO.

MILE POST NO.

SCALE: DISTRICT:

SHEET NO.

4.8

RID

SRK




1 11-26-19 BMH ISSUED FOR BID


T 312.377.7700, F 312.427 6145

CHICAGO, IL 60604


LLC

BILL OF MATERIAL

ITEM

NO.QNTY DESCRIPTION

11

2

1/2" WEATHER PROOF CONDUIT HUB3 1

1/2" GALVANIZED NIPPLE4 1

5

6

7

8

FULL VOLTAGE PUSH-TO-TEST INDICATING LIGHT BASE FOR LED BULBS9 2

FULL VOLTAGE INDICATING LIGHT BASE FOR LED BULBS10 3

INDICATING LIGHT LENS RED11 1

INDICATING LIGHT LENS GREEN12 1

INDICATING LIGHT LENS AMBER13 1

INDICATING LIGHT LENS BLUE PUSH-TO-TEST14 1

INDICATING LIGHT LENS WHITE PUSH-TO-TEST15 1

120 VOLT LED BULB WITH BALLAST RESISTOR RED16 1

120 VOLT LED BULB WITH BALLAST RESISTOR GREEN17 1

120 VOLT LED BULB WITH BALLAST RESISTOR ORANGE18 1

120 VOLT LED BULB WITH BALLAST RESISTOR BLUE19 1

120 VOLT LED BULB WITH BALLAST RESISTOR WHITE20 1

120 VOLT FLASHER MODULE21 1

RED PUSHBUTTON OPERATOR22 1

GREEN PUSHBUTTON OPERATOR23 1

2 POSITION KEY OPERATED SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR KEY24 1

2 POSITION SELECTOR SWITCH OPERATOR BLACK LEVER HANDLE25 2

2 POSITION PUSH-PULL EMERGENCY STOP PUSHBUTTON26 1

CONTACT BLOCK 1 NORMALLY OPEN27 4

CONTACT BLOCK 1 NORMALLY CLOSED28 2

PULL ON / PUSH OFF LEGEND PLATE29 1

BLANK LEGEND PLATE 2-1/4" SQUARE WHITE BLACK LETTERS ENGRAVED AS SHOWN30 10

DOOR SWITCH 20 AMP LARGE PLUNGER31 1

120 VOLT 200 WATT ENCLOSURE HEATER WITH FAN AND THERMOSTAT32 1

3 PHASE UNDER CURRENT SENSING RELAY33 1

HEAVY DUTY TERMINAL BLOCK FOR RING LUGS 6 CIRCUIT SHORTING34 1

HEAVY DUTY TERMINAL BLOCK FOR RING LUGS 8 CIRCUIT35 1

HEAVY DUTY TERMINAL BLOCK FOR RING LUGS 12 CIRCUIT36 2

350MCM 2 HOLE LUG POWER CONDUCTORS FROM TCS-137 6

AWG #4/0 2 HOLE LUG POWER CONDUCTORS DROP TABLE TRACK TCS-138 3

AWG #1/0 2 HOLE LUG GROUND CONDUCTORS FROM TCS-139 2

AWG #2 2 HOLE LUG GROUND CONDUCTOR DROP TABLE TRACK TCS-140 1

AWG #4/0 2 HOLE LUG FLEX CABLE FROM RECEPTACLE CABLES41 6

AWG #10 NON-INSULATED RING LUG GROUND CABLE FROM RECEPTACLE CABLES42 2

CURRENT TRANSFORMER 600 TO 5 AMP RATIO43 3

44

45 1

46 1

42"HIGH X 20"WIDE X 10"DEEP

REMOVABLE IN LEFT HAND POSITION ONLY

480 VOLT RECEPTACLE JUMPER ASSEMBLY 48 INCH LONG LEADS

30AMP 74 VOLT DC 27 POINT RECEPTACLE ASSEMBLY FOR

51 1

49

50

48

2

1

2

47 1

CAR CONTROL TESTING WITH 48" LEADS AND LOCKING COVER

OFF ON

LOOP CIRCUIT

BYPASS AVAILABLE

LOOP CIRCUIT

W

PL

PL

A

GROUND FAULT

ALARMALARM

POWER LOSS

POWER ON

R

PL

POWER ON

PL

G

POWER OFFPOWER OFF

TEST POWER

TRAIN CONTROLPOWER LOSS

ALARM

DISABLE ENABLE

B

PL

R

PB

PB

G

OFF ON

PULL

ON

PUSH

OFF

EM

E

G

R

S

T O

P

CONTROL DEVICES

24 27

30

9 14

19 30

22 28

30

23 27

30

25 27

30

25 27

30

30

10 12

17

30

10 11

16

30

10 13

18 21

9 15

20 30

26 28

29

2. 15 FT TRAIN CONNECTOR CABLE/PLUGS SHIPPED LOOSE.

1. DRAWING IS TYPICAL FOR 6 WAYSIDE POWER BOXES.

NOTES:

1'-8"5'-0"

WAYSIDE POWER BOX DETAIL

CONCRETE PAD

20"

16

"

9" 5 1/2 "5 1/2 "

CONTROL BOX DETAIL

HINGED COVER SEE

ALL DEVICES UNDER

HASP

48

COVER ON CONTROL BOXHINGED, PADLOCKABLE HASP ALL STAINLESS STEEL

42"

20" 20"

10

"

5 1/2 "4 1/2 "

WITH IN-USE COVER

RECEPTACLE

GROUND FAULT

47 45

48

RECEPTACLES

TRAIN LINE

MA

X

STEEL HINGE

STAINLESS

CONTINUOUS

ISOMETRIC VIEW

SIDE VIEW FRONT VIEW BACK VIEW

PLAN VIEW

11

"& FOUNDATION

TOP OF TIE

FABRIC 6x6-W1.4xW1.4

WELDED WIRE

SEE NOTE 2

TEST RECEPTACLE

74 VOLT DC 30AMP

8" CONCRETE PAD

GRANULAR BACKFILL

8" POROUS

IN SLAB FOR CONDUIT

PROVIDE SLEEVES

8"

8"

PAD MOUNTED NEMA 4X 12 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL ENCLOSURE

POWER BOX

WAYSIDE

SUBSTATION

DUCTS TO UNIT

C TRACKSL

20AMP DUPLEX GROUND FAULT RECEPTACLE IVORY, WEATHER RESISTANT

IN USE SERVICE COVER FOR GROUND FAULT RECEPTACLE, ALUMINUM, POWER COATED

6"

47

"

25"

480V

480V

480V 480V

HASP

HASP2

7/8

"

4" 2" 4"

480 VOLT PLUG AND RECEPTACLE JUMPER ASSEMBLY 15 FT LONG, MPRA-2SR-0180

480 VOLT DOUBLE ENDED JUMPER PLUG ASSEMBLY 15 FT LONG, MPA-2SR-0180

480 VOLT CABLE RECEPTACLE HOUSING, MRA-BHAW-1-0048

MAY 12, 2017

NO SCALE

R. DELAROSA

S. KOSS

B. HAAS

M. SMITHWAYSIDE POWER BOXES LAYOUT AND DETAILS

E501

RID4_8-E501_IFB-RFI.dgn

2

SRK2 07-10-20 BMH ISSUED FOR BID-RFI


24" R MIN.24

" M

IN.

STEEL COUPLING

GALVANIZED RIGID

PVC COATED

STEEL CONDUIT

GALVANIZED RIGID

PVC COATED

PVC TO PVC COATED RIGID

STEEL CONDUIT ADAPTER

STEEL CONDUIT

GALVANIZED RIGID

PVC COATED

EQUAL OR POLYWATER FST

WITH DUCT SEALANT

SEAL CONDUIT INTERIOR

GROUND CABLE

#4/0 COPPER

STEEL GROUND ROD

10'x3/4" DIA. COPPER CLAD

COPPER GROUND CABLE

COPPER GROUND CABLE

EXOTHERMIC WELD

EXOTHERMIC WELD

COPPER GROUND CABLE

2

-

CABLE

COPPER GROUND

ROD

CLAD STEEL GROUND

10'x3/4" DIA. COPPER

12"

GROUND LEVEL

30"

18"EXOTHERMIC WELD

-

1GENERAL GROUNDING DETAIL

NOT TO SCALE-

2GROUNDING ROD DETAIL

NOT TO SCALE-

3EXOTHERMIC WELDS DETAIL

NOT TO SCALE -

4

NOT TO SCALE

PREVENT CORROSION

BITUMASTIC COAT TO

4"

CONDUIT RISER DETAIL

TYPICAL STUBBED

TOP OF CONCRETE

PAD OR GRADE

DUCT BANK

6"

SLEEVE

COMM SPLIT

4" 4"

SPARE

4"

SPARE

4" 4"

4" 4"

3"

3"

SPARE

4" 4"

4" 4"

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

5

E101

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

8

E107

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

9

E107

4" 4"

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

10

E106

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

7

E107

E106

4" 4"

NOT TO SCALE

SCH 40 PVC

SECTION

6

E106

E104

E102

E101

ELECTRICAL

NOT TO SCALE

DUCT BANK BACKFILL DETAIL A

-

DUCT BANK

6"

POROUS GRANULAR BACKFILL

WARNING TAPE

6" WIDE NON-METALLIC


SUB CONSULTANT

SEAL/ SIGNATURE


CHECKED:

DRAWN:

DATE:

DESIGNED:





TITLE:

PROJECT NO.

MILE POST NO.

SCALE: DISTRICT:

SHEET NO.

4.8

RID

SRK




1 11-26-19 BMH ISSUED FOR BID


T 312.377.7700, F 312.427 6145

CHICAGO, IL 60604


LLC

MAY 26, 2017

NO SCALE

R. DELAROSA

S. KOSS

B. HAAS

M. SMITHE502

DUCT BANK SECTIONS

GROUNDING DETAILS AND

RID4_8-E502_IFB-RFI.dgn

2

SRK2 07-10-20 BMH ISSUED FOR BID RFI


ADDENDUM NO. 1 – IFB 56358 QUESTIONS/RESPONSES

1

QUESTIONS/RESPONSES

Listed below are the questions (“Q”) Metra has received and the responses (“R”) from our agency: Q1: Is the project fully funded?

R1: Yes.

Q2: When does Metra anticipate to award this project?

R2: If awarded, Metra anticipates awarding a contract within 120 days of the bid opening.

Q3: When does Metra anticipate to issue Notice To Proceed for this project?

R3: See Proposal/Contract, Page 3, Section 2.0 PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE.

Q4: Please confirm there are no allowances as part of the base bid.

R4: Confirmed, no allowances are requested on the project.

Q5: Existing Utilities: Are there any Metra / UPRR / 3rd party signal, power, communication, fiber optic lines on the existing railroad right of way? Please provide as-built drawings these utilities exist.

R5: Refer to updated section 01 05 00 and drawing C301 for subsurface utility locating requirements. Existing water piping and compressed air lines but there are no record documents identifying them.

Q6: Existing Utilities: Who is responsible to locate Metra / UPRR / 3rd party utilities on the jobsite (i.e. signal, power, communications, fiber, etc.)?

R6: This is the responsibility of the contractor. Refer to section 01 05 00.

Q7: Site Supervision: Please confirm a full-time non-working superintendent is required on-site while work is taking place.

R7: Confirmed per section 00 10 00.

Q8: Insurance: Please confirm the contractor does not need to secure a railroad protective liability insurance project for Metra.

R8: Confirmed. See Exhibit G.

Q9: Insurance: Exhibit G requires contractors to obtain Comprehensive General Liability insurance policy of $3M/occurrence, $6M/aggregate. Will Metra allow our primary CGL insurance policy of $2M/occurrence, $4M/aggregate and supplement the shortfall in the primary policy with $25M in umbrella coverage?


2

R9: Yes.

Q10: Wayside Power Boxes: Are existing wayside power boxes to be removed?

R10: Yes, existing wayside power boxes are to be removed and replaced, refer to ED602, E602.

Q11: Wayside Power Boxes: Please provide a specification for the proposed wayside power boxes.

R11: Refer to section 26 27 33.10 - HEAD END POWER CABINET.

Q12: Wayside Power Boxes: Is the contractor responsible to furnish (2) 15 foot train connector cable/plugs per proposed wayside power box, or are these furnished by Metra?

R12: Yes, contractor is responsible, refer to note 2 on E501.

Q13: Work by Metra, Drawing C302: Please confirm the contractor does NOT need to provide dumpsters/hauling for waste generated by Metra.

R13: Contractor required to provide dumpsters for waste generated by Metra as shown on drawing C302.

Q14: Construction Budget: What is the estimated construction budget for the project? It does not appear on Metra's Annual Procurement Plan.

R14: Metra does not release this information.

Q15: Flaggers: Are flaggers required when working outside of 25' from active tracks?

R15: No flaggers are required when working outside of 25’ from active tracks.

Q16: Flaggers: Please confirm the cost of flaggers is borne by Metra.

R16: Yes, flaggers cost will be covered by Metra.

Q17: New / Existing Services: Please confirm Metra will pay for the costs of new services and / or modifications to existing services for this project. (ComEd, People's Gas, AT&T, etc.)

R17: Yes, Metra will pay cost for new service.

Q18: Permits: What permits is the contractor required to obtain for this project? Please provide a list with an estimated cost of each permit so all contractors estimate the same amount.

R18: The contractor is responsible to make this determination.

Q19: Permits: Has Metra begun the City of Chicago, Office of Underground Coordination review process for earth retention and underground construction? Our experience with this process is that it takes +/- three (3) months to complete the review, if it is approved on the first submission.


3

R19: An IR was submitted at the beginning of design in 2017. Excavations are not expected to exceed 12 ft. below grade.

Q20: Field Office: Does the contractor need to furnish Metra a field office on site?

R20: Yes, the contractor will have to furnish Metra a Field Office on site.

Q21: Field Office: Where is the Metra field office to be located on site?

R21: Field Office will be located in Metra Yard at 49th St. horizontal from the entrance of the gate.

Q22 Field Office: Where is the Contractor's field office to be locted on site?

R22: Field Office will be located in Metra Yard at 49th St. horizontal from the entrance of the gate.

Q23: Asbestos / Lead: Is Metra aware of any Asbestos Containing Materials / Lead on the project site as part of this scope of work?

R23: Refer to "Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey" as identified in the reference documents attached to the specifications.

Q24: Asbestos / Lead: If Asbestos Containing Materials / Lead are encountered, please confirm that any work associated with abatement and/or removal will be paid via change order.

R24: If Asbestos Containting Materials/Lead are encountered, contractor shall notify Metra Project Manager concerning issue.

Q25: Spoils: Are the spoils generated from this project assumed to be clean CCDD spoils or Subtitle D spoils?

R25: Refer to "Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey" as identified in the reference documents attached to the specifications.

Q26: Spoils: Please confirm Metra will sign all manifests as the generator of spoils for all contaminated material hauling.

R26: Metra will sign as the generator for all soil disposal paperwork.

Q27: Soil Borings: Please provide soil borings noting ground water elevations for this project.

R27: One environmental soil boring was conducted to 8 feet below grade. No groundwater was encountered in that boring.

Q28: Soil Testing: Is the contractor required to perform a CCDD soils test?


4

R28: No. Soils shall be disposed of at a Subtitle D landfill. One waste characterization sample was collected and the results are included in the “Limited Site Investigation and Hazardous Materials Survey” attached to the specification under REFERENCE DOCUMENTS. Any additional sampling required for waste disposal profiling shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

Q29: Existing Switchgear: Please provide details of the existing switchgear vault and foundation to be removed and backfilled.

R29: This information was not found in existing record documents and is not available.

Q30: Existing TUSS-1: Is existing TUSS-1 to remain?

R30: Yes, TUSS-1 is existing to remain.

Q31: Existing TUSS-2: Please confirm existing TUSS-2 and associated concrete pads are to be removed once the proposed TUSS-2 is operational.

R31 Yes, this is correct.

Q32: Existing Utilities, C301, Note 4: Drawing C301, Note 4 states DIGGER is to perform ground penetrating radar survey prior to construction. To our knowledge, DIGGER does not perform this service, only general utility locating. Please advise.

R32: The contractor will be responsible for calling DIGGER and hiring a surveyor for the subsurface investigation as identified in RFI 33.

Q33: Existing Utilities, C301, Note 4: Is the contractor required to perform a true ground penetrating radar survey? If so, what is the extent? We would assume only locations where we are performing undergorund work.

R33: Yes, as requested in C301. This is only for the areas where the contractor will be performing below grade work.

Q34: Existing Flood Lights, "ED" Drawings: The "ED" drawings note "relocate flood lights to nearest building wall" at various locations. Please provide a quantity and details of how these lights are mounted and powered.

R34: See keyed notes on ED drawings that call out removal and relocation of flood lights. Mounting details shall be determined by the contractor in the field.

Q35: Existing Flood Lights, "ED" Drawings: The "ED" drawings note "relocate flood lights to nearest building wall" at various locations. Can these be relocated to proposed wood poles in lieu of mounting to nearest building wall?

R35: Bid per drawing notes.


5

Q36: Proposed Wood Poles : Please provide a table noting the length of each proposed wood pole.

R36: Pole lengths are identified on drawings C101 and C102.

Q37: Existing Wood Poles: Please provide a table noting the length of each existing wood pole to be removed.

R37: Survey of existing pole heights has not been performed.

Q38: Exhibit K, DBE Requirements: The overhead distribution work is a specialty scope of work with minimal qualified/IDOT certified DBE contractors, and the GC must self-perform 30% of the work, therefor there is not enough remaining conctract value to meet the DBE requirements. Please consider reducing and/or waiving the 25% DBE requirement.

R38: The DBE goal requirement for IFB 56358 will remain 25%. Bidders should review the Illinois Unified Certification Program (IL UCP) directory which contains all DBE firms certified in the State of Illinois to find a DBE subcontractor to be utilized as indicated in Exhibit K Metra Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Compliance Requirements for IFB 56358.

Q39: Work Hours: What are the allowable working hours adjacent to the tracks?

R39: See response to question 42.

Q40: Utility Casings, 33 05 23: Specification 33 05 23 for "Utility Casings" is provided but I cannot locate any on the plans. Please advise if this is required.

R40: Utility casings are no longer required for this project and specification 33 05 23 will be removed.

Q41: Proposed Aerial System: Please confirm the intent of the project is to construct the new pole line/aerial cable system directly next to the existing system while the existing system is "hot".

R41: Confirmed, Metra can not shut the site down for a period long enough to allow for both systems to be de-energized.

Q42: Work Hours: Please confirm that daytime working hours are acceptable except for off-hours cutovers and weekend work associated with track excavation.

R42: Hours for all tasks besides wayside power construction tasks are identified on G100 - please note off-hour tasks are identified, all other tasks can be completed during daytime working hours. Wayside power construction hours are located on drawing C302.

Q43: Shoring System: Since the tracks will be out of service and removed for ductbank excavation, please advise if the use of trench boxes will be acceptable to protect trenches as long as any remaining tracks not removed are not undermined.

R43: This is acceptable.


6

Q44: Lay Down Area: Will Metra provide the contractor with a lay down area on site?

R44: Metra will provide sufficient space for laydown materials on SW corner of property. Contractor responsible for securing equipment stored on site.

Q45: Temporary Fence: Will Metra require the contractor to provide temporary fence to barricade the work area? Or will MUTCD traffic control devices be allowed?

R45: Fencing is not required, MUTCD traffic controlled devices are sufficient.

Q46: Ductbanks, E502: Please confirm ductbanks shown on Sheet E502 are concrete encased.

R46: Yes; E502 shows concrete hatching and E503 details the duct bank construction.

Q47: Ductbanks, E503: Sheet E503 has a detail for reinforced concrete ductbank. Is this applicable to any ductbanks on this project?

R47: Yes, except for TUSS-2 wayside power load duct banks. See response to #48.

Q48: Ductbanks, C304: Please confirm ductbanks shown on Sheet C304 are NOT concrete encased.

R48: Correct. Load duct banks exiting TUSS-2 running under railroad tracks are sand-backfilled.

Q49: Detailing, E101: Sheet E101 references Detail 5/E502, however this detail is not provided. Please provide.

R49: This sheet will be revised with the missing detail.

Q50: Power Distribution Centers, 13 34 23: Is Myers Controlled Power an approved equal manufacturer for the Power Distribution Centers?

R50: Yes, Myers is an approved equal.

Q51: Power Distribution Centers, 13 34 23: Specification 13 34 23, Section 3.05 Testing & Inspection: Notes factory witness test will be observed by up to five (5) of the Owner's representatives. Is the contractor required to cover the cost of Owner's travel?

R51: No, only the factory's costs related to staffing and conducting the FAT. The Owner will cover its representative's travel costs.

Q52: Power Distribution Centers, 13 34 23: Specification 13 34 23, Section 3.05 Testing & Inspection: Notes factory witness test will be observed by up to five(5) of the Owner's representatives. How many trips does Metra anticipate for factory witness testing.

R52: One factory witness testing trip.


7

Q53: Power Distribution Centers, 13 34 23: Specification 13 34 23, Section 3.05 Testing & Inspection: Notes factory witness test will be observed by up to five(5) of the Owner's representatives. What testing is to be performed in the factory.

R53: This is covered in 3.05.F.

Q54: Service Engineer: Does this proejct require the contractor to hire an independent third party service engineer to review submittals, perform commissioning, etc.?

R54: No, this is not specified or required.

Q55: Medium Voltage Cables, 26 05 13: Please confirm the contractor is responsible to furnish to Metra the Test Equipment specified in Section 26 05 13, 2.08.

R55: Confirmed, this is required.

Q56: Medium Voltage Transformers, 26 12 00: Is Neeltran, Inc. an approved equal manufacturer for the Medium Voltage Transformers.

R56: Yes, Neeltran is an acceptable manufacturer.

Q57: Manhole, E503: Sheet E503 shows details for a cast-in-place manhole. Please advise if a precast manhole is acceptable?

R57: Precast manholes are acceptable.

Q58: Manhole, E503: Sheet E503 Section A-A and B-B note a 4" PVC drain to the nearest drainage structure or french drain. Where is the nearest drainage structure or french drain located on the site?

R58: No drainage structures are within practical distance to the new switchgear manhole. Provide french drain as the detail indicates.

ADDENDUM NO. 1 EXHIBIT V

1

U.S. Department of Labor Wage Determinations "General Decision Number: IL20200009 06/19/2020 Superseded General Decision Number: IL20190009 State: Illinois Construction Types: Building, Heavy, Highway and Residential County: Cook County in Illinois. BUILDING, RESIDENTIAL, HEAVY, AND HIGHWAY PROJECTS (does not include landscape projects). Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.80 for calendar year 2020 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.80 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2020. If this contract is covered by the EO and a classification considered necessary for performance of work on the contract does not appear on this wage determination, the contractor must pay workers in that classification at least the wage rate determined through the conformance process set forth in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(ii) (or the EO minimum wage rate,if it is higher than the conformed wage rate). The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Please note that this EO applies to the above-mentioned types of contracts entered into by the federal government that are subject to the Davis-Bacon Act itself, but it does not apply to contracts subject only to the Davis-Bacon Related Acts, including those set forth at 29 CFR 5.1(a)(2)-(60). Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/03/2020 1 01/24/2020 2 02/07/2020 3 06/05/2020 4 06/12/2020 5 06/19/2020 ASBE0017-001 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/INSULATOR


2

Includes the application of all insulating materials, protective coverings, coatings, and finishes to all types of mechanical systems..........$ 50.50 27.80 Fire Stop Technician.............$ 40.40 24.54 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL HANDLER includes preparation, wetting, stripping removal scrapping, vacuuming, bagging and disposal of all insulation materials, whether they contain asbestos or not, from mechanical systems..........$ 38.44 27.35 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BOIL0001-001 05/01/2017 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER......................$ 46.18 29.58 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRIL0021-001 06/01/2016 Rates Fringes BRICKLAYER.......................$ 44.88 26.62 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRIL0021-004 06/01/2017 Rates Fringes Marble Mason.....................$ 44.63 26.83 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRIL0021-006 06/01/2017 Rates Fringes TERRAZZO WORKER/SETTER...........$ 44.38 25.84 TILE FINISHER....................$ 38.56 22.10 TILE SETTER......................$ 45.49 25.72 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRIL0021-009 06/01/2017 Rates Fringes MARBLE FINISHER..................$ 33.95 26.03 ---------------------------------------------------------------- BRIL0021-012 06/01/2017 Rates Fringes Pointer, cleaner and caulker.....$ 45.42 24.06 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * CARP0555-001 06/01/2020


3

BUILDING, HEAVY, AND HIGHWAY Rates Fringes CARPENTER Carpenter, Lather, Millwright, Piledriver, and Soft Floor Layer Building...................$ 49.76 35.86 Heavy & Highway............$ 49.76 35.86 ---------------------------------------------------------------- CARP0555-002 10/01/2018 RESIDENTIAL CONSTRUCTION Rates Fringes CARPENTER........................$ 38.11 32.83 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0009-003 05/31/2020 Rates Fringes Line Construction Groundman...................$ 42.82 61.93% Lineman and Equipment Operator....................$ 54.90 61.93% ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0134-001 06/03/2019 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN......................$ 49.35 3%+34.32 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEC0134-003 06/03/2019 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN ELECTRICAL TECHNICIAN.......$ 44.86 3%+24.72 The work shall consist of the installation, operation, inspection, maintenance, repair and service of radio, television, recording, voice sound vision production and reproduction, telephone and telephone interconnect, facsimile, data appatatus, coaxial, fibre optic and wireless equipment, appliances and systems used for the transmission and reception of signals of any nature, business, domestic, commercial, education, entertainment and residential purposes, including but not limited to communication and telephone, electronic and sound equipment, fibre optic and data communication systems, and the performance of any task directly related to such installation or service whether at new or existing sites, such tasks to include the placing of wire and cable and


4

electrical power conduit or other raceway work within the equipment room and pulling wire and/or cable through conduit and the installation of any incidential conduit. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELEV0002-001 01/01/2020 Rates Fringes ELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 58.47 34.765+a+b FOOTNOTES: a) PAID HOLIDAYS: New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgiving Day; Day after Thanksgiving Day; Veterans' Day and Christmas Day. b) Employer contributes 8% of regular hourly rate as vacation pay credit for employee with more than 5 years of service, and 6% for employee with less than 5 years service ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ENGI0150-006 06/01/2020 Building and Residential Construction Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Power Equipment GROUP 1....................$ 52.10 42.90 GROUP 2....................$ 50.80 42.90 GROUP 3....................$ 48.25 42.90 GROUP 4....................$ 46.50 42.90 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Mechanic; Asphalt Plant*; Asphalt Spreader; Autograde*; Backhoes with Caisson attachment*:Batch Plant*; Benoto(Requires two Engineers); Boiler and Throttle Valve; Caisson Rigs*; Central Redi-Mix Plant*; Combination Backhoe Front Endloader Machine; Compressor and Throttle Valve; Concrete Breaker (Truck Mounted)*; Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Conveyor, Truck Mounted; Concrete Paver over 27E cu. ft.*; Concrete Paver 27E cu ft and Under*; Concrete Placer*; Concrete Placing Boom; Concrete Pump (Truck Mounted); Concrete Tower; Cranes*; Cranes, Hammerhead*; Cranes, (GCI and similar type Requires two operators only); Creter Crane; Crusher, Stone, etc; Derricks; Derricks, Traveling*; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine*; Grader, Elevating; Grouting Machines; Highlift Shovels or Front Endloader 2 1/4 yd. and over; Hoists, Elevators, Outside Type Rack and pinion and similar Machines; Hoists, One, Two, and Three Drum; Hoists, Two Tugger One Floor; Hydraulic Backhoes*; Hydraulic Boom Trucks; Hydraulic Vac (and similar equipment);Locomotives; Motor Patrol*; Pile Drivers amd Skid Rig*; Post Hole Digger; Pre- Stress


5

Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram(Requiring frequent Lubrication and Water); Pump Cretes; Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type Pumps Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Raised and Blind Hole Drill*; Roto Mill Grinder (36"" and Over)*; Roto Mill Grinder (Less Than 36"")*; Scoops-Tractor Drawn; Slip-Form Paver*; Straddle Buggies; Tournapull; Tractor with Boom, and Side Boom; and Trenching Machines*. GROUP 2: Bobcat (over 3/4 cu yd); Boilers; Broom, Power Propelled; Bulldozers; Concrete Mixer (Two Bag and over); Conveyor, Portable; Forklift Trucks; Greaser Engineer; Highlift Shovels or Front End loaders under 2 1/4 cu yd; Aotomatic Hoists, Hoists, Inside Elevators; Hoists, Sewer Dragging Machine; Hoists, Tugger Single Drum; Laser Screed; Rock Drill (Self-Propelled); Rock Drill (Truck Mounted)*; Rollers; Steam Generators; Tractors; Tractor Drawn Vibratory Roller (Receives an additional $.50 per hour); Winch Trucks with ""A"" Frame. GROUP 3: Air Compressor-Small 250 and Under (1 to 5 not to exceed a total of 300 ft); Air Compressor-Large over 250; Combination-Small Equipment Operator; Generator- Small 50 kw and under; Generator-Large over 50 kw; Heaters, Mechanical; Hoists, Inside Elevators (Remodeling or Renovatin work); Hydrualic Power Units (Pile Driving, Extracting, and Drilling); Low Boys; Pumps Over 3"" (1 To 3 not to exceed a total of 300 ft); Pumps, Well Points; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 Small Electric Drill Winches; Bobcat (up to and including 3/4 cu yd) GROUP 4 - Bobcats and/or other Skid Steer Loaders; Brick Forklifts; Oilers *-Requires Oiler ---------------------------------------------------------------- * ENGI0150-025 06/01/2020 Heavy and Highway Construction Rates Fringes OPERATOR: Power Equipment GROUP 1.....................$ 50.30 42.90 GROUP 2.....................$ 49.75 42.90 GROUP 3.....................$ 47.70 42.90 GROUP 4.....................$ 46.30 42.90 GROUP 5.....................$ 45.10 42.90 POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Asphalt Plant*; Asphalt Heater and Planer combination; Asphalt Heater Scarfire*, Asphalt Spreader; Autograder/ GOMACO or similar; ABG Paver*, Backhoes with Caisson attachment*, Ballast Regulator, Belt Loader*; Caisson Rigs*Car Dumper, Central Redi-Mix Plant*,


6

Combination Backhoe; Front End Loader Machine (1 cu yd or over Backhoe bucket or with attachments); Concrete Breaker (truck mounted); Concrete Conveyor; Concrete Paver over 27E cu ft*; Concrete Placer*; Concrete Tube Float; Cranes, all attachments*; Cranes, Hammerhead, Linden, Peco and machines of a like nature*; Creter Crane; Crusher, stone; All Derricks; Derrick Boats; Derricks, traveling*; Dowell Machine with Air Compressor ($1.00 above Class 1); Dredges*; Field Mechanic Welder; Formless Curb and Gutter Machine*; Gradall and machines of a like nature*; Grader, Elevating; Grader, Motor Grader, Motor Patrol, Auto Patrol, Form Grader, Pull Grader, Subgrader; Guard Rail Post Driver mounted*; Hoists, one, two, and three Drum; Hydraulic Backhoes*; Backhoes with Shear attachments*; Mucking Machine; Pile Drivers and Skid Rig*; Pre-Stress Machine; Pump Cretes Dual Ram (requires frequent lubrication and water)*; Rock Drill- Crawler or Skid Rig*; Rock Drill truck mounted*; Rock/ Track Tamper; Roto Mill Grinder, (36"" and over)*; Slip-Form Paver*; Soil Test Drill Rig, truck mounted*; Straddle Buggies; Hydraulic Telescoping Form (tunnel); Tractor Drawn Belt Loader*; Tractor Drawn Belt Loader with attached Pusher (two engineers); Tractor with boom; Tractaire with attachment; Traffic Barrier Transfer Machine*; Trenching Machine; Truck Mounted Concrete Pump with boom*; Underground Boring and/or Mining Machines 5 ft in diameter and over tunnel, etc.*; Wheel Excavator* & Widener (Apsco); Raised or Blind Hoe Drill, Tunnel & Shaft* GROUP 2: Batch Plant*; Bituminous Mixer; Boiler and Throttle Valve; Bulldozer; Car Loader Trailing Conveyors; Combination Backkhoe Front End Loader Machine, (less than 1 cu yd Backhoe Bucket with attachments); Compressor and Throttle Valve; Compressor, common receiver (3); Concrete Breaker or Hydro Hammer; Concrete Grinding Machine; Concrete Mixer or Paver 7S series to and including 27 cu ft; Concrete Spreader; Concrete Curing Machine; Burlap Machine; Belting Machine and Sealing Machine; Concrete Wheel Saw; Conveyor Muck Cars (Haglund or similar type); Drills (all); Finishing Machine-Concrete; Greaser Engineer; Highlift Shovels or Front End Loader; Hoist- Sewer Dragging Machine; Hydraulic Boom Trucks, all attachments; Hydro-Blaster (requires two operators); Laser Screed*; Locomotives, Dinky; Off-Road Hauling Units (including articulating); Pump Cretes; Squeeze Cretes-Screw Type pumps, Gypsum Bulker and Pump; Roller Asphalt; Rotary Snow Plows; Rototiller, Seaman, self-Propelled; Scoops-Tractor Drawn; Self- propelled Compactor; Spreader-Chip-Stone; Scraper; Scraper-Prime Mover in Tandem regardless of size (add $1.00 to Group 2 hourly rate for each hour and for each machine attached thereto add $1.00 to Group 2 hourly rate for each hour); Tank Car Heater; Tractors, Push, pulling Sheeps Foot, Disc, or Compactor, etc; Tug Boats GROUP 3: Boilers; Brooms, all power propelled; Cement Supply Tender; Compressor, Common Receiver (2); Concrete Mixer, two bag and over; Conveyor, Portable; Farm type Tractors


7

used for mowing, seeding, etc; Fireman on Boilers; Forklift Trucks; Grouting Machines; Hoists, Automatic; Hoists, all Elevators; Hoists, Tugger single Drum; Jeep Diggers; Low Boys; Pipe Jacking Machines; Post-hole Digger; Power Saw, Concrete, Power Driven; Pug Mills; Rollers, other than asphalt; Seed and Straw Blower; Steam Generators; Stump Machine; Winch Trucks with A-Frame; Work Boats; Tamper-Form motor driven GROUP 4: Air compressor - Small 250 and under (1 to 5 not to exceed a total of 300 ft); Air Compressor - Large over 250; Combination - Small Equipment Operator; Directional Boring Machine; Generators - Small 50 kw and under; Generators - Large , over 50 kw; Heaters, Mechanical; Hydraulic power unit (Pile Driving, Extracting or Drilling); Light Plants (1 to 5); Pumps, over 3"" (1 to 3, not to exceed a total of 300 ft); Pumps, Well Points; Tractaire; Welding Machines (2 through 5); Winches, 4 small electric drill winches; GROUP 5: Bobcats (All); Brick Forklifts; Oilers; Directional Boring *Requires Oiler ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0001-026 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER Sheeter.....................$ 50.88 39.37 Structural and Reinforcing..$ 50.63 39.37 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0063-001 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 51.63 37.73 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * IRON0063-002 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER Fence Erector...............$ 42.88 29.18 ---------------------------------------------------------------- IRON0136-001 07/01/2018 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER Machinery Movers; Riggers; Macinery Erectors...........$ 41.00 33.96 Master Riggers..............$ 43.50 33.96 ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0002-006 06/01/2018


8

Rates Fringes LABORER (BUILDING & RESIDENTIAL) GROUP 1....................$ 42.72 28.19 GROUP 2....................$ 42.72 28.19 GROUP 3....................$ 42.80 28.19 GROUP 4....................$ 42.82 28.19 GROUP 5....................$ 42.87 28.19 GROUP 6....................$ 42.92 28.19 GROUP 7....................$ 42.95 28.19 GROUP 8....................$ 43.05 28.19 GROUP 9....................$ 43.07 28.19 GROUP 10....................$ 43.17 28.19 GROUP 11....................$ 43.00 28.19 GROUP 12....................$ 43.72 28.19 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Building Laborers; Plasterer Tenders; Pumps for Dewatering; and other unclassified laborers. GROUP 2: Fireproofing and Fire Shop laborers. GROUP 3: Cement Gun. GROUP 4: Chimney over 40 ft.; Scaffold Laborers. GROUP 5: Cement Gun Nozzle Laborers (Gunite); Windlass and capstan person. GROUP 6: Stone Derrickmen & Handlers. GROUP 7: Jackhammermen; Power driven concrete saws; and other power tools. GROUP 8: Firebrick & Boiler Laborers. GROUP 9: Chimney on fire brick; Caisson diggers; & Well Point System men. GROUP 10: Boiler Setter Plastic Laborers. GROUP 11: Jackhammermen on fire brick work only. GROUP 12: Dosimeter use (any device) monitoring nuclear exposure); Asbestos Abatement Laborer; Toxic and Hazardous Waste Removal Laborers. ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0002-007 06/01/2018 Rates Fringes LABORER (HEAVY & HIGHWAY)


9

GROUP 1.....................$ 42.72 28.19 GROUP 2.....................$ 42.80 28.19 GROUP 3.....................$ 42.87 28.19 GROUP 4.....................$ 43.00 28.19 GROUP 5.....................$ 42.72 28.19 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Common laborer; Tenders; Material expeditor (asphalt plant); Street paving, Grade separation, sidewalk, curb & gutter, strippers & All laborers not otherwise mentioned GROUP 2: Asphalt tampers & smoothers; Cement gun laborers GROUP 3: Cement Gun Nozzle (laborers), Gunite GROUP 4: Rakers, Lutemen; Machine-Screwmen; Kettlemen; Mixermen; Drun-men; Jackhammermen (asphalt); Paintmen; Mitre box spreaders; Laborers on birch, overman and similar spreader equipment; Laborers on APSCO; Laborers on air compressor; Paving Form Setter; Jackhammermen (concrete); Power drive concrete saws; other power tools. GROUP 5: Asbestos Abatement Laborers; Toxic and Hazardous Waste Removal Laborers, Dosimeter (any device) monitoring nuclear exposure ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0002-008 06/01/2018 Rates Fringes LABORER (Compressed Air) 0 - 15 POUNDS...............$ 43.72 28.19 16 - 20 POUNDS..............$ 44.22 28.19 21 - 26 POUNDS..............$ 44.72 28.19 27 - 33 POUNDS..............$ 45.72 28.19 34 - AND OVER...............$ 46.72 28.19 LABORER (Tunnel and Sewer) GROUP 1.....................$ 42.72 28.19 GROUP 2.....................$ 42.85 28.19 GROUP 3.....................$ 42.95 28.19 GROUP 4.....................$ 43.07 28.19 GROUP 5.....................$ 42.72 28.19 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS (TUNNEL) GROUP 1: Cage tenders; Dumpmen; Flagmen; Signalmen; Top laborers GROUP 2: Air hoist operator; Key board operator; concrete laborer; Grout; Lock tenders (Free Air Side); Steel setters; Tuggers; Switchmen; Car pusher GROUP 3: Concrete repairmen; Lock tenders (pressure side);


10

Mortar men; Muckers; Grout machine operators; Track layers GROUP 4: Air trac drill operator; Miner; Bricklayer tenders; Concrete blower operator; Drillers; Dynamiters; Erector operator; Form men; Jackhammermen; Powerpac; Mining machine operators; Mucking machine operator; Laser beam operator; Liner plate and ring setters; Shield drivers; Power knife operator; Welder- burners; Pipe jacking machine operator; skinners; Maintenance technician GROUP 5: Asbestos abatement laborer; Toxic and hazardous waste removal laborer; Dosimeter (any device) monitoring nuclear exposure LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS (SEWER) GROUP 1: Signalmen; Top laborers and All other laborers GROUP 2: Concrete laborers and Steel setters GROUP 3: Cement carriers; Cement mixers; Concrete repairmen; Mortar men; Scaffold men; Second Bottom men GROUP 4: Air trac drill operator; Bottom men; Bracers-bracing; Bricklayer tenders; Catch basin diggers; Drainlayers; dynamiters; Form men; Jackhammermen; Powerpac; Pipelayers; Rodders; Welder-burners; Well point systems men GROUP 5: Asbestos abatement laborer, Toxic and hazardous waste removal laborer; Dosimeter (any device) monitoring nuclear exposure ---------------------------------------------------------------- LABO0225-001 06/01/2018 Rates Fringes LABORER (DEMOLITION/WRECKING) GROUP 1.....................$ 37.52 28.19 GROUP 2.....................$ 42.72 28.19 GROUP 3.....................$ 42.72 28.19 LABORER CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1 - Complete Demolition GROUP 2 - Interior Wrecking and Strip Out Work GROUP 3 - Asbestos Work with Complete Demolition/Wrecking or Strip Out Work ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0014-001 06/01/2018 Rates Fringes


11

PAINTER (including taper)........$ 46.55 27.24 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PAIN0027-001 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes GLAZIER..........................$ 44.85 37.72 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0005-002 07/01/2015 Rates Fringes PLASTERER........................$ 42.25 26.65 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLAS0502-001 06/01/2018 Rates Fringes CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 45.25 33.48 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0130-001 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes PLUMBER..........................$ 51.00 31.47 ---------------------------------------------------------------- PLUM0597-002 06/01/2019 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER.......................$ 49.60 33.09 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ROOF0011-001 06/01/2020 Rates Fringes ROOFER...........................$ 45.45 25.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SFIL0281-001 01/01/2018 Rates Fringes SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 48.10 27.05 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0073-001 06/08/2018 Rates Fringes Sheet Metal Worker...............$ 44.25 37.02 ---------------------------------------------------------------- SHEE0073-002 06/08/2018 Rates Fringes Sheet Metal Worker ALUMINUM GUTTER WORK........$ 31.32 37.02


12

---------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0731-001 06/01/2017 COOK COUNTY - HEAVY AND HIGHWAY Rates Fringes TRUCK DRIVER 2 or 3 Axles................$ 35.60 22.10 4 Axles.....................$ 35.85 22.10 5 Axles.....................$ 36.05 22.10 6 Axles.....................$ 36.25 22.10 FOOTNOTES: A. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. B. 900 straight time hours or more in 1 calendar year for the same employer shall receive 1 week paid vacation; 3 years - 2 weeks paid vacation; 10 years - 3 weeks paid vacation; 20 years - 4 weeks paid vacation. C. An additional $.20 per axle shall be paid for all vehicles with more than six (6) axles. ---------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0731-002 03/01/2012 Rates Fringes Traffic Control Device Monitor TRAFFIC SAFETY WORKER: Primary duties include but are not limited to the delivery, maintenance and pick-up of traffic control devices, the set-up and installation of traffic signs, pavement markings, barricades, crash barrels and glare screens, traffic control surveillance, the repair and maintenance trucks, cars, arrow boards, message signs, barricade and sign fabrication equipment.......$ 28.25 9.08 ---------------------------------------------------------------- TEAM0786-001 06/01/2017 COOK COUNTY - BUILDING AND RESIDENTIAL Rates Fringes


13

TRUCK DRIVER 2 & 3 Axles.................$ 39.942 0.25+a 4 Axles.....................$ 39.75 0.25+a 5 Axles.....................$ 39.967 0.25+a 6 Axles.....................$ 40.184 0.25+a FOOTNOTES: a. $719.00 per week. An additional $.20 per axle shall be paid for all vehicles with more than six (6) axles. Paid Holidays: New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day, and Christmas Day. 900 straight time hours or more in 1 calendar year for the same employer shall receive 1 week paid vacation; 3 years - 2 weeks paid vacation; 10 years - 3 weeks paid vacation; 20 years - 4 weeks paid vacation. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================ Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- The body of each wage determination lists the classification


14

and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of ""identifiers"" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local), a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate). Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than ""SU"" or ""UAVG"" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the ""SU"" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in


15

the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. ---------------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.) and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue.


16

3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION"